I-CON® Controller

LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

HD-11 Door Operator with UIT
I-2® / I-3® Valve
Every attempt has been made to ensure that this documentation is as accurate and up-to-date as possible.
However, Vertical Express assumes no liability for consequences, directly or indirectly, resulting from any error or
omission. The material contained herein is subject to revision. Please report any problems with this manual to
Vertical Express, P.O. Box 2019, Memphis, Tennessee 38101.

Vertical Express • P.O. Box 2019 • Memphis, Tennessee 38101

© 2012 Vertical Express. All rights reserved.

Published May, 2012
Second Edition
Printed in the United States of America

Manual Number: 89171 v.2.0

I-CON Controller Contents

I-CON® Controller
Contents
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Arrival of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

INSTALLATION SECTION
Preliminary Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Prepare For Temporary Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Temporary Run Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Electronic Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic Starter Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP100 Overloads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Overload Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Selector Tape Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Hoistway Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Simplex Hoistway Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Duplex Hoistway Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hoistway Wiring Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Mid-Hatch Box To Wireway and Machine Room Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Close Landing Equipment (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Car Top Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Swing Return Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Machine Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Controller Card Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Printed in USA May, 2012 1

Contents I-CON Controller

Contents
(continued)

ADJUSTMENT SECTION
Preliminary Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Temporary Operation Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Car Top Inspection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Selector Tape Magnet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Selector Tape and Box Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Slowdown and Directional Magnet Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Bottom Slowdown (NTSB) Magnet Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Bottom Directional Limit (DLB) Magnet Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Top Slowdown (NTST) Magnet Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Top Directional Limit (DLT) Magnet Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Selector Floor Magnet Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Preliminary Hoistway Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Door Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Hoistway Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Prepare for Initial Automatic Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Valve Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Selector Level Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Floor Position and Leveling Magnet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Terminal Slowdown Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ESP100 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Solid State Starter Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Operational Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Group Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Options Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2 Vertical Express
I-CON Controller Contents

Contents
(continued)

User Interface Tool (UIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Service Code Reference Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ICON UIT Quick Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
UIT Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Car/Group Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Car Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Adjustments Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

DIAGNOSTICS SECTION
Car Adjustments and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Prefix Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Adjustments and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Car Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Group Adjustments and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Car and Group Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Group Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Group Control Status Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

CPU - WD LED On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
CPU - INIT LED On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
CPU - F6K STAT LED On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
LSRVA/LSRVB LED On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Selector Assembly Cards, TSM and TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Inputs / Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
Door Communications Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Solid State Starter Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Printed in USA May, 2012 3

Contents I-CON Controller

Contents
(continued)

SERVICE INFORMATION SECTION

Change or Replace Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Setup for ICON Communications with Windows HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Upload CPU Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Selector Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Change the CPU Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Group Car CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Simplex Car CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Directional Limit Function Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Bottom Directional Limit (DLB) Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Top Directional Limit (DLT) Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

I/O Expansion Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

JP4 on 6300JG_ 24vdc Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
JP5 on 6300JH_ High Voltage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

33-inch Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
42-inch Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Starter Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

4 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions ICON Controller

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment safety
information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

Printed in USA May, 2012 5

ICON Controller Safety Precautions

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety
information on installation and service.

6 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions ICON Controller

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the Vertical Express Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Printed in USA May, 2012 7

ICON Controller Contents

Contents

This page
intentionally
left blank.

8 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Preliminary Installation

Preliminary Installation
See the Vertical Express Installers Manual to install the following components:
• Rail brackets and rails.
• Pit channels, jack, and buffers.
• Car sling and platform.
• Power unit / Controller.
• Oil line.

Do not apply power to the controller until so instructed.

Notes:
• The controller cabinet height can be adjusted at the job site.
• Use the proper door operator manual for the job specific type operator.

Prepare For Temporary Operation

Requirements
• Mainline supply wired with disconnect, circuit breaker, or fuses.
• Temporary run box.

1. With the power OFF, measure the voltage on the incoming side of the mainline disconnect.
2. Check the controller nameplate for design voltage and compare this to the voltage from Step 1.
If they do not match ±5%, do not continue until the problem is resolved.
3. Ensure that the XFMR1 transformer taps match the mainline voltage. See Figure 1and Table 1
on page 10.
4. Verify that the output side of the mainline disconnect is wired to L1, L2, and L3 on the starter.
See the job wiring diagrams.

Field Access Panel

TCID Card HCID Card

XFMR2 and XFMR3

(behind contactor CPU Card
bracket)
CNWIF Card

Electronic Modules

CHR3T Din rail

CHR4T Din rail

XFMR1 Temporary Run

Connector

Figure 1 - Controller Component Layout

Printed in USA May, 2012 9

Prepare For Temporary Operation INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Prepare For Temporary Operation

(continued)

Primary Secondary
Print No.
Voltage Connections Configuration Voltage Connections Configuration
874DA1 208 H1 & H2 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
240 H1 & H4 H1-H3, H2-H4
874DA2 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
480 H1 & H4 H2-H3
874DA3* 240 H1 & H4 H1-H3, H2-H4 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
380 H1 & H2
874DA4* 400 H1 & H3 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
416 H1 & H4
874DA5 600 H1 & H2 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
200 H1 & H2
874DA6** None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
220 H1 & H3
874DB1 208 H1 & H2 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
240 H1 & H4 H1-H3, H2-H4
874DB2 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
480 H1 & H4 H2-H3
874DB3 600 H1 & H2 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
200 H1 & H2
874DC1* None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
220 H1 & H3
380 H1 & H2
874DC3* 400 H1 & H3 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
415 H1 & H4
208 H1 & H2
874DJ1 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
575 H1 & H2
380 H1 & H2
874DJ2* 400 H1 & H3 None 120 X1-X4 X1-X3, X2-X4
415 H1 & H4
230 H1 & H4 H1-H3, H2-H4
874DK1 120 X1-X2 None
460 H1 & H4 H2-H3
230 H1 & H4 H1-H3, H2-H4
874DL1 120 X1-X2 None
460 H1 & H4 H2-H3
874DL2* 208 H1 & H2 None 120 X1-X3 None
874DL3* 575 H1 & H4 None 120 X1-X3 None
* Used for 50 Hz and 60 Hz applications.
** Used ONLY for 50 Hz applications.

Table 1 - XFMR1, XFMR2, and XFMR3 Transformer Adjustment Wiring

10 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Prepare For Temporary Operation

Prepare For Temporary Operation

(continued)
5. On jobs with battery lowering, verify the following connections. See Figure 2.
If connected, unplug,
• The UPS line cord from the cord marked "XFMR1."
• The cord marked "Control" from the UPS output.
6. Plug the cord (male) marked "Control" into the cord (female) marked "XFMR1."
Note: The UPS line cord remains unplugged.

Cord From XFMR1

Cord marked “Control”

UPS Line Cord UPS Unit

Figure 2 - UPS Unit Connections

Temporary Run Box During temporary operation, the 188E CPU card is not energized.
Note: This procedure is for controllers equipped with a temporary run connector mounted near
the bottom of the center panel.
1. Make sure manufacturing has removed the fuse from the P24 fuse holder on the CHR3T Din
Rail. If not, remove and bag it. This action removes P24 power from the control logic.

Do not connect the selector harness to the CWID card with P24 power ON and the
temporary jumpers in place. Doing so may allow the car to move unexpectedly.

2. Disconnect Connectors 9, 11, 17, and 18 on the 188E CPU card.

3. Remove the jumper between CON5-6 and CON5-7 on the CNWIF card.

4. Verify the temporary orange jumpers. See the wiring diagrams and Figure 3 on page 12,
• Electronic Starters: On the starter and on terminals TR101, TRUS, TRUS1, and TRSCG2.
• Across-Line Starters: On terminals TR101, TRUS, TRUS1, and TRSCG2 (TRUS to TRUS1
on two contactor arrangement only).

5. Connect the temporary run box (as shown in Figure 3) to temporarily run the connector in
the controller.

6. Place the RUN/STOP switch in the RUN position.

7. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

8. Verify that LED2 (115VAC) on the CNWIF card is ON.

9. Verify that AC1 (115VAC) LED is ON. The LED is located on the AC1 Electronic Module on the
CHR3T DIN Rail.

Printed in USA May, 2012 11

Prepare For Temporary Operation INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Temporary Run Box

(continued)

CON TR-3 CON TR-4

Temporary NOTE: Color coding shown is for VS Industries

Run Box YELLOW WHT / BLK
Run Button Units. Other brands must be wired
according to CON TR pin assignments.

ON/OFF
Keyswitch
Starter ON / OFF
Keyswitch
RUN/STOP
Switch Fault
Electronic Starting

ORG
Pole 1 RUN/STOP
Switch
Pole 2 GRN / BLK Typical Run Box Layout
PWR

ORG
CON TR-1

Safety RUN

ORG
CON TR-5

DOWN UP MUTS
RED / BLK
BLUE
RED

CON TR-6 DOWN SLOW Solenoid

UP SLOW Solenoid
CON TR-2

CON TR-3 CON TR-4

Temporary
Run Box YELLOW WHT / BLK
NOTE: Color coding shown is for VS Industries
Run Button Units. Other brands must be wired
according to CON TR pin assignments.
ON/OFF
Keyswitch

RUN/STOP ON / OFF
Switch Keyswitch
Pole 1 RUN/STOP
Switch
Across-Line Starting Pole 2 GRN / BLK
CON TR-1 Typical Run Box Layout
Safety CON TR-5

MC-A1 MC-A2
DOWN UP MC
RED / BLK
BLUE

CON TR-6 DOWN SLOW Solenoid

RED

UP SLOW Solenoid

CON TR-2

Figure 3 - Temporary Operation Connections

12 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Prepare For Temporary Operation

Electronic Starter Setup

Prior to energizing the power unit motor, verify the electronic starter overload and starting current.

Verify the Overload and Starting Current Adjustment

1. Confirm that the electronic starter is energized and the LCD displays MOTOR STATUS
STOPPED. See Figure 4.

2. If the LCD displays any message other than MOTOR STATUS STOPPED, consult the Trouble-
shooting section of the 72DV Starter manual.

Top Line
Bottom Line

Scroll Up Button
Exit Menu /
Save Buttn Enter Menu Button

Scroll Down
Button

Figure 4 - Electronic Starter Menu

Setup the Starting Current Adjustment

Note: The Starting Current is 3 X Nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA).

1. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press the LEFT ARROW. The STATUS menu displays.

2. Press the DOWN ARROW twice to display the PARAMETERS menu.

3. Press the RIGHT ARROW. STARTING AMPS displays,

• If the value is correct, continue with Step 5.
• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 4.

4. Press the RIGHT ARROW again to access the value. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW to adjust
the value of the flashing digit. Press the RIGHT ARROW to move to the next digit.

5. Press the LEFT ARROW to exit, the UP ARROW to accept changes (exit and save), or the DOWN
ARROW to reject changes (exit without saving). If necessary, repeat steps 4 and 5.

Printed in USA May, 2012 13

Prepare For Temporary Operation INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Electronic Starter Set Up

(continued)
Setup the Overload Current
Note: The Overload Current should equal the nameplate Full Load AMP's (FLA).

1. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press the LEFT ARROW. The STATUS menu displays.

2. Press the DOWN ARROW twice and PARAMETERS displays.

3. Press the RIGHT ARROW and STARTING AMPS displays.

4. Press the DOWN ARROW until OVERLOAD AMPS appears in the display,
• If the value is correct, continue with Step 6.
• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 5.
5. Press the RIGHT ARROW. Press the RIGHT ARROW again to access the value. Press the UP or
DOWN ARROW to adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press the RIGHT ARROW to move to the
next digit.

6. Press the LEFT ARROW to exit, the UP ARROW to accept changes (exit and save), or the DOWN
ARROW to reject changes (exit without saving). If necessary, repeat steps 5 and 6.

Mechanical Starter Set Up

with ESP100 Overloads
ESP100 Overload Current settings are preset by manufacturing. The following initial adjustment can
also be used during temporary operation for jobs that trip overloads, but the actual overload current
will be set during final adjustment.

1. See Table 1 or Table 2 on page 15 to determine the overload current setting based on motor
horsepower and voltage or nameplate amps.

2. Set the full load amps adjustment dial to the overload current setting from Step 1. See
Figure 5.

Figure 5 - ESP100 Overload Adjustment

14 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Prepare For Temporary Operation

Overload Specifications

Motor Motor Nameplate Line or Phase Overload Overload ThyssenKrupp

HP Voltage Amps Wiring Configuration Current Setting Current Range Overload No.
200V/208V 46 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 50.0 30-60 660BB6
7.5
230V 40 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 43.0 30-60 660BB6
200V/208V 58 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 62.0 45-90 660BB7
10
230V 50 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 54.0 45-90 660BB7

Table 1 - Overload Specifications For Single Phase Motors

Line or Phase Line or Phase

Motor Motor Nameplate Wiring Overload Overload Motor Motor Nameplate Wiring Overload Overload
HP Voltage Amps Configuration Current Setting Current Range HP Voltage Amps Configuration Current Setting Current Range
5 200V/208V 17.5 LINE 25.0 13-27 30 200V/208V 92 LINE 131.6 67-135
220V 15.9 LINE 22.8 13-27 220V 84 LINE 120.1 67-135
230V 15.2 LINE 21.7 13-27 230V 80 LINE 114.4 67-135
380V 9.2 LINE 13.2 9-18 380V 48 LINE 68.6 45-90
415V 8.4 LINE 12.1 9-18 415V 44 LINE 62.9 45-90
460V 7.6 LINE 10.9 9-18 460V 40 LINE 57.2 30-60
575V 6.1 LINE 8.7 5-10 575V 32 LINE 45.8 30-60
7.5 200V/208V 25 LINE 35.8 20-40 40 200V/208V 120 PHASE 99.1 67-135
220V 23 LINE 32.9 20-40 220V 109 PHASE 90.0 45-90
230V 22 LINE 31.5 20-40 230V 104 PHASE 85.9 45-90
380V 13 LINE 18.6 13-27 380V 63 LINE 90.1 67-135
415V 12 LINE 17.2 9-18 415V 57 LINE 81.5 45-90
460V 11 LINE 15.7 9-18 460V 52 LINE 74.4 45-90
575V 9 LINE 12.9 9-18 575V 41 LINE 58.6 30-60
10 200V/208V 32 LINE 45.8 30-60 50 200V/208V 150 PHASE 123.8 67-135
220V 29 LINE 41.5 22-45 220V 136 PHASE 112.3 67-135
230V 28 LINE 40.0 22-45 230V 130 PHASE 107.3 67-135
380V 17 LINE 24.3 13-27 380V 79 LINE 113.0 67-135
415V 15 LINE 21.5 13-27 415V 72 LINE 103.0 67-135
460V 14 LINE 20.0 13-27 460V 65 LINE 93.0 67-135
575V 11 LINE 15.7 9-18 575V 52 LINE 74.4 45-90
15 200V/208V 48 LINE 68.6 45-90 60 200V/208V 177 PHASE 146.0 90-180
220V 44 LINE 62.9 45-90 220V 161 PHASE 132.9 67-135
230V 42 LINE 60.1 45-90 230V 154 PHASE 127.1 67-135
380V 25 LINE 35.8 20-40 380V 93 LINE 133.0 67-135
415V 23 LINE 32.9 20-40 415V 85 LINE 121.6 67-135
460V 21 LINE 30.0 20-40 460V 77 LINE 110.1 67-135
575V 17 LINE 24.3 13-27 575V 62 LINE 88.7 45-90
20 200V/208V 62 LINE 88.7 45-90 75 200V/208V 221 PHASE 180.0 90-180
220V 56 LINE 80.1 45-90 220V 201 PHASE 166.0 90-180
230V 54 LINE 77.2 45-90 230V 192 PHASE 158.0 90-180
380V 33 LINE 47.2 30-60 380V 116 PHASE 95.8 67-135
415V 30 LINE 42.9 22-45 415V 106 PHASE 87.5 45-90
460V 27 LINE 38.6 20-40 460V 96 PHASE 79.3 45-90
575V 22 LINE 31.5 20-40 575V 77 LINE 110.1 67-135
25 200V/208V 78 LINE 111.5 67-135
220V 71 LINE 101.5 67-135
230V 68 LINE 97.2 67-135
380V 41 LINE 58.6 30-60
415V 37 LINE 52.9 30-60
460V 34 LINE 48.6 30-60
575V 27 LINE 38.6 20-40

Table 2 - Overload Specifications For ESP 100 Overload Applications

Printed in USA May, 2012 15

Prepare For Temporary Operation INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Pump Motor Rotation

IMPORTANT! For Electronic Starters: Swapping motor leads to correct motor rotation will result in a
motor wiring fault. Motor rotation is controlled through adjustments in the starter and the
line input to the starter.

1. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

2. Momentarily press UP and SAFE on the temporary run box, and observe the direction of the
motor rotation (clockwise rotation is standard for ThyssenKrupp equipment when viewed from
the shaft end).
ABC = Standard Dry (AP) units (CW rotation when viewed from the shaft end). The motor is
mounted to the left of the pump.
CBA = Standard Wet (EP) units (CCW rotation as viewed from the pump end).

• If the motor rotation is correct, continue to Step 7.

• If the rotation is incorrect, complete the appropriate procedure below.

3. For Mechanical Starters - Reverse L1 and L2 on the starter.

4. For Electronic Starters - Change the line rotation setting in the starter.

a. Press the LEFT ARROW once. The STATUS menu displays.

b. Press the DOWN ARROW twice. The PARAMETERS menu.

c. Press the RIGHT ARROW once. STARTING AMPS displays.

d. Press the DOWN ARROW until LINE ROTATION displays.

e. Press the RIGHT ARROW to access the value.

f. Press the UP ARROW for CBA, or the DOWN ARROW for ABC.

g. Press the LEFT ARROW to select the value displayed.

h. Press the UP ARROW to accept the value, or the DOWN ARROW to reject the change.
Note: If the wrong value is accepted, repeat Steps e. through h.

16 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Prepare For Temporary Operation

Pump Motor Rotation

(continued)

5. Verify the correct motor wiring. See Figure 6.

Figure 6 - Electronic Starter Pump Motor Wiring Diagram

6. Check the motor rotation direction. If the direction is incorrect or if the motor is making loud
sounds, swap two phase leads at the top of the controller’s main line fuses (FL1 - FL3).

7. Confirm the motor rotation.

Note: It may take multiple attempts to get the incoming line phase relationship correct.

Printed in USA May, 2012 17

Selector Tape Mounting INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Selector Tape Mounting

Required Material

• 1 - Selector tape (net travel + 12" long).

• 2 - Tape support brackets.
• 2 - Spring plates.
• 2 - Selector tape plates.
• 2 - Selector tape springs, 1.0" x 10.0" long.
• 6 - Rail clips.
• 9 - 3/8" bolts, washers, lockwashers, and nuts.
• 6 - 1/2" bolts, lockwashers, and nuts.

The selector tape is constructed of spring steel. Use extreme caution when cutting
the band that holds the selector tape onto the spool.

The selector tape must be handled carefully. One kink ruins the entire tape.

1. Install the top tape support bracket. See the job layout for the proper quadrant and position,
and Figure 7 on page 19 for all steps in this procedure.

2. Attach the selector tape to the top tape support bracket; loop the tape over the bracket as
shown.
Note: The loop should be a minimum of 6" at the widest point.

3. Move to the bottom of the hoistway, and attach a spring plate and tape plate to the selec-
tor tape at a point that will be no less than 6" below the selector box when the car is on the
buffers.

4. Install the bottom tape support bracket on the guide rail 18 1/2" below the bottom of the spring
plate.

5. Install the other spring plate on the tape support bracket.

Note: Ensure that the selector tape is between the spring plate and bracket.

6. Stretch the two (2) selector tape springs between the spring plates. If properly installed, the
springs will be 1 1/2 times their normal length, e.g., a 10" spring will be stretched to 15".

7. Check the bow in the selector tape for the dimension given in Figure 7. If the bow is incorrect,
adjust the tape at the bottom support bracket.

8. Ensure that the selector tape is even with the bottom spring plate, and then cut off the excess
selector tape.

9. Verify that the centerline of the selector tape is aligned within 1/16" of the guide rails center-
line, and also make certain that the tape is free of kinks throughout the hoistway.

18 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Selector Tape Mounting

Selector Tape Mounting

(continued)

Hex Nut Helical Lock Washer 1/2 " Z

1/2 " Z
Lock Washer Pyramidal Tooth 1/2 " Z
Selector Tape Support Bracket
Tape Plate

Rail Clip 8 #
Helical Lock Washer 3/8" Z
Formed Rail

Hex Nut 3/8" Z Hex Head Cap Screw

1/2 " Z 1 1/2 " Z
Hex Nut
3/8" Z
6" Minimum

Hex Head
Cap Screw
3/8" 1" Z

Spring Plate

Hex Nut 3/8" Z

Helical Lock Washer 3/8" Z

Tape Plate 1" to 2"

Bow
Flat Washer 3/8" Z
18 1/2”

Selector Tape Springs Extend to 1.5

NOTE: Springs must be times original
extended to 1.5 times size (app. 15 1/4”)
their original size.

Spring Plate Selector Tape

Support Bracket

Selector Tape

Cut Selector Tape flush

with Spring Plate

Figure 7 - Selector Tape Installation

Printed in USA May, 2012 19

Hoistway Wiring INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Hoistway Wiring
Wireway and Conduit Layout

This procedure is a suggested method of installation. See the job wiring diagrams, and the wiring
diagrams on the following pages.

Required Wireways / Conduits,

• Hall station and door interlock riser.
• Machine room to junction box.
• Hoistway access and final limits (if required).
• Controller cross-connects (group jobs only).

1. Mount the junction box to the guide rail at a point above the center point of car travel and also
above the entrance header. See the job layout for the proper quadrant.

2. Run conduit or wireway from the power unit/controller in the machine room to the junction box.

3. Install the hall station and the door interlock riser.

4. Run conduit and mount the hall signal fixture boxes.

5. Run conduit and mount the boxes for position indicators, lanterns, and the pit stop switch.

6. Run conduit for final limits as required.

20 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Hoistway Wiring

Simplex Hoistway Wiring

1/2” Flex
(typical) 3/4" EMT
4" x 4" Box 2 1/2" x 4"
Top Final Limit Wireway End Cap
(if required)

1/2” Flex
Rear PI or Combo PI/Lantern (typical)

1/2” Flex Rear Rear Hall Station

Front PI or Interlock
(typical)
Combo PI/Lantern 1/2” Flex
(typical)

4"x 4" Box

Front
Interlock 3/4" EMT
Front Hall
Station 2 1/2" x 4"
Mid-Hatch Wireway Connector
1" EMT Run From Mid Junction Box
(typical)
Hatch Box to 2 1/2" x 4" 1/2” Flex
Wireway (run between door (typical) Hall Station and
openings, or as required). Door Interlock Riser
2 1/2 " EMT or
2 1/2 " x 4" Wireway
2 1/2 " EMT or 2 1/2" x 4 "
Wireway to Machine Room

1/2” Flex
Pull Box (typical)
Traveling 2 1/2 " x 4" Wireway
Front PI or Cable
Combo PI/Lantern Front
Interlock

3/4" EMT
1/2” Flex
Bottom Final Limit (typical)
(if required)
2 1/2 " x 4"
Wireway End Cap
Pit Stop Switch
Front Hall Station
1/2” Flex
(typical)

Printed in USA May, 2012 21

Hoistway Wiring INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Simplex Hoistway Wiring Details

1/2 " Clamp REAR 1/2 " Straight Connector (Flex)

1/2 " 90 º Connector (Flex) 1/2 " Flex Conduit

4” x 4” Outlet Box

3/4 " EMT and Fittings

Wireway Mounting Bracket

2 1/2” x 4” Wireway (Hall
Station & Door Interlock Riser)
1/2 " Flex Conduit
1/2” Straight
1/2 " 90 º Connector (Flex)
Connector (Flex)

1/2 " Clamp FRONT

HALL LANTERNS or POSITION INDICATORS

REAR
1/2 " Straight Connector (Flex)

1/2 " Flex Conduit 1/2 " 90 º Connector (Flex)

4” x 4” Outlet Box

3/4 " EMT and Fittings

Wireway Mounting Bracket

2 1/2” x 4” Wireway (Hall

Station & Door Interlock Riser)
1/2 " 90º Connector (Flex)
1/2 " Flex Conduit 1/2 " Straight Connector (Flex)

FRONT

HALL STATION or FIRE SERVICE SWITCH

REAR
1/2 " Clamp 1/2 " Straight Connector (Flex)

1/2 " 90 º Connector (Flex) 1/2 " Flex Conduit

4” x 4” Outlet Box

3/4 " EMT and Fittings

Wireway Mounting Bracket

2 1/2” x 4” Wireway (Hall

Station & Door Interlock Riser)

1/2 " 90 º Connector (Flex) 1/2 " Clamp

1/2 " Straight Connector (Flex)

1/2 " Flex Conduit

FRONT

NOTE: Rear openings are optional. DOOR INTERLOCK

22 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Hoistway Wiring

Duplex Hoistway Wiring

Car 1 Rear PI or 2 1/2 " x 4 "

Combo PI/Lantern Wireway End Cap
Car 1 Top Final Limit 3/4” Flex (typical)
1/2” Flex (typical)
3/4" EMT
4" x 4 " Box
Car 1 Rear Interlock Hall Station and
1/2” Flex (typical) Door Interlock Riser
Car 1 Mid-Hatch
3/4" EMT
Junction Box Car 1 Front PI or
Combo PI/Lantern Rear Hall Station
3/4” Flex (typical)
Car 1 Front Interlock 3/4” Flex (typical)
1/2” Flex (typical)
4"x 4 " Box
Car 2 Top Final Limit
1” EMT Run From 3/4" EMT 1/2” Flex (typical)
Mid Hatch Box Front Hall Station
to 2 1/2” x 4” Wireway 3/4" Flex (typical) Car 2 Front PI or
(run between door openings, Combo PI/Lantern
or as required). 3/4” Flex (typical)
2 1/2 " EMT or Car 2 Front
Interlock Car 2 Mid-Hatch Junction Box
2 1/2 " EMT or 2 1/2 " x 4 " 2 1/2 " x 4" Wireway
1/2” Flex
Wireway to Machine Room (typical)
Car 1
Traveling Car 2 Traveling Cable
Cable
Pull Box

Car 1 Front PI or
Combo PI/Lantern
3/4” Flex (typical)

Car 1 Front Interlock 4"x 4" Box

Car 2 Front PI or
Combo PI/Lantern
3/4 " EMT 3/4” Flex (typical)
Car 1 Bottom Final Limit 3/4 " EMT
1/2 " Flex (typical)
Front Hall Station
3/4” Flex (typical) Car 2 Front Interlock
2 1/2 " x 4"
Wireway End Cap
Car 1 Pit Stop Switch
2 1/2 " x 4" Wireway Car 2 Pit Stop Switch 4"x 4" Box
1/2” Flex (typical) Car 2 Bottom Final Limit
1/2” Flex (typical)

Printed in USA May, 2012 23

Hoistway Wiring INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Duplex Hoistway Wiring Details

3/4” Straight Connector (Flex)

Car 2 REAR Car 1

3/4” 90º Connector (Flex) 3/4” Flex Conduit

4” x 4” Outlet Box

3/4 " EMT and Fittings

Wireway Mounting Bracket

2 1/2” x 4” Wireway (Hall

Station & Door Interlock Riser)
3/4” 90º Connector (Flex) 3/4” Flex Conduit
3/4” Straight Connector (Flex)

FRONT

HALL STATION or FIRE SERVICE SWITCH

3/4” Straight Connector (Flex)

Car 2 REAR 3/4 “ Clamp Car 1

3/4” Flex Conduit

3/4” 3/4” EMT

3/4” 90 º Connector (Flex)
Straight Conduit 4” x 4” Outlet Box
Connector with 3/4”
(Flex) 3/4 “ Straight 3/4" EMT and Fittings
Comb. Connector
Coupling
3/4 “
Clamp
3/4” Wireway Mounting Bracket
Flex
Conduit 2 1/2” x 4” Wireway (Hall
Station & Door Interlock Riser)

3/4” Straight
Connector (Flex)

3/4” 90 º Connector (Flex) FRONT 3/4 “ Clamp

HALL LANTERNS or POSITION INDICATORS

1/2 " Clamp 1/2” Straight Connector (flex)

Car 2 REAR Car 1

1/2 " Flex Conduit

4” x 4” Outlet Box

1/2” Straight 1/2” EMT

Connector Conduit with 3/4" EMT and Fittings
(flex) & Straight
1/2 " Connector
Flex (EMT)
Conduit Wireway Mounting Bracket
1/2 " Clamp
1/2 “ Comb. 2 1/2” x 4” Wireway
Coupling
(Hall Station & Door
1/2 " 90 º Interlock Riser)
Connector
1/2” Straight Connector (flex)
(Flex)

Note: Rear Openings are optional. 1/2 " Clamp

FRONT
DOOR INTERLOCK

24 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Hoistway Wiring

Hoistway Wiring Details

Hatch Mounting Assembly

15" - 18" Formed Rail

Mid-Hatch Junction
Box

Flex or EMT
Wireway (Hall Station and
Door Interlock Riser 2 1/2" EMT to
Wireway Mounting Bracket
Machine Room
(Optional)
Kellums Grip
Rail Clip, Bolt, Nut, Washer
2 1/2 " x 4 " Wireway
to Machine Room
Travel Cable (Optional)
to Car

Wireway and Wireway Bracket Mounting Detail

Junction Box Mounting
(one bracket per 10 foot stick of wireway or as required)

Strain Bolt Detail To Mid-Hatch Junction Box

(one bolt per 10 foot section)
To Mid-Hatch Junction Box

2 1/2" EMT
2 1/2" EMT
Connector

2 1/2 " EMT Pull Box

Wireway to 2 1/2 " x 4 "
Machine Room Wireway Elbow

2 1/2 " x 4 " Wireway to Machine Room

2 1/2 " EMT to Machine Room Pull Box Installation (optional) Wireway to Machine Room Installation (optional)

Printed in USA May, 2012 25

Hoistway Wiring INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Mid-Hatch Box To Wireway and Machine Room Wiring

Wireway (Hall Station and

Door Interlock Riser)

Wireway
Mounting
Bracket

1" EMT
Mid Hatch Box
TO MACHINE ROOM

OR
OR
NOTE: Run EMT between landings.

Wireway (Hall
Station and Door
1" EMT Interlock Riser)

Wireway
Mounting
Mid Hatch Box Bracket
TO MACHINE ROOM

OR

OR

Wireway (Hall Station and

Door Interlock Riser)
Wireway
Mounting
Bracket

1" EMT
Mid Hatch Box
TO MACHINE ROOM

OR

26 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors

Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors

Install the Entrance Frames and Hoistway Doors.
See the Vertical Express Entrance component manuals for instructions.

Cab
See the Vertical Express Installation manual for instructions.

Door Operator
Mount the door operator(s) and complete the external mechanical adjustments.
See the job wiring diagrams and the HD-11 with UIT or the LD-03 with UIT Door
Operator component manuals (included in this book) for instructions.

Printed in USA May, 2012 27

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

Required Material

• 1 - Selector stile bracket.

• 1 - Selector assembly.
• 4 - 5/16" bolts, lockwashers, and nuts.

1. Place the car at or near the top of the hoistway.

2. Use two (2) 5/16" hex bolts, nuts, and lockwashers to mount the selector stile bracket to the
stile. See Figure 8 on page 29 and Figure 9 on page 30 for all steps in this procedure.
Note: Mount the bracket as high as possible to provide access to the magnets from the car top,
and leave the bracket loosely attached.

3. Before mounting the selector, check that the plate nuts are on the correct side of the selector
box for mounting to the selector stile bracket. If not, do the following:
a. Loosen the nine (9) screws holding the selector box and the selector harness covers.
b. Remove the selector box and the harness covers.
c. Remove the plate nuts from their slots and place them in the corresponding slots on the
opposite side of the selector.
d. Replace the covers, and tighten the screws.

4. Turn the selector over and loosen the four (4) thumb-screws holding the auxiliary sensor
assembly.

5. Carefully separate the auxiliary sensor assembly from the main sensor assembly.
Note: The connector (and sometimes the guides) between the two cards will offer resistance so
that the auxiliary sensor assembly cannot be removed evenly.

6. Ensure that four (4) tape guide halves are attached to the auxiliary sensor card, and four (4)
tape guide halves are attached to the main sensor card.

7. Use two (2) 5/16" hex bolts and lockwashers, carefully hold the parts in place, and mount the
selector box to the selector stile bracket.
Note: Leave the selector box loosely attached and pulled back away from the tape.

8. Adjust the selector mounting bracket so that the selector box is centered side-to-side, verti-
cally, and parallel to the tape. Tighten the bracket to the stile.

9. Move the selector box toward the tape until all the guide halves just touch the tape. Tighten the
selector box to the bracket.

10. Align the selector box with the selector tape so that the tape will go through the guides in a
straight path.
Note: The guides must not bend the tape.

11. Align the auxiliary sensor assembly with the selector box alignment pins and the connector on
the main sensor assembly.

28 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

(continued)
12. Be careful not to cross thread the thumbscrews, and turn the thumbscrews into the box about
four (4) turns.

13. Press the auxiliary sensor assembly into place. Tighten the thumbscrews enough to compress
the lockwashers.

14. Verify the following and, if necessary, readjust,

• The selector box is centered on the tape.
• The guides are not deflecting the tape from front to back.
• The guides are not pressing against the sides of the tape.

Helical Lock Washer Formed Rail

5/16" Z
Selector Stile Stile
Bracket Selector Hex Head
Tape Cap Bolt
5/16" x 1" Z Lock
Shim Washer
Pyramidal
Tooth
5/16" Z

Hex Nut
5/16" Z

Lock Washer
Hex Head Pyramidal Tooth
Cap Bolt 5/16" Z
5/16" x 1" Z
Install shim as
required to align Selector
selector box Harness
with tape
Selector Stile Bracket
TO CAR HEADER

RAIL SIDE VIEW CAR SIDE VIEW

NOTES:
For opposite hand mounting, move selector stile bracket to other side of selector.
Align selector with the tape when the car is at the top of the hoistway.

Figure 8 - Selector Box Mounting

Printed in USA May, 2012 29

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

(continued)

Auxiliary Sensor
Assembly (TSA)
Selector Alignment Pin (8) Plate Nut (2)

Alternate Slots
For Plate Nuts
Selector
Box Cover

Tape Guide
(4 Sets)

Connector Selector
Screw (9) Harness
(to remove covers, Cover
back out about 1/4”)
Connector
Thumbscrew (4)

Selector
Harness
Main Sensor
Assembly (TSM)

RAIL SIDE VIEW CAR SIDE VIEW

When removing the Selector Card from the Selector Assembly,

do not excessively bend or put undue stress on either card.

Figure 9 - Selector Box Components

30 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Close Landing Equipment

Close Landing Equipment

(if required)
Note: The close landing floor is the upper floor of the close floor pair.

1. From the car top, install the switch stile bracket into an available quadrant. See Figure 10 for
this and all additional steps in this procedure.

2. Mount the leveling vane bracket on the rail at the upper floor of the close floor pair.

3. Mount the leveling vane mounting strut to the leveling vane bracket.

4. Mount the leveling vane to the leveling vane mounting strut.

5. Mount the magnetic switch assembly to the switch stile bracket.

6. Make sure that the car is level with the close landing floor, and adjust the leveling vane and the
magnetic switch assembly so that the leveling vane will be vertically and horizontally centered
within the magnetic switches.
Notes:
• Additional leveling vane or magnetic switch adjustment may be required before turning
the car over to the customer.
• The magnetic leveling unit takes the place of the BPs and leveling magnets at the landing
in question.

Leveling
Vane

Magnetic
Switch
Assembly

Leveling
Vane
Bracket

Leveling Vane
Mounting Strut

Stile
Bracket

Figure 10 - Close Landing Equipment

Printed in USA May, 2012 31

Car Top Wiring INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Car Top Wiring Required Material

• Door operator harness (front and rear, as required).
• Fan and lights harness.
• Slotted end cap(s).
• Slotted cover plates.
• 2 1/2" Wireway (rear doors only).
• 1/2" Flex conduit and fittings.
• Auxiliary swing return harness (as required).
Notes:
• Slotted end caps and cover plates are shipped from manufacturing in the wiring package.
• In all steps, leave any excess wire in the header.
• Unless stated otherwise, all of the following steps are for all jobs.
1. Insert the end of the selector harness (with the MTA connectors) through the end of the
header and into the main swing return. Connect the flex conduit to the car header end cap,
or where the selector harness enters the car. Leave the wires disconnected in the swing
return. See Figure 11 on page 33 or Figure 12 on page 34 for this and all additional steps
in this procedure.

2. Connect the front door operator harness to the slotted cover plate, and pull the MTA connectors
through the header and into the main swing return. Leave disconnected in the swing return.

3. On jobs with selective doors, wire the rear door operator harness as follows:
a. Begin in the rear header nearest the door operator, and connect the flex conduit from the
rear door operator harness to the slotted cover plate.
b. Pull the rear door operator harness out through the rear header cover plate to the 2 1/2"
wireway that runs along the side of the car top.
c. In the second hole of the 2 1/2" wireway, attach the flex conduit onto the harness.
d. In the opposite end of the 2 1/2" wireway cover, start at the second hole and attach the
next section of flex conduit to the cover plate of the front header.
e. Route the harness cable through the front header and pull the connectors into the main
swing return. Leave disconnected in the swing return.

4. Connect the wires from the door protective device to the door operator terminal strip.

5. Install the conduit, and pull the lights and fan wiring to the main swing return terminal strip.

6. Pull the front auxiliary swing return harness through the header and into the main swing return.
Connect the MTA connectors.

7. On jobs with selective doors, wire the rear auxiliary swing return harness as follows:
a. Pull the rear auxiliary swing return harness through the rear header to the end cap nearest
the 2 1/2" wire way that runs along the side of the car top.
b. Attach the flex conduit to the rear header end cap and also to the first hole in the 2 1/2"
wireway cover.
c. Attach the flex conduit to the other end of the wireway cover and also to the end cap of the
front header.
d. Route the harness cable through the front header and into the main swing return. Connect
the MTA connectors.

32 Vertical Express
 (continued)
Emergency Exit Switch (field wired)
• 1/2” flex conduit from light box
ICON Controller

• 1/2” flex conduit from straight

connector at Emergency Exit to fan with a straight connector
Car Top Wiring

switch to 90 degrees. on each end (field wired).

• Connector at 4 x 4 box.
• Wire using Emergency Exit

Printed in USA May, 2012

• With two light fixtures use 1/2”
harness.
flex conduit from light box to
light box with a straight
connector on each end
• Microlight edge controller
(field wired).
mounted to door operator
weldment.
• Flex conduit from controller Light • 1/2” flex conduit from 90
to door operator. Box degree connector at photo
• Connect wires to terminal eye to 90 degree connector
strip in door operator. at header end cap.
• For left and right hand
doors, mount photo eye
to strike column.
• Cable to safety edge.
• Connect other end • Photo eye conduit may also
through grommet in • 1/2” flex conduit from be routed under platform
hole on door operator. straight connector at behind toe guard through
Door Operator light box to 90 degree return box into header
(field wired)
Harness connector at header (field wired).
(field wired).
INSTALLATION

Selector End cap (typ.)

Harness
• Cable from end cap • Cable from end cap to
to microlight on microlight on leading
leading edge of edge of door or on strike
door or on strike column (see note 3).
column
Plug ALL • 1/2” flex conduit from
(see note 3).
unused holes. straight connector at car
riding lantern box to 90
• Mount swing return box to • Safety edges and/or photo
degree connector at header
platform over access hole. eye use 1/2” flex conduit
end cap (see note 2).
• Mount grommet in hole in straight and 90 degree NOTES:
return box cover. connectors (as required)
1. Photo eye and safety edge cables wire to the terminal strip inside the door operator.
• Route traveling cable through from header to door
cover, box, and access hole to operator (field wired). 2. Strike column mounted car riding lanterns are s upplied with a wiring harness connected by the
swing return. factory into the lantern assembly. To install, disconnect harness from the lantern noting order

Figure 11 - Typical Car Top Wiring (shown with Vertical Express HD-11 Door Operator)
• Mount grommet strip in access of connections and wire labeling. Wire ends must be routed from the swing return, through
hole in top of swing return. header channel to header end cap, through flex conduit and into fixture box. Reconnect wires
in original order. Attach the harness connector to the CWI board header in swing return.
3. For left and right hand doors, mount the microlight safety edge to the strike column.

33
Car Top Wiring
34
• Route rear door operator harness (continued)
End cap (typ.) through 1” flex and cartop wireway.
Car Top Wiring

• Route auxiliary swing harnesses through

• 1/2” flex conduit from straight
Car Top Wiring

3/4” flex conduit. Use 90 degree connector

connector at Emergency Exit at header, and straight connector at wireway.
switch to 90 degrees.
• Connector at header Emergency • 1/2” flex conduit from light box
using factory harness. Exit Switch to fan with a straight connector
(field wired) on each end (field wired).

• With two light fixtures use 1/2” flex

conduit from light box to light box with
a straight connector on each end
(field wired).
• Electronic safety edge
mounted to door operator • 1/2” flex conduit from straight connector
weldment. at light box to 90 degree connector at
• 1/2” flex conduit from header (field wired).
controller to door operator.
• Connect wires to terminal • 1/2” flex conduit from 90
Light
strip in door operator. Box degree connector at photo
eye to 90 degree connector
at header end cap.
Plug ALL • For left and right hand
Door Operator unused holes. doors, mount photo eye
Selector Harness to strike column.
• Cable to safety edge. Harness • Photo eye conduit may also
INSTALLATION

• Connect other end be routed under platform

through grommet in behind toe guard through
hole on door operator. return box into header
(field wired) (field wired).
• Cable from end cap to
microlight on leading
edge of door or on strike
• Cable from end cap column (see note 3).
• Safety edges and/or photo • Cable from end
to microlight on
• Mount swing return box to eye use 1/2” flex conduit cap to microlight • 1/2” flex conduit from
leading edge of
platform over access hole. straight and 90 degree on leading edge straight connector at car
door or on strike
• Mount grommet in hole in connectors (as required) of door or on riding lantern box to 90
column
return box cover. from header to door strike column degree connector at header
(see note 3).
• Route traveling cable through operator (field wired). (see note 3). end cap (see note 2).
cover, box, and access hole to NOTES:
swing return. 1. Photo eye and safety edge cables wire to the terminal strip inside the door operator.
• Mount grommet strip in access
2. Strike column mounted car riding lanterns are s upplied with a wiring harness connected by the
hole in top of swing return.
factory into the lantern assembly. To install, disconnect harness from the lantern noting order
of connections and wire labeling. Wire ends must be routed from the swing return, through

Figure 12 - Car Top Wiring—Front and Rear Doors (shown with Vertical Express HD-11 Door Operator)
header channel to header end cap, through flex conduit and into fixture box. Reconnect wires
in original order. Attach the harness connector to the CWI board header in swing return.
3. For left and right hand doors, mount the microlight safety edge to the strike column.
ICON Controller

Vertical Express
 (continued)

• 1/2” flex conduit from straight

ICON Controller

connector at Emergency Exit

Emergency Exit Switch
Car Top Wiring

switch to 90 degrees.
(field wired) • Connector junction box
using factory harness.

Printed in USA May, 2012

• Microlight edge controller
mounted to door operator
weldment.
• Flex conduit from controller • 1/2” flex conduit from light box
to door operator. Light to fan with a straight connector
• Connect wires to terminal Box
on each end (field wired).
strip in door operator.

• 1/2” flex conduit from straight

connector at light box to 90
degree connector at junction box.
(field wired).

Selector Harness • Outlet box installed over soffit

mounted lantern. Drill hole in
INSTALLATION

Cable to channel in order to feed wire

microlight edge to outlet box from lantern.

• Cable from end cap to

• Cable to safety edge. microlight on leading

Figure 13 - Cimarron Car Top Wiring

Door Operator Harness
• Connect other end • Junction box. edge of door or on strike
through grommet in Mount grommet • 1/2” flex conduit from 90 column (see note 3).
hole on door operator. strip in access • 1/2” flex conduit from degree connector at photo
(field wired) • Mount swing return box to hole in top of 90 degree connector at eye to 90 degree connector
platform over access hole. swing return. junction box to straight at door operator (field wired).
• Mount grommet in hole in connector at outlet box.
return box cover.
• Route traveling cable NOTES:
through cover, box, and 1. Photo eye and safety edge cables wire to the terminal strip inside the door operator.
access hole to swing return. 2. Strike column mounted car riding lanterns are s upplied with a wiring harness connected by the
factory into the lantern assembly. To install, disconnect harness from the lantern noting order
of connections and wire labeling. Wire ends must be routed from the swing return, through
header channel to header end cap, through flex conduit and into fixture box. Reconnect wires
in original order. Attach the harness connector to the CWI board header in swing return.
3. For left and right hand doors, mount the microlight safety edge to the strike column.

35
Car Top Wiring
Car Top Wiring INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Car Top Wiring

(continued)

CORRECT 3 WINDINGS DEAD

Incorrect

1 WINDING DEAD SWAPPED MOTOR LEADS

Incorrect Incorrect

Open
Contactor

Open
Connection Open
Contactor

Open
Contactor

OPEN CONTACTOR
OPEN CONNECTION (Power Applied)
Incorrect Incorrect

Figure 14 - Delta Wiring Configurations

36 Vertical Express
ICON Controller INSTALLATION Swing Return Wiring

Swing Return Wiring

1. Connect the traveling cable to the CWID card. See the swing return terminal label, the job
wiring diagrams, and Figure 15 for all steps in this procedure.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the lights and fan disconnect.

3. Connect the lights and fan wiring (L10, L10s, L20, and ground) to the swing return terminal
strip.

4. Connect the following harnesses to the CWID card. See the labels on the harness to identify
the correct plugs,
• Selector.
• Front door operator.
• Rear door operator.

5. Ensure that all other MTA connectors in the main swing return are connected to the CWID card.

6. Verify that the SWAC (for door operator) and SWP24 (for swing return power) switches on the
CWID card are turned OFF.

7. Configure the Inspection / Hoistway access wiring,

• Jobs without in-car access: Place a header jumper across pins 3 and 4 of Connector
301 on the CWID card.
• Jobs with in-car access: Plug the harness connector onto Connector 301 on the CWID
card.

SWAC Switch
(Door Operator)

SWP24 Switch
(Swing Return Power)

Connector 301
CWID Card (see Detail A)

PIN 1

Header
Jumper

Swing Return
Terminal Strip(s) Enlarge View PINS 3 and 4
Car Wiring Interface, Distributed
(CWID) Card
Detail A
(jobs without in-car inspection
or hoistway access)
Swing Return Rear Panel

Figure 15 - Swing Return Terminal and MTA Locations

Printed in USA May, 2012 37

Machine Room INSTALLATION ICON Controller

Machine Room
Controller Card Connections
1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Start in the controller and connect the hall station, the position indicator, the door interlock, the
limit switch, and the pit stop switch wiring to the HCID card and the field terminal strip (located
behind the HCID card). See the job wiring diagrams and Figure 16 for all steps in this proce-
dure.

3. Start in the controller and connect the traveling cable to the TCID card and the field terminal
strip (located behind the TCID card).

Notes:
• Route the mainline power through the top left-hand corner of the controller.
• Route the hoistway wiring and traveling cable through the top right-hand corner of the
controller.
• Only for group jobs: Wire the controller cross-connects between the field terminal strips.
4. Wire the building power and other necessary connections (emergency power, telephone, etc.)
to the field access terminals.

Field Access Panel

TCID Card FHR3T FHR4T HCID Card

(FHR1T) (FHR2T)

CPU
Card

CNWIF
Card

I/O
Expansion
Cards

Transformer

Figure 16 - Controller Card Locations

38 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Preliminary Adjustment

Preliminary Adjustment
Temporary Operation Removal
1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.
2. Place the car top inspection switch in INSP position, and the stop switch in STOP position.
3. If present, remove the temporary run box.
4. Remove all temporary orange jumpers to terminals TR101, TRUS, TRUS1, and TRSCG2.
5. Remove all orange jumpers from the electronic starter.
6. Connect CON9, CON11, CON17, and CON18 on the 188E CPU card. See Figure 17.
7. Make sure there is a permanent jumper between CON5-6 and CON5-7 on the CNWIF card.
8. Remove any remaining temporary jumpers.
9. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.
10. Verify these LED’s on the CPU card. If the LED’s do not act as described below, see On-Card
Diagnostics in the Troubleshooting Section.
• INIT and C4_INIT LED’s will flicker then be ON solid.
• WD LED will be ON solid after a short period.
• F6K_STAT LED will be either ON solid or OFF solid, and C4_STAT LED will be OFF.
11. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

CON9

CON11

C4_STAT LED F6K_STAT LED

C4_INIT LED INIT LED

WD LED

CON18

CON17

Figure 17 - 188E CPU Card

Printed in USA May, 2012 39

Preliminary Adjustment ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Preliminary Adjustment
(continued)
Safety String Check Out

1. Remove any safety circuit jumpers that were installed for temporary operation.

2. Ensure that car door is closed, and all hoistway doors are closed and locked.

3. Turn on the mainline disconnect.

4. Check the car I/O screen in the UIT, and verify that the I/O matches the values in
Table 3.

I/O INSPECTION
Mnemonic NOT Running UP Run
CSTOM 1 1
DZ1M 1 1
DZ2M 1 1
EPNP 1 1
HDIF 1 1
CDCF 1 1
GLM 0 0
IN 0 0
INCT 1 1
IND 0 0
INU 0 1
MCD 1 0
MCE 0 1
OLTO 1 1
OLTS 0 0
SAFE 1 1
VC1A 0 0
VC1B 0 0
VC2A 0 1
VC2B 0 1
VC3A 0 0
VC3B 0 0
VC4A 0 0
VC4B 0 0

Table 3 - UIT I/O State

I/O Expansion Card Setup

1. If I/O expansion cards are present, configure their addresses using either JP1 (low voltage) or
JP5 (high voltage) jumpers. See Table 4 and Figure 18 on page 41 for details.
Note: For High Voltage Only: Verify jumpers JP1 through JP4. See the job’s I/O assignment.

2. Use the EIO Command (if needed) to determine the job requirements for the I/O cards.

40 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Preliminary Adjustment

I/O Expansion Card Setup

(continued)

EIO(n) Card No. Jumpers ON

EIO0(zero) 1 A, B, D
EIO1 2 B, D
EIO2 3 A, D
EIO3 4 D
EIO4 5 A, B, C
EIO5 6 B, C
EIO6 7 A, C
EIO7 8 C
EIO8 9 A, B
EIO9 10 B
EIO10 11 A
EIO11 12 None

Table 4 - I/O Expansion Card Address Jumper Configuration

JP1 – JP4 Ribbon Cable From

I/O Device Connections I/O Configuration CPU to Card 1
Jumpers
JP5
Jumpers

JP1
Jumpers

I/O Device
Connections
Ribbon
Cable from
CPU to
Card 1

24V Low Voltage I/O Expansion Card (JP1) High Voltage I/O Expansion Card (JP5)

Figure 18 - I/O Expansion Card Jumper Verification

Printed in USA May, 2012 41

Car Top Inspection Operation ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Car Top Inspection Operation

1. Place the car top AUTO / INSP switch in the INSP position.

2. Place the swing return power switch in the ON position.

3. Verify that the car will not run with the car top stop switch in the STOP position.

4. Place the car top run/stop switch in the RUN position.

5. Verify that the car will only run up when the UP and SAFE buttons are pressed.
Note: If car does not move, use Figure 19 and Table 5 on page 43 to verify the I/O status.

6. Verify that the car will only run down when the DOWN and SAFE buttons are pressed.
Note: If car does not move, use Figure 19 (below) and Table 5 on page 43 to verify the I/O
status.

7. Verify that the car will not run with the car or any hoistway door open.

8. Verify that the car will not run when any contact in the safety circuit is opened.

9. Place the AUTO / INSP switch in the AUTO position.

Be prepared for unexpected car motion when AUTO / INSP is placed in the AUTO
position.

10. Press the UP and SAFE buttons, and then the DOWN and SAFE buttons to verify the car will not
run in either direction.

11. Place the AUTO / INSP switch in the INSP position.

Figure 19 - Car Configuration Data Report

42 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Car Top Inspection Operation

Car Top Inspection Operation

(continued)

Car Top Inspection, Car at Floor Level, Electronic Starter

Port Number Port Status Car Condition Comments
00100001 Car Idle INCT on for Car Top
Port 1 10100001 Car Running Up Inspection, INU or
01100001 Car Running Down IND on for direction.
10110000 Car Idle MCD off & MCE on for
Port 2 01110000 Car Running Up UP, MCD off for
00110000 Car Running Down down.
01001100 Car Idle Door contact and
Port 4 01001100 Car Running Up Stop Switch monitors
01001100 Car Running Down on.
00000000 Car Idle VC2A, VC2B on for
Port 9 00110000 Car Running Up UP. VC1A, VC1B on
11000000 Car Running Down for down.
10000000 Car Idle MCC1-3 on for UP,
Port 10 11100000 Car Running Up MCC1 on at idle or
10000000 Car Running Down down.
11111111 Car Idle Safety String, Stop
Port 11 11111111 Car Running Up Switch, Door Locks &
11111111 Car Running Down Contacts made.

Table 5 - I/O Status

The following I/Os are optional and could be located in various positions for different jobs, but
should be verified if there is some problem. Use the job's car configuration data report to identify
the I/O port assignments (for verification with the UIT),

• EPNP = Emergency Power/Normal Power, should be on at all times (unless on Emergency

Power).
• OLTO = Oil Temperature Over Limit, should be on at all times (unless the oil is too hot to
allow a run).
• OLTS = Oil Temperature Set, indicates that the oil is cold and needs some heat for proper
valve operation (should be OFF, but the car can still run if ON).

Printed in USA May, 2012 43

Selector Tape Magnet Installation ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Selector Tape Magnet Installation

Selector Tape and Box Inspection

1. Inspect and clean the selector tape. Use a wire brush to remove cement, drywall, mud, etc.,
and use fine sandpaper (400 grit) to remove nicks and burrs.

2. After cleaning, wipe down the tape with a clean rag. If the tape cannot be completely cleaned,
it MUST be replaced.

3. Inspect the selector box for damage or defects. The guides must be free of dirt, not binding on
the tape, or be extremely loose.

Slowdown and Directional Magnet Placement

See Figure 20 for these notes,

• Slowdown and directional magnets are placed on the side of the tape facing away
from the car (back side).

• Handed references are noted as if facing the tape from the car.

• Magnets have magnetic south marked with a bright yellow stripe.

• Install the directional and terminal magnets after the slowdown magnets.

7/16”
Directional
Sensor
8”

Slowdown
Sensor
Selector
Box
Yellow
Stripe

7 1/2”
Directional
7/16” Sensor
Magnet
(2.5” shown)

Figure 20 - Directional and Slowdown Sensor Locations

44 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Selector Tape Magnet Installation

Bottom Slowdown (NTSB) Magnet Placement

1. Level the car at the bottom landing.

2. From the bottom of the selector box, measure down 11/16" and mark the tape with a
marker (this is Mark A). See Figure 21 on page 46 for all steps in the bottom magnet
placement procedures.

Using a metal scribe will damage the tape.

3. Mark the tape level with the top of the selector box (this is Mark B).
Note: If necessary, move the car to gain access to the marked area.

4. Based on the down car speed, use Dimension X (from the table) to draw Mark C on the tape
above or below Mark B.

5. Determine the number of 8" magnets needed for slowdown.

In the following step, the magnets are placed end-to-end, with no gap between them. The south
side (bright yellow stripe) faces away from the tape. A mirror may be used to view magnets.

6. On the back side of the tape, start the slowdown magnets at Mark C, extending them down-
ward until one overlaps Mark A.

7. Use the magnet alignment tool to align the magnets to the edge of the tape.

Bottom Directional Limit (DLB) Magnet Placement

1. Divide by 8 the amount of run-by, and round the result to the next highest whole number. This
is the number of 8" magnets needed for the directional limit.
Note: Where a final limit switch is required, the directional limit magnets must overlap the final
limit switch activation point.

2. On the back side of the tape, start the directional limit magnets at Mark A, extending them
downward.

3. Use the magnet alignment tool to align the magnets to the edge of the tape.

4. Run the car onto the bottom directional limit and confirm that the car stops and has
traveled 1" - 1 1/2" past the bottom floor.
Note: The car Input/Output screen in IMS can be used to view the activation of the
directional limit.

5. Run the car up to verify that it will move off the directional limit.

6. Verify that the final limit (if required) stops the car 4" past the floor.
Note: If necessary, directional limit function can be tested independently of normal selector
operation.

Printed in USA May, 2012 45

Selector Tape Magnet Installation ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Bottom Magnet Placement

(continued)

MARK C (top of slowdown magnets)

Selector Tape
Dimension X
(see table below)

Slowdown Magnet(s) MARK B (Top of

(on back side of tape, south Selector Box)
facing away from tape).

Down Total Slowdown

No. of 8"
Car Speed Dimension X Magnet Length
Magnets
(fpm) (Minimum)
50 -1.5" 14.7 2
75 -1.5" 14.7 2
Selector Box
100 4.5" 20.7 3
125 9.5" 25.7 4
150 14.5" 30.7 4
175 22.5" 38.7 5
200 22.5" 38.7 5
NOTE: A negative number indicates a downward measurement.

15 1/2" Bottom Slowdown Magnet Placement

.531"

Magnet

Selector
Tape Magnet
Bottom of Alignment
Selector Box Tool
MARK A (Top of
Directional
Limit Magnets)

Slowdown Directional Limit

Magnet(s) Magnet(s)
Slowdown Magnet(s) 11/16"
(must overlap Mark A)

CAR SIDE
SECTION A-A

Final Limit Activation Point

(where required, directional limit
magnets must overlap this point).

Directional Limit Magnet(s)

(on back side of tape, south
facing away from tape). .531"

Figure 21 - Bottom Slowdown and Directional Limit Magnets (viewed from car side)

46 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Selector Tape Magnet Installation

Top Slowdown (NTST) Magnet Placement

1. Level the car at the top landing.

2. From the top of the selector box, measure up 11/16" and mark the tape with a marker. This is
Mark X. See Figure 22 on page 48 for all steps in the top magnet placement procedures.

Using a metal scribe will damage the tape.

3. Mark the tape level with the top of the selector box. This is Mark Y.
Note: If necessary, move the car to gain access to the marked area.

4. Based on the car up speed, use dimension A to draw Mark Z.

5. Use the table to determine the number of 2 1/2" magnets needed for slowdown.

In the following step, the magnets are placed end-to-end, with no gap between them. Alternating
polarity means to start with the south side out, then with the next magnet north side out, then south
side out, etc. A mirror may be used to view magnets.

6. On the back side of the tape, start placement of the slowdown magnets at Mark Z with the yel-
low stripe (south pole) of the first magnet facing out. Extend the magnets upward, alternating
polarity, until one overlaps Mark X.

Top Directional Limit (DLT) Magnet Placement

1. Divide by 8 the amount of run-by, and round the result to the next highest whole number. This
is the number of 8" magnets needed for the directional limit.
Note: Where a final limit switch is required, the directional limit magnets must overlap the final
limit switch activation point.

2. On the back side of the tape, start the directional limit magnets at Mark X, extending them
upward.

3. Use the magnet alignment tool to align magnets to the edge of the tape.

4. Run the car onto the top directional limit and confirm that the car stops and has trav-
eled 1" - 1 1/2" past the top floor.

5. Run the car onto the top directional limit, and confirm that the car stops and has traveled
1" - 1 1/2" past the top floor.
Note: The car Input/Output screen in the UIT can be used to view the activation of the directional
limit.

6. Run the car down to verify that it will move off the directional limit.

7. Verify that the final limit (if required) stops the car 4" past the floor.
Note: If necessary, directional limit function can be tested independently of normal selector
operation.

Printed in USA May, 2012 47

Selector Tape Magnet Installation ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Top Magnet Placement

(continued)

Total Slowdown Selector

Up Car Dimension No. of 21/2" Directional Limit Magnet(s)
Magnet Length Tape (on back side of tape, south
Speed A Magnets
(Minimum) facing away from tape).
50 18.5" 19.2 8
75 18.5" 19.2 8
100 26.5" 27.2 11
125 31.5" 32.2 13
150 36.5" 37.2 15
Final Limit Activation Point
175 44.5" 45.2 19 (where required, directional limit
200 44.5" 45.2 19 magnets must overlap this point).

Top Slowdown Magnet Placement

Slowdown Directional Limit
Magnet(s) Magnet(s)

CAR SIDE
.531" SECTION A-A
Magnet
MARK X
(bottom of directional
limit magnets)
Selector
Tape Magnet 11/16"
Alignment
Tool MARK Y
Selector Box (top of selector box)

Slowdown Magnets
(on back side of
Etc. tape, alternating
polarity).
Dimension A
(see table )
Fourth Magnet
North Pole Out

Third Magnet
South Pole Out

Second Magnet
North Pole Out

First Magnet
South Pole Out

Yellow Stripe
on South Pole
MARK Z (Bottom of
Slowdown Magnets)
Alternating Polarity

.531"

Figure 22 - Top Slowdown and Directional Limit Magnets (viewed from car side)

48 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Selector Tape Magnet Installation

Selector Floor Magnet Placement

1. Place the car level with the top landing.
2. Mark the top of the selector box, and then move the car down a few feet.
3. Align the notches in the floor magnet template with the mark from Step 2, and place the 8"
leveling magnet on the selector tape. See Figure 23 for all steps in this procedure.
Note: Floor magnets must be polarized correctly with the south pole (yellow stripe) facing
away from the selector tape.
4. Place a 2 1/2" magnet in the appropriate BP1 through BP8 and parity slot(s).
5. Place the car level with each remaining landing, and repeat Steps 2 through 4.
Note: The number of the BP and parity magnets at each landing is always an odd number.
There is always one leveling magnet at each landing. Example: Floor 6 = BP1, BP4,
and parity (3 magnets).
6. In the UIT, adjust P17 and P18 to set the up and down slowdown adjustment counts listed in
the table.

Up Adjustment Down Adjustment

Selector Speed
Tape (fpm) Distance Adjustment
(counts) Distance Adjustment
(counts)
50 11" 470 8" 342
75 16" 683 12" 512
100 22" 939 16" 683
125 28" 1195 22" 939
150 34" 1451 28" 1195
Mark 175 42" 1792 34" 1451
Floor Magnet (top of 200 50" 2134 42" 1792
Template selector Slowdown Adjustment Counts
box)

LANDING BPP (Parity) BP8 BP4 BP2 BP1

Parity Magnet
(south facing 1 YES - - - -
away from tape). 2 - - - - YES
3 - - - YES -
4 YES - - YES YES
Selector
Box 5 - - YES - -
6 YES - YES - YES
7 YES - YES YES -
8 - - YES YES YES
8" Leveling Magnet 9 - YES - - -
(south facing away
10 YES YES - - YES
from tape).
11 YES YES - YES -
12 - YES - YES YES
13 YES YES YES - -
14 - YES YES - YES
BP Leveling 15 - YES YES YES -
Magnet(s) Magnet
16 YES YES YES YES YES
Floor Magnet Positions
CAR SIDE
SECTION A-A

Figure 23 - Floor Magnet Placement (fourth landing car side shown)

Printed in USA May, 2012 49

Preliminary Hoistway Setup ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Preliminary Hoistway Setup

Overview 1. The hoistway is scanned (in the procedure that follows) so that the system can locate the floor
levels and have a record of them.
2. After the hoistway scan completes, the car may be placed on Automatic Operation for the first
time.
3. The car levels down to the top floor, and the door operator attempts to scan the cab door width
upon the first open command from the CPU.
Notes:
• The door card will not initiate door movement for the scan, only the CPU or the Learn
Travel Command from the door’s UIT can do this.
• The door travel limits, the mechanical setup, and the operators’ configuration must be
correct since the door operator attempts to scan the cab door width from the first CPU
open command.
• Because the door scan occurs automatically and must be saved to FLASH memory, it is
usually easier to do all of the setup at one time before performing the hoistway scan.

Door Operator Refer to the appropriate door operator component manual for the job, and verify the following
sections:
• The mechanical setup.
• Power up and door card configuration jumpers.
• Limit setting.
• Direction check.
• Door scan.
• Auto null (HD-11 only).
Note: HD-11 and LD-03 Door Operator manuals are included in this book.

Hoistway Setup Before the car can run on Automatic Operation, the selector must scan (count) the number of
selector tape holes between floors. Any time a leveling magnet or terminal limit switch is
moved, the hoistway must be scanned (set-up) again.

The Valve Preliminary Settings and Adjustments Procedures must be completed before starting a
Hoistway Setup. See the I-2®/ I-3® Valve manual for details.

Selector Setup with the STU Command

1. Place the car on Inspection Operation at the bottom landing with the doors closed.

2. Lower the car on Inspection Operation until it activates the bottom direction limit.

3. From the COMMAND MENU of the UIT, use the up or down arrows to select the STU Command.
Press ENTER to accept STU and display the message STU COMMAND - PRESS ENTER.

4. Press ENTER again to issue STU for the selector setup.

5. After STU is issued, run the car at inspection speed to the top direction limit without stopping.
A message displays: SETUP FINISHED. To save the new values, perform a WRT Command
from the COMMAND MENU.
Note: To abort this command after it has been issued (without running a setup), press the RST
button on the CPU card to reset the system. Any previously unsaved values will be lost.

50 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Selector Level Zone

Prepare for Initial After completing the hoistway scan and door operator setups, the elevator may be operated on
Automatic Operation Automatic Operation for the first time. If the default (TKE Manufacturing) door speed profile is not
acceptable, see the appropriate door operator manual to make the needed adjustments.

Valve Adjustments See the I-2®/ I-3® Valve manual for final valve adjustments.

Selector Level Zone

Look on the TSM card (located on the selector box) to verify that the level zone jumpers are in the
correct positions. See Figure 24.
Notes:
• Level zone travel is the amount a car will travel in either direction before releveling (six-tenths of
an inch (0.6") is recommended).
• When the car is level at a floor, the LU and LD sensors on the TSM card are on the 8"magnet.

JP1

8" Magnet

JP2

Jumper Positions Level Zone

Travel
JP1 (LU) JP2 (LD) (in inches)
LU1 LD1 0.2
LU2 LD2 0.4
LU3 LD3 0.6
LU4 LD4 0.8
Level Zone Jumpers

Figure 24 - TSM Card

Printed in USA May, 2012 51

Floor Position and Leveling Magnet Adjustment ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Floor Position and Leveling Magnet Adjustment

The valve must be fully adjusted before proceeding with the floor leveling adjustments.

1. Run the car to each floor in the up and down directions to check the floor levels. If the car is not
level at a floor, reposition the 8" leveling magnet for that floor.

2. If the leveling magnet was moved, use the floor magnet template to restore the relationship of
the BP and parity magnets to the leveling magnet.

3. If any leveling magnet required adjustment in Step 1, complete a new hoistway setup.

4. When the magnet placement is correct, glue each magnet with two small beads of silicon
caulk. See Figure 25.

Figure 25 - Glue Floor Magnets

Terminal Slowdown Check

1. Adjust the terminal slowdown magnets so that they activate 2" to 4" after the selector slow-
down. See Table 6 for all steps in this procedure.
Example: Both up and down car speeds are 100 fpm. Table 6 shows that the up selector slow-
down is 939 counts (each count = 1/40“). Therefore, up terminal slowdown activates 18" to
20" before the landing. The down selector slowdown is 683 counts, therefore, the down termi-
nal slowdown activates 12" to 14" before the landing.

Car Up Selector Down Selector

Speed Slowdown Slowdown
(fpm) Count Count
50 469 341
75 683 512
100 939 683
125 1195 939
150 1451 1195
175 1792 1451
200 2133 1792

Table 6 - Selector Slowdown Distance

52 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Final Adjustments

Terminal Slowdown Check

(continued)
2. Use the UIT to verify the proper setting of the up terminal slowdown switch as follows:

a. Enter P17 to access the up slowdown adjustment and to display the current values. The
displayed value represents the Up selector slowdown hole count adjusted under selector
slowdown adjustments. Record this value.

b. Change P17 to one-half of its current value.

c. Place the car on Automatic Operation, and make a full speed run to the top terminal floor.

Note: TSL1, TSL2, and NTST should activate (go low), stopping the car short of the floor or
within the leveling zone producing a selector fault. If the car stops past the relevel zone,
adjust P17 so that slowdown magnets are encountered 2" to 4" before the selector
slowdown.
d. Change P17 to restore the original value recorded in Step 2a.

3. Use the UIT to verify the proper setting of the down terminal slowdown magnet as follows:

a. Enter P18 to access the down slowdown adjustment and display the current values. The
displayed value represents the down selector slowdown count adjusted under Selector
Slowdown Adjustments. Record this value.

b. Change P18 to one-half of its current value.

c. Place the car on Automatic Operation, and make a full speed run into the bottom terminal
floor.

Note: TSL1, TSL2, and NTSB should activate, slow the car down, and stop it level with or slightly
past the floor. If the car stops past the relevel zone, these magnets or the final setting of
P18 should be adjusted to activate 2" to 4" after the selector slowdown.
d. Change P18 to restore the original value recorded in Step 3a.

Final Adjustments
ESP100 Overload Overloads MUST undergo this procedure before the elevator is turned over to the customer.

1. Run the car up with a full load, and measure the stabilized running current at each sensing
loop.
Note: Take the measurements with a clamp-on AC ammeter connected directly below the
sensing loops.

2. Calculate the full load amps adjustment. The full load amps adjustment equals the highest
reading in Step 1 + 10%.

3. Set the full load amps adjustment dial equal to the value calculated in Step 2. See Figure 26.

4. Verify that the car will run the entire length of the hoistway with a full load.

The full load Amps adjustment must NOT be set outside the calibration range on
the overload's faceplate. To do so may prevent the overload from tripping and
may also damage the motor.

Printed in USA May, 2012 53

Final Adjustments ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Final Adjustments
(continued)

Figure 26 - ESP100 Overload Adjustment

Solid State Starter Overload

Notes:
• The starter's display should read MOTOR STATUS STOPPED when the system is
normal. Reset the starter if it reads otherwise and, before continuing, correct any
problem indicated on the display. See Figure 27 on page 55 for this and all fol-
lowing steps in this procedure.
• The starter's display will revert to MOTOR STATUS after 5 minutes of inactivity.

1. Verify that the Starting Amps = Motor Nameplate Amps.

2. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press the LEFT ARROW. The STATUS menu displays.

3. Press the DOWN ARROW twice, and PARAMETERS displays.

4. Press the RIGHT ARROW, and STARTING AMPS displays.

• If the value is correct, continue with Step 8.
• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 5.

5. Press the RIGHT ARROW again to access the value. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW to
adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press the RIGHT ARROW to move to the next digit.

6. Press the LEFT ARROW.

7. Press the UP ARROW to accept the changes and exit, or the DOWN ARROW to reject the
changes and then exit.
Note: To make corrections to the values (if necessary), repeat this process starting from Step 5.

8. Press the DOWN ARROW until OVERLOAD AMPS displays, and verify that the values match
the setting of the controller’s nameplate full load amps.
• If the value is correct, no action is required. The starter will timeout back to the
Status Menu.
• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 9.

54 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Operational Adjustments

Solid State Starter Overload

(continued)
9. Press the RIGHT ARROW to access the value. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW to adjust
the value of the flashing digit. Press the RIGHT ARROW to move to the next digit.

10. Press the LEFT ARROW.

11. Press the UP ARROW to accept the changes and exit, or the DOWN ARROW to reject
the changes and exit.
Note: To make corrections to the values (if necessary), repeat this process starting from
Step 9.

Top Line
Bottom Line

Scroll Up Button
Exit Menu /
Save Button Enter Menu Button
Scroll Down
Button

Figure 27 - Electronic Starter Display

Operational Adjustments
• Use the UIT to make the appropriate adjustments according to the job contract.
• To save the new adjustment values, issue the WRT command in the UIT menu: ADJUST
Menu->COMMAND Common->WRT.

Group Adjustments
ICON group jobs have a redundant group function present in all controllers, but only one controller
at a time uses the group functions. Therefore, group set-up and adjustments should be made to
each controller, if changed on any of them. Even a single car installation contains a group function
that can be adjusted. Group parameters must be adjusted separately in ALL cars.

1. Verify cross connections between all cars (not required on single car jobs). See the job wiring
diagrams and Figure 28 on page 56.

2. Verify that resistors R117 and R119 have been removed from the CPU card of the center cars of
the group communications wiring run (resistors are to remain on the CPU’s of the cars at the
end of the wire run only). See Figure 28 and Figure 29 on page 56.
All ICON group cars are configured at manufacturing for proper group operation and should perform
correctly. However, adjustments can be made for group options and hall call service. If the cars do
not operate properly in response to hall calls, perform the following procedure:
1. On the CPU card, disconnect the CON21 plug from the CPU to isolate this car from the others
(this action allows the group function to start in this CPU if wired to other cars).

2. Make appropriate group adjustments with the UIT. See the Diagnostics section of this manual.

3. Issue the WRT command to save the new adjustment values.

Printed in USA May, 2012 55

Group Adjustments ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Group Adjustments
(continued) 4. Re-install the CON21 plug on the CPU, and press the reset button to start the new settings.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each car in the group.

Remove resistors R117 and R119

from the CPU’s of all controllers
except the first and last cars.

Figure 28 - ICON Group Communications Car-to-Car Cross Connections

R119

R117

CPU Card

Figure 29 - R117 and R119 Resistor Locations

56 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT Group Adjustments

Options Test
Test all options included with this job. See the job configurations sheets and use the following list:

• Battery Operated Lowering

• Car Calls
• Car Call Lockouts
• Car Riding Lanterns and Gongs
• Door Instant Close/Door Close Pushbutton
• Door Hold Open Switch
• Door Open Button
• Emergency Power - Type IV
• Floor Passing Tone
• Hall Calls
• Hall Lanterns and Gongs
• Hoistway Access
• Independent Service
• Limited Door Reversal
• Nudging Operation
• Parking Operation
• Phase I and II Fire Service
- Flashing Signs
- Call Cancel button
- Return Light
- Smoke Detectors
- Fire Service Switches
• Photo Eyes
• Position Indicators
• Safety Edge
• Sequential Start
• Swing Return Inspection
• Viscosity Control
• Electronic Edge

Printed in USA May, 2012 57

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

User Interface Tool (UIT)

Overview The User Interface Tool (UIT) gives access to diagnostics and adjusting features of a specific
system. It displays faults, I/O status, issues commands, and changes adjustments. The tool
plugs directly into the CPU card, is programmed to function with a specified controller, and will
not operate in any other controller.

At System Power Up (Start Up Screen), the UIT scrolls through the following screens:

• THYSSENKRUPP ELEVATOR
• NO FAULTS or FAULTS PRESENT
• FRONT DOOR STATUS
• REAR DOOR STATUS (if present)
• SERVICE / POSITION INFORMATION
• PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

Menu Navigation Press any of the four buttons to display MAIN MENU.

The four keys at the bottom of the UIT access the various menus and items. See Figure 30.

1. Up Arrow - scrolls through menus, adjustments, or displays.

2. Down Arrow - scrolls through menus, adjustments, or displays.

3. ESC - moves to the next highest level of a selected menu, adjustment, or display.
Note: If an incorrect adjustment value is displayed, and ENTER has not been used, push ESC to
restore the original value.

4. ENTER - select a menu, adjustment, or display.

Note: If an adjustment value has been changed, push ENTER to temporarily save the value until
it can be saved permanently to Flash.

ThyssenKrupp
Elevator

Figure 30 - UIT Startup Display Screen

58 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT User Interface Tool (UIT)

Service Code Reference Table

Display Service Code Display Service Code

1 Safety String 46 Unit Shutdown

3 Inspection / Hoistway Access 47 Low Oil

6 Auto Shutdown 48 Viscosity Shutdown

18 Fire Service #2 49 Loadweigher Shutdown

19 Fire Service #1 50 B44 Canadian

20 Code Blue 51 Parking

21 Car Independent / Hospital Service 52 Car Cycling

22 Attendant Service 53 Jack Resynching

23 Door Disconnect 54 Inconspicuous Riser

25 Car Homing 55 Retiring Cam

26 Emergency Power 56 Auto Return

28 Lobby Recall 57 Next Up

29 Car Stop 58 Transfer Floor

33 Tenant Security 59 Front Door Hold

34 Automatic 60 Rear Door Hold

36 Massachusetts Medical Service 61 Front Door Communication Loss

37 Run Monitor 62 Rear Door Communication Loss

38 Selector 63 External Calls

39 Front HW Watchdog 64 External Front Door

40 Rear HW Watchdog 65 External Rear Door

41 Front Door Watchdog 66 OSI Security

42 Rear Door Watchdog 67 Shunt Trip

43 Front Door Nudging 68 Capture

44 Rear Door Nudging 69 Emergency Dispatch

45 Diagnostic Car Lockout 70 Neonatal Service

71 Seismic Service

Printed in USA May, 2012 59

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

ICON UIT Quick Guide

Start Up Screen
ThyssenKrupp
Elevator

GROUP CAR
MENUSELECT Select Car or Group MENUSELECT

Note: see Diagnostics for a list of

Group Faults faults, adjustments, and commands. Car Faults

Rear Electronic Rear Electronic

Door Fault List Door Fault List

Front Electronic Front Electronic

Door Fault List Door Fault List

Rear Electronic Rear Electronic

Door Adjustment Door Adjustment

Front Electronic Front Electronic

Door Adjustment Door Adjustment

Group Car
Adjustments Adjustments

Group Car
Commands Commands

Group Car
Inputs/Outputs Inputs/Outputs

60 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT User Interface Tool (UIT)

ICON UIT Quick Guide

(continued)

Car Adjustments

Doors
D10 - D34
Door control options,
not door speed profile

Coded C Call
B10 - B23
Coded car call
security function

Incon Riser
R10 - R30
Sets the car interaction
with Incon Riser calls

Emergency Power Fixtures

EP1 - EP5 X10 - X23
Sets the emergency
Sets the actions
power options
of the car fixtures

Fire Service Security

F10 - F28 S10 - S41
Sets the fire Sets the actions
service options of the car security

Homing Position
H10 - H16 P10 - P22
Sets the homing floor Sets the type of
and door time selector system used

Car Info Options

I10 - I21 O10 - O51
Sets the job
not used with ICON operational options

Car Job Motion

J10 - J20 M10 - M26
Describes the hatch Sets the valve
specifics for the car and starter type

Printed in USA May, 2012 61

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

UIT Menu Selections

Car/Group Menu Selection
1. From the Start Up (ThyssenKrupp Elevator) Screen, press ENTER to display Select CAR/GROUP.

Select CAR/GROUP
CAR

2. Press UP or DOWN to display either CAR or GROUP on the second line.

3. Press ENTER.
4. Press UP or DOWN to scroll through the available screens:
• COMMANDS
• FAULTS
• I/O
• ADJUSTMENTS
Note: Each time ESC is pressed, the MENU will move backward one level.

Car Menu Faults Menu

1. Press UP or DOWN to display MENUSELECT–FAULTS.

2. To accept FAULTS, press ENTER.
Note: Faults are listed on the screen one at a time, beginning with the most recent.
3. Press the UP or DOWN to scroll through the last 24 faults.

---MENUSELECT--- -----FAULTMENU-----
FAULTS Fault 1 1088

62 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT User Interface Tool (UIT)

Car Menu
(continued) To Reset Car Faults

1. Press ESC, and then press UP or DOWN to scroll to COMMANDMENU.

2. To accept COMMANDS, press ENTER.

3. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to RFL COMMAND.

4. To accept the RFL COMMAND, press ENTER. RFL COMMAND PRESS ENTER displays.

5. To clear ALL CAR faults, press ENTER. RFL RESET briefly displays.

6. Press ESC until MENUSELECT displays

I/O Menu

1. Press UP or DOWN to display MENUSELECT–IO, and press ENTER.

2. Press UP or DOWN to scroll through each port.

------MENUSELECT------ CAR AND GROUP IO

IO Port 1 00000000

In this mode, the I/O is displayed by port number, followed by 8 characters. Each port can contain
up to 8 signal designations. Even though 8 characters are always displayed, all of the characters
may not be assigned a car I/O signal name in a given controller. Also, the character designations
will not necessarily be the same from controller to controller. To determine the correct signal rep-
resented by each character, use the job serial number configuration sheets printed for each job.

Printed in USA May, 2012 63

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Car Menu
(continued) Car Configuration Data Report

The Car and Group Configuration Data Report by job serial number is furnished for each elevator.
See Figure 31.

Line 2: JOB NUMBER: Job Serial Number, plus 07 (the controller section number).
Job Name
Design Date
Line 9: CAR_IO_ASSIGNMENTS
Line 10: Port 1, I/O signal names
Notes:
• The first signal name corresponds to the first numerical digit in the string of 8, reading
from left to right on the UIT.
• Some of the 8 positions within a given port will appear as a blank; Disregard these digit(s)
when viewing car I/O with the UIT.
• The number of ports displayed depends on the number of ports required by an individual
job.
Ports 1-8 are reserved for 24 VDC signals
Ports 9-11 are reserved for 115 VAC signals
Remaining ports are reserved for either discrete expansion ports or LON signals

Blanks indicate no car I/O signal

Heading is assigned (may be reserved for
Group I/O signal or not used).
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
3 Blank
Lines
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15

Figure 31 - Car I/O Assignments

64 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT User Interface Tool (UIT)

Commands Menu 1. Press UP or DOWN to display MENUSELECT–COMMANDS.

-----MENUSELECT-----
COMMANDS

2. Press ENTER.
3. Press UP or DOWN to view these commands:
• RFL - Resets ALL Car Faults.
• FJR - Forces Jack Resynch.
• RRF - Resets Run Monitor Faults.
• STU - Selector Setup (scans the hoistway for floor position information).
IMPORTANT! Any existing hoistway position information will be overwritten.

• VER - Displays the current software version and revision.

• WRT - Saves the contents of the CPU RAM memory to the card's FLASH memory, and also
protects the data (adjustments, floor scans, etc.) if power loss occurs.

4. To accept the command, press ENTER.

5. To issue the command, press ENTER.

6. Press ESC until the COMMANDMENU or the MENUSELECT screen displays.

Selector Setup with the STU Command

Note: Inspection speed of the car should not exceed 15 fpm, or the hoistway scan may fail.

1. Place the car on Inspection Operation at the bottom landing with the doors closed.

2. Lower the car on Inspection Operation until it activates the bottom direction limit.

3. From the COMMANDMENU of the UIT, Press UP or DOWN to select the STU Command. Press
ENTER to accept, and the message STU COMMAND displays. Press ENTER.

4. To issue the STU Command for the selector setup, press ENTER again.

5. After STU is issued, run the car at inspection speed to the top direction limit without stopping,
and a message displays - SETUP FINISHED.

6. To save the new values, issue a WRT Command from the COMMANDSMENU.
Note: To abort this command after it has been issued, without running a setup, press the RST
button on the CPU card to reset the system. Any previously unsaved values will be lost.

Printed in USA May, 2012 65

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Adjustments Menu 1. Press UP or DOWN display MENUSELECT–ADJUSTMENTS.

-----MENUSELECT-----
ADJUSTMENTS

2. Press ENTER.

3. Press UP or DOWN to view these adjustments:

• ADJ - DOORS
• ADJ - EMERG PWR
• ADJ - FIRE SRV
• ADJ - HOMING
• ADJ - CAR INFO
• ADJ - CAR JOB
• ADJ - MOTION
• ADJ - OPTIONS
• ADJ - POSITION
• ADJ - SECURITY
• ADJ - FIXTURES
• ADJ - INCON RISER
• ADJ - CODED C (Car) CALL

4. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the desired ADJUSTMENT, and press ENTER to accept. The first
adjustment (and its value) displays.
a. To change the current value, press ENTER and an asterisk appears in front of the value.
b. Press UP or DOWN to change the value within the allowed range.
Note: The adjustments cannot be set beyond manufacturing programmed minimum and
maximum values.
c. After changing a value, press ENTER to save the new value to RAM (no message displays).
d. Press ESC, and the asterisk will disappear.

5. After all desired changes are made and saved, press ESC until the MENUSELECT screen
displays.

6. Press UP or DOWN to select COMMANDS, and to accept COMMANDS press ENTER.

66 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT User Interface Tool (UIT)

Adjustments Menu
(continued)
7. Press UP or DOWN to display WRT COMMAND, and to accept the WRT Command press ENTER.

IMPORTANT! Activating a menu item other than COMMAND will prevent the WRT Command from
saving the new value.

-----COMMANDMENU-----
WRT COMMAND

8. Press ENTER again to save all changed values to flash memory (SAVED will briefly display on
the screen).
Note: Always reset the CPU after making any changes.

9. Press ESC until the MENUSELECT screen displays.

Group Menu Fault Menu

----MENUSELECT----
FAULTS

1. To accept FAULTS, press ENTER.

Note: NO FAULTS displays if the group is fault-free, or existing faults are listed on the screen one
at a time, beginning with the most recent.

2. Press UP or DOWN to scroll through the last 24 faults.

Printed in USA May, 2012 67

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Group Menu
(continued) Reset Group Faults

1. Press ESC, and then press UP or DOWN to scroll to COMMANDMENU.

2. To accept COMMANDS, press ENTER.

3. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to RFL COMMAND.

4. To accept the RFL COMMAND, press ENTER. RFL COMMAND PRESS ENTER displays.

5. To clear ALL CAR faults, press ENTER. RFL RESET briefly displays.

6. Press ESC until MENUSELECT displays

I/O MENU

1. While in GROUP Mode, press ENTER to accept MENUSELECT–IO.

2. Press UP or DOWN to scroll through each port.

In this mode, the I/O is displayed by port number, followed by 8 characters. Each port can
contain up to 8 signal designations. Even though 8 characters are always displayed, all of
the characters may not be assigned a group I/O signal name in a given controller. Also, the
character designations will not necessarily be the same from controller to controller. To
determine the correct signal represented by each character, use the job serial number
configuration sheets printed for each job.

The Car and Group Configuration Data Report by job serial number is furnished for each
elevator. See Figure 32 on page 69.

Line 2: JOB NUMBER: Job Serial Number, plus 07 (the controller section number).
Job Name
Design Date

Line 9: GROUP_IO_ASSIGNMENTS

Line 10: Port 1, I/O signal names

Notes:
• The first signal name corresponds to the first numerical digit in the string of 8, reading
from left to right on the UIT.
• Some of the 8 positions within a given port will appear as a blank; Disregard these digit(s)
when viewing car I/O with the UIT.
• The number of ports displayed depends on the number of ports required by an individual
job.
Ports 1-8 are reserved for 24 VDC signals.
Ports 9-11 are reserved for 115 VAC signals.
Remaining ports are reserved for either discrete expansion ports or LON signals.

3. Press ESC until the MENUSELECT screen displays.

68 Vertical Express
ICON Controller ADJUSTMENT User Interface Tool (UIT)

Group Menu
(continued)

Heading Port 1

4 Blank Lines

Port 5

9 Blank Lines Blank Lines indicate no Group signal is assigned.

Port 15

Figure 32 - Group I/O Assignments

Commands Menu

1. Press ENTER to accept COMMANDS from the group MENUSELECT screen.

2. Press UP or DOWN to view these commands:
RFL - Reset All Group Faults
WRT - Save data to battery-backed flash memory
a. To accept the command, press ENTER.
b. To issue the command, press ENTER.

3. Press ESC until the COMMANDMENU or the MENUSELECT screen displays.

Adjustments Menu

1. Press ENTER to accept ADJUSTMENTS from the Group MENUSELECT screen. The following
adjustments are available by pressing UP or DOWN:

• CSW - Control Status Word • ZN1 - Zone Ldg #1

• LBY - Lobby Ldg • ZN2 - Zone Ldg #2
• LER - Number of Lobby Cars • ZN3 - Zone Ldg #3
• NZN - Number of Zones • ZN4 - Zone Ldg #4

Printed in USA May, 2012 69

User Interface Tool (UIT) ADJUSTMENT ICON Controller

Adjustments Menu
(continued) 2. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the desired ADJUSTMENT, and press ENTER to accept. The first
adjustment (and its value) displays.
a. To change the current value, press ENTER and an asterisk appears in front of the value.
b. Press UP or DOWN to change the value within the allowed range.
Note: The adjustments cannot be set beyond manufacturing programmed minimum and
maximum values.
c. After changing a value, press ENTER to save the new value to RAM (no message displays).
d. Press ESC, and the asterisk will disappear.

3. After all desired changes are made and saved, press ESC until the MENUSELECT screen
displays.

4. To accept COMMANDS, press ENTER. The screen displays GRP Commands - WRT.

5. Press ENTER again to display the WRT - PRESS ENTER message.

GRP Commands WRT

WRT PRESS ENTER

6. Press ENTER again to save the changed values to flash memory. SAVED briefly displays.
Note: Always reset the CPU after making changes.

IMPORTANT! Activating a menu item other than COMMAND will prevent the WRT command from
saving the new value.

7. Press ESC until the MENUSELECT screen displays.

70 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Prefix Categories

Prefix Categories
Adjustments and Commands

CAR GROUP
Prefix Adjustments Adjustments
Bxx Coded Car Call Entry Adjustments CSW

Dxx Door-related Adjustments LBY

EPx Emergency Power Adjustments LER

Fxx Fire Service Adjustments NZN

Hxx Homing Adjustments ZN1

Ixx Event Adjustments ZN2

Jxx Job Information Adjustments ZN3

Mxx Motion Adjustments ZN4

Oxx Option Adjustments Commands

Pxx Position System Adjustments RFL

Sxx Security Adjustments WRT

Xxx Fixtures Adjustments I/O

Zxx Emergency Dispatch Adjustments

Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition

B10 floor 0-nf (up 10 Code Digit 0 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 0.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 10 in the car enters call C11 to the controller, set
B10=10 to make car button 9 enter a code value of 0.
B11 floor 0-nf (up 1 Code Digit 1 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 1.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 1 in the car enters call C2 to the controller, set B11=2
to make car button 1 enter a code value of 1.

Printed in USA May, 2012 71

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

B12 floor 0-nf (up 2 Code Digit 2 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 2.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 2 in the car enters call C3 to the controller, set B12=3
to make car button 2 enter a code value of 2.
B13 floor 0-nf (up 3 Code Digit 3 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 3.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 3 in the car enters call C4 to the controller, set B13=4
to make car button 3 enter a code value of 3.
B14 floor 0-nf (up 4 Code Digit 4 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 4.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 4 in the car enters call C5 to the controller, set B14=5
to make car button 4 enter a code value of 4.
B15 floor 0-nf (up 5 Code Digit 5 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 5.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 5 in the car enters call C5 to the controller, set B15=6
to make car button 5 enter a code value of 5.
B16 floor 0-nf (up 6 Code Digit 6 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 6.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 6 in the car enters call C7 to the controller, set B16=7
to make car button 6 enter a code value of 6.
B17 floor 0-nf (up 7 Code Digit 7 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 7.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 7 in the car enters call C8 to the controller, set B17=8
to make car button 7 enter a code value of 7.

72 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

B18 floor 0-nf (up 8 Code Digit 8 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 8.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 8 in the car enters call C9 to the controller, set B18=9
to make car button 8 enter a code value of 8.
B19 floor 0-nf (up 9 Code Digit 9 - This adjustment specifies which front car call button is used to enter
to 10) the code value 9.
Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different
from the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example: If pressing button 9 in the car enters call C10 to the controller, set
B19=10 to make car button 9 enter a code value of 9.
B20 sec. 0-15 0 Coded Car Call Code Entry Time - This adjustment sets the entry time for a security
code through the car call buttons. This feature requires IMS security.
When a passenger enters a car call at a locked out floor, the car station accesses
the keypad code and allows a code to be entered with car call buttons C1 - C10.
Adjustment B20 should be set to zero (0) on all jobs that do not have IMS security.
B21 — 4-8 4 Coded Car Call Code Entry Count - This adjustment specifies the number of digits
in a code for coded car call entry.
B22 — 0-1 0 Coded Car Call Entry Sound Buzzer on Entry - If set to 1, the car station buzzer will
activate each time a code button is pressed during coded car call entry operation.
B23 0.1 sec. 0-20 4 Coded Car Call Acknowledge Time - The amount of time that the coded car call
entry acknowledgement buzzer or device stays active after each code digit is
entered.
D10 — 0-2 0 Limited Door Reversal Type
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Active with EE only
2 = Active with SE or EE
D11 — 0-2 0 Nudging Enable
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Enable with DOB override
Note: The door open button causes the doors to fully reopen during nudging

Printed in USA May, 2012 73

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

D12 — 0-8 Job Front Door Type
EEPROM Values:
0 = No Door
1 = Electronic Door Operator
2 = Discrete Door Operator
3 = Freight Door (freight doors with auto open and auto close)
4 = Freight Manual (freight doors with no auto open, no auto close, no door times,
and no door watchdog protection timer)
5 = Freight Auto Open (freight doors with auto open only, no door watchdog protec-
tion timer)
6 = Freight Auto Close (freight doors with auto close only, and with door watchdog
protection timer)
7 = Electronic Door Operator with CAN serial link
8 = Electronic Door Operator with RS-485 serial link
D13 — 0-8 Job Rear Door Type
EEPROM Values:
0 = No Door
1 = Electronic Door Operator
2 = Discrete Door Operator
3 = Freight Door (freight doors with auto open and auto close)
4 = Freight Manual (freight doors with no auto open, no auto close, no door times,
and no door watchdog protection timer)
5 = Freight Auto Open (freight doors with auto open only, no door watchdog protec-
tion timer)
6 = Freight Auto Close (freight doors with auto close only, and with door watchdog
protection timer)
7 = Electronic Door Operator with CAN serial link
8 = Electronic Door Operator with RS-485 serial link
D14 0.1 sec 0-100 10 Safety Edge Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay
open after the safety edge is activated.
D15 0.1 sec 4-50 10 Electric Eye Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay
open after the electric eye is activated.
D16 0.1 sec 0-100 10 Door Open Button Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors
will stay open after the door open push button activation.
D17 sec 5-900 10 Door Hold Button Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will
stay open after the door hold push button activation.
D18 0.1 sec 0-40 1 Open High Speed Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time delay after the
doors start the opening cycle with OD and before picking the OHS Relay.
D19 sec 5-120 20 Nudging Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time that the door must be
held open before nudging is activated.
Note: Before this timer will start, the car must have a reason to run.
D20 0.1 sec 0-60 30 Door Reversal Time (optional) - If the electric eye remains active, this adjustment is
the length of time the doors will remain at the door reversal limit (DRL) switch
before fully opening.
Note: To enable this feature, the limited door reversal type must be non-zero.
See Also: D10
D21 0.1 sec 0-600 200 Front Door Watchdog Time - If the doors do not reach the door close limit before
this timer expires, the system assumes the doors have failed. The doors will be
reopened and another close cycle attempted.

74 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

D22 0.1 sec 0-600 200 Rear Door Watchdog Time - If the doors do not reach the door close limit before
this timer expires, the system assumes the doors have failed. The doors will then
be reopened and another close cycle attempted.
D23 0.1 sec 50-300 50 ADA Hall Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay
open when answering hall calls with the ADA option enabled.
D24 0.1 sec 1-300 30 Car Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open
when answering car calls under normal operation.
D25 0.1 sec 1-300 50 Hall Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open
when answering hall calls under normal operation.
D26 — 0-2 0 Door Disconnect -
Values:
0 = The door disconnect feature is de-activated.
1 = The door disconnect feature is active.
2 = Capture the car on door disconnect.
D27 — 0-1 1 ADA - To activate the ADA feature, set to 1.
D28 sec 30-600 300 Stuck Device Time - This adjustment sets the length of time a door opening device
(such as the Door Open Button) must be active before it is recognized as being
stuck.
D29 — 0-1 0 Extended Door Time Enable - To activate this feature, set adjustment D30.
D30 0.1 sec 10-250 30 Extended Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time added to the stan-
dard door time when the car is at the Extended Door Time Landing.
D31 floor 1-nf 1 Extended Door Time Landing -
D32 — 0-4 0 Remote Car Station Door Operation - An I/O-driven feature (not applicable to the
IMS feature of the same name).
Values:
0 = The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call. The doors will
open fully with DOB/DOBR, but will re-close when DOB/DOBR is released.
1 = The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call. The doors will
open fully with DOB/DOBR, and will not re-close until DCB/DCBR is activated.
2 = The doors automatically open upon arrival at a car call and, after a delay, will
close back (similar to door operation on normal automatic operation).
3 = The same operation as value 0 above.
4 = The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call.
• The doors will open with constant pressure on DOB/DOBR, but will re-close if
DOB/DOBR is not maintained until the doors are opened fully.
• The doors will not re-close until DCB/DCBR is activated, but will reopen if DCB/
DCBR is not maintained until the doors are closed fully.
D33 — 0-150 0 Pre-Opening Door Enable -
Values:
0 = Disable pre-opening doors.
1-150 = Requires DZ1 and DZ2; limit speed to 50 FPM.
D34 — 0-1 0 Non-simultaneous Door Enable.
Values:
0 = Disable non-simultaneous doors.
1 = Enable non-simultaneous doors.

Printed in USA May, 2012 75

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

EP1 — 0-2 0 Emergency Power Type
Values:
0 = None
1 = Type-0 (battery lowering)
2 = Type-4 (alternate power source)
Note: The system must be re-started before changes take effect.
EP2 floor 1-nf 1 Emergency Power Return Floor - During an emergency power return phase, this
adjustment sets which floor the car will attempt a return to.
EP3 F/R 0-1 0 Emergency Power Door - For use with selective doors, this adjusts which door will
open at the return floor (when returning to landing).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
EP4 sec 10-300 300 Emergency Power Manual Select Time - When in manual select mode, this adjusts
the time delay before the car is actually selected (Type-4 only).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
EP5 — 0-1 0 Okay To Hold Doors Open on Emergency Power
F10 floor 1-nf 1 Main Fire Landing - This is the floor position number that is designated as the Main
Fire Recall Floor. This should be set for the same floor where the Fire Phase 1 key
switch is located.
F11 floor 1-nf 2 Fire Alt Landing - The floor position number that is designated as the Alternate Fire
Recall Floor.
F12 F/R 0-1 0 Main Fire Landing Door - When in response to Phase 1 Fire Service, this adjusts
which door opens at the Main Fire Landing.
Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door
F13 F/R 0-1 0 Fire Alt Landing Door - When in response to Phase 1 Fire Service, this adjusts
which door opens at the Alternate Fire Landing.
Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door
F14 sec 0-60 30 Fire Override Time - This is the time delay that must expire before Phase 1 Fire Ser-
vice is allowed to override attendant operated features such as Independent Ser-
vice.
Note: This feature is not allowed to operate on some Fire Service types.
F15 — 0-2 0 Fire Service Switch Type - Set this type of switch for a Secondary Phase 1 Fire Ser-
vice switch. The value to be entered must be dictated by the Fire Service type (F16)
and the provided hardware.
Values:
0 = No Secondary Switch
1 = Two Position Secondary Switch
2 = Three Position Secondary Switch

76 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

F16 — 0-20 Job Fire Service Type - This selection determines which type of Phase 1 and Phase 2
EEPROM Fire Service Operation will be provided.
Values:
0 = No Fire Service
1 = ANSI/ASME 1993
2 = Chicago Building Code
3 = California
4 = York City RS18
5 = Massachusetts 98
6 = ANSI/ASME 1988
7 = Houston 98
8 = Michigan 98, Detroit
9 = B44
10 = White Plains NY
11 = ANSI/ASME 2000, South Carolina 2000, Mass. 2000, Michigan 2000
12 = B44 2000
13 = ANSI/ASME 2004, South Carolina 2004, Mass. 2004, Michigan 2004
14 = B44 2004
15 = Korea
16 = ANSI 2005
17 = B44 2005
18 = EN81 2005
19 = ANSI 2007
20 = B44 2007
F17 0.1 sec 0-255 100 Hall Fire Door Open Time - This adjustment sets the value of the Phase 1 door
open time for special (Houston) Fire Service.
Notes:
• Cars recalled to the fire floor on Phase 1, with corresponding doors held open,
will close the doors after this time delay.
• Additional door open push button (input FSDO) per car is required in the hall for
this operation so that the doors may be reopened on demand by fire personnel.
F18 — 1-3 3 Phase 1 Safety Edge Operation - This adjustment determines how the safety edge
and door operation interact during Fire Service Phase 1 Operation. This adjustment
must be coordinated with applicable Fire Codes.
Values:
1 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at reduced door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
2 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
3 = The safety edge is active, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
F19 — 1-3 3 Phase 2 Safety Edge Operation - This adjustment determines how the safety edge
and door operation interact during Fire Service Phase 2 Operation. This adjustment
must be coordinated with applicable Fire Codes.
Values:
1 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at reduced door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
2 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
3 = The safety edge is active, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.

Printed in USA May, 2012 77

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

F20 — 0-1 0 Fire Lift - Use this adjustment to designate an elevator as a Fire Lift.
Note: This adjustment only applies to fire service types that require the designation
of Fire Lifts.
Values:
0 = The elevator is not designated as a Fire Lift
1 = The elevator is designated as a Fire Lift
F21 — 0-1 1 B44 Phase 2 Activation Location - Only use this adjustment for B44 Fire Service
Operation.
Note: This adjustment will determine whether Phase 2 Operation is allowed to acti-
vate/deactivate only at the main return landing, or activate/deactivate at the main
or alternate return landing.
Values:
0 = Phase 2 can activate only at the main return landing.
1= Phase 2 can activate/deactivate at the main or the alternate return landing.
F25 — 0-1 0 This adjustment will set the Fire Service Return Indicator (Fire Hat).
Note: The F25 setting has no effect on the 2004 Fire Service. The Fire Hat light will
remain active while either Phase 1 or Phase 2 is active.
Values:
0 = The Fire Hat light is active during Phase 1 Recall and, where applicable, during
Phase 2 Recall. The light will deactivate when the car arrives at the fire floor.
1 = The Fire Hat light will remain active while Phase 1 or Phase 2 is active.
F26 — 0-4 0 This adjustment will set variations of Smoke Sensor Operation for Standard 2000
Fire Service (A17 and B44).
Values:
0 = The Standard 2000 (A17 and B44) fire service sensor operation is active.
1 = The Maryland variation of 2000 fire service is active. Maryland allows the active
recall floor to be changed from the main landing to the alternate landing if the
main landing sensor is active, the secondary switch (if provided) is in the OFF
position, and the primary switch is moved to the RESET position and then to
the OFF position.
2 = The Ohio variation of 2000 fire service is active. Ohio allows the alternate land-
ing recall on Phase 1 to be overridden: place either the primary or secondary
switch in the ON position and the car will move to the main landing. The car
will revert to the alternate landing recall if the primary switch and the second-
ary switch (if provided) are in the OFF position and the main landing sensor is
still active.
3 = The Massachusetts variation of 2000 fire service is active. Massachusetts
allows the alternate landing recall on Phase 1 to be overridden: place the pri-
mary switch in the ON position and the secondary switch will be ignored if the
main landing sensor is active.
4 = The Manchester, NH variation of 2000 fire service is active. Manchester allows
fire service initiated by sensors to be deactivated: reset all sensors and no
required switch change is needed.

78 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

F27 — 0-55 0 Phase 1 Fire Service Door Profile - This adjustment sets the door profile for use
(HEX) with Phase 1.
Format:
Tens place = Rear door profile (0 through door profile range)
Units place = Front door profile (0 through door profile range)
Note: Before use, the selected door profile must be adjusted in the correct door
operator.
Range:
Valid door profile numbers depend upon the type of door board, controller, and
door operator.
CAN doors = 5 profile capability
Linear doors = 2 profile capability
See also: The SDP command and the door adjustment manual.
Examples:
•Set F27 = 0 Sets the door profile used for Phase 1 Fire Service to the same
adjustments that are used for each individual floor when not on Phase 1.
•Set F27 = 20 Sets the rear door to use profile 2 for Phase 1 Fire Service (regard-
less of the elevator floor location). The front door will use the same door profile
adjustments that are used for each individual floor when not on Phase 1 (regard-
less of the elevator floor location).
•Set F27 = 02 Sets the rear door to use the same door profile adjustments that
are used for each individual floor when not on Phase 1 (regardless of which floor
the elevator is located). The front door will use profile 2 for Phase 1 Fire Service
(regardless of the elevator floor location).
•Set F27 = 53 Sets the in-use door profile (while on Phase 1 Fire Service) to pro-
file 5 for the rear door, and profile 3 for the front door (regardless of the elevator
floor location).
F28 — 0-1 0 Phase 1 Fire Service Door Edge Control - Phase 1 Fire Recall during battery lower-
ing operation or low oil operation (A17 Code 2000 and later). This adjustment is
offered for locations (such as Maryland) who require further refinement to this
recall operation.
A car recalling under these circumstances is expected to recall to the appropriate
floor, open automatic doors, close them within 15 seconds, and leave the door
open button active.
Values:
0 = Operation occurs as described above.
1 = Operation occurs as described above and,
•The electronic door edge is ignored (F18) and the doors close at reduced speed.
•Other door opening devices (electric eyes or door hold button/switch) are disre-
garded.
•Bypass of the in-stop switch continues as if the car operation is on Phase 1
Recall.
H10 floor 1-nf 1 Homing Return Landing 1 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to
during car homing operation. To activate, use Input HM1.
H11 F/R 0-1 0 Homing Return Door 1 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return
floor 1 (when the landing has selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H12 floor 1-nf 2 Homing Return Landing 2 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to
during car homing operation. To activate, use Input HM2.

Printed in USA May, 2012 79

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

H13 F/R 0-1 0 Homing Return Door 2 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return
floor 2 (when the landing has selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H14 floor 1-nf 3 Homing Return Landing 3 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to
during car homing operation. To activate, use Input HM3.
H15 F/R 0-1 0 Homing Return Door 3 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return
floor 3 (when the landing has selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H16 0.1 sec 0-600 150 Homing Door Time - This adjustment sets the door time used when at the return
landing (during car homing operation).
I10 — 0-1 0 Event Inhibit During Inspection - This adjustment inhibits IMS event logging while
the car is on Inspection Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not inhibit event logging during Inspection Operation.
1 = Inhibit event logging during Inspection Operation.
I11 — 0-1 0 Event Office Single - This adjustment reports office events to only one of the speci-
fied phone numbers for IMS Office Events.
Values:
0 = Do not report events to only one phone number.
1 = Report events to only one phone number.
I12 — 0-1 0 Event Owner Single - This adjustment reports owner events to only one of the
specified phone numbers for IMS Owner Events.
Values:
0 = Do not report events to only one phone number.
1 = Report events to only one phone number.
I13 — 0-1 1 Remote Monitor Aux - This adjustment enables the controller to report all Aux
Events.
Note: Ensure that the Event Monitoring is also set up through IMS.
Values:
0 = Do not report events
1 = Report events
Event Monitoring List
• Service Count
• Monthly Service
• Long Level Time (also AVG)
• Low Oil
• Stuck Car #1 (no DZ and no Safe String)
• Stuck Car #2 (no DZ and no Gate/Interlock open)
• Independent Service
• Car Stop Switch
• Reopen Device Failure
• Door Watchdog
• Excessive Relevels
I14 count 3-30 20 Relevel Service Count - This adjustment sets the number of relevels allowed in a
five minute period before flagging an Excessive Relevel Event.
I15 0.1 sec 0-255 150 Long Level Time - This adjustment sets the maximum amount of time the car can
level before reporting a Long Level Event.

80 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

I16 sec 1-600 5 Stuck Car #1 Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before reporting when the
car is out of the door zone and the safety string is open.
I17 sec 1-600 5 Stuck Car #2 Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before reporting when the
car is out of the door zone and the gate or interlock is open.
I18 sec 1-1800 600 Car Stop Switch Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time that the stop
switch can be activated before reporting an event.
I19 sec 1-1800 900 Independent Service Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time that the car
can be on Independent Service before reporting an event.
I20 — 0-1 0 Event Door Drag Time - This adjustment sets the average time to close the doors.
Note: If the time exceeds this adjustment, call Field Engineering and report Event
273.
I21 days 1-365 7 Event Am Alive - This adjustment sets the number of days between the elevator call
to the Vista Center to report that it is running (when remote monitoring is active).
J10 pounds 500 - Job Capacity - The rated car capacity.
65000 EEPROM
J11 — 1 -# of Job Car ID - The car number within a group, beginning with 1.
cars EEPROM
J12 — 0-240 0 Car Comm Number
Values:
0 = The controller computes the comm number from the car and group number.
1-255 = Force to that special comm number.
J13 — 1-8 Job Group ID - The group number within a multiple group network, beginning with 1.
EEPROM
J14 floor 1-nf 1 Lobby Floor - This adjustment sets the lobby to the proper car opening (beginning
with 1 = bottom floor).
Note: This floor number cannot be the building floor number.
J15 floor 2-nf 2 Number of Floors - The number of floors for this specific car.
Note: This number may differ from other cars in the group.
J16 ports 1-27 34 Number of I/O Ports - The number of I/O ports on the main board and all expansion
boards, with each port having 8 signals.
Note: This value does not count the number of LON ports.
J17 ports 0-243 0 Number of LON Channel 1 Ports - The number of LON Channel 1 ports for this car,
with each port having 8 signals.
J18 ports 0-243 0 Number of LON Channel 2 Ports - The number of LON Channel 2 ports for this car,
with each port having 8 signals.
J19 — 0-1 0 Relevel on the Stop Switch -
Values:
0 = No releveling while the Emergency Stop Switch is thrown.
1 = Up releveling only while Emergency Stop Switch is thrown.
J20 — 0-1 0 Stop Switch Type - This adjustment sets the value to the type of stop switch pro-
vided on this installation.
Values:
0 = Keyed stop switch.
1 = Public access stop switch.

Printed in USA May, 2012 81

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

M10 — 1-5 Job Motor Starter Type -
EEPROM Values:
1 = Across Line - One Contactor
2 = Across Line -Two Contactor
3 = Delta One Contactor
4 = Wye-Delta -Two Contactor
5 = Electronic
M11 0.1 sec 1-20 0 Motor Starter Time - Wye-Delta interval timer value.
M12 — 1-6 Job Valve Type - This adjustment sets the active solenoids during a high speed Up or
EEPROM Down run.
Values:
1 = Up fast only, Down fast, and Down slow (TKE I2/I3 Valve)
2 = Up fast only, and Down fast only
3 = Up fast and Up slow, Down fast only
4 = Up fast and Up slow, Down fast and Down slow (Maxton Valve)
5 = Dump valve, Down fast, and Down slow
6 = Dump valve, and Down fast only
M13 0.1 sec 1-6000 30 Restart Delay - This adjustment sets the amount of delay time from the end of one
run until the beginning of a new run (relevel runs do not count).
M14 0.1 sec 1-30 5 Motor Stop Time (previous label, TMS Timer) - This adjustment sets the time delay
between the Up-valve deactivation and the motor deactivation.
M16 fpm 0-75 50 Inspection Speed (for traction cars)- This adjustment sets the top speed allowed
while on Inspection Operation.
Special Operation - (for hydro cars)
The low pressure adjustment for the valve can be accomplished without removing
any wires or the solenoid. The motor will start, but the Up Solenoid will not be ener-
gized.
1. Set the Inspection Speed to 1 (e.g. M16=1).
Note: Do not save this value, or the car speed will require manual resetting.
2. Put the car on Inspection Operation.
3. Use the inspection buttons.
4. Either return the Inspection Speed to the normal value, or cycle the controller
power to reset back to the defaults.
M17 0.1 sec 0-100 20 Brake Step #1 Duration - The time to issue Brake Step #1 current.
M18 0.1 sec 0-100 10 Brake Step #2 Duration - The time to issue Brake Step 21 current.
M19 0.1 sec 0-100 20 Brake Step Economy Duration - Time from the last brake step current to issue the
Brake Step Economy current.
M20 — 1-3 3 This adjustment sets the number of brake steps to full lift current.
M21 0.1 amps 0-150 5 Brake Step #1 Current - The current dictated to the brake during Brake Step 1.
Note: The primary brake adjustments are limited by the value of the maximum cur-
rent adjustment, M70. This value will prevent accidental damage to the brake regu-
lator while adjusting.
See Also: Brake Dropping Resistance.
M22 0.1 amps 0-150 10 Brake Step #2 Current - The current dictated to the brake during Brake Step 1.
Note: The primary brake adjustments are limited by the value of the maximum cur-
rent adjustment, M70. This value will prevent accidental damage to the brake regu-
lator while adjusting.
See Also: Brake Dropping Resistance.

82 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

M23 0.1 amps 0-150 20 Brake Step #3 Current - The current dictated to the brake during Brake Step 1.
Note: The primary brake adjustments are limited by the value of the maximum cur-
rent adjustment, M70. This value will prevent accidental damage to the brake regu-
lator while adjusting.
See Also: Brake Dropping Resistance.
M24 0.1 amps 0-150 15 Brake Step Economy Current - The current dictated to the brake after the brake
step economy timer expired. Typically this value will reduce the current to the brake
to prevent heating during a high speed run.
Note: The primary brake adjustments are limited by the value of the maximum cur-
rent adjustment, M70. This value will prevent accidental damage to the brake regu-
lator while adjusting.
See Also: Brake Dropping Resistance.
M25 0.1 sec. 0-30 10 Brake Current Rate (time) - The time required for the brake to reach the requested
amp setting.
M26 fpm 50-1400 50 Wind Sensor Speed - When the wind sensor is activated, the speed of the car is
reduced to this speed on the next run. This speed also includes the speed the car
will run if Phase 2 reduced speed is required.
See Also: F22.
O10 calls 0-nf 3 Anti-nuisance Car Calls - This adjustment sets the number of car calls answered
(without passenger detection) before activating the anti-nuisance operation.
O11 inches 0-168 60 Hoistway Access Bottom Zone - When the car runs on hoistway access, this zone is
the distance (in inches) above the bottom hoistway access floor.
See Also: O21 and O22
O12 floor 0-nf 0 Car Cycle Floor 1 - This adjusts the car cycle for floor 1, and the car will cycle
between floors 1 and 2. To deactivate this feature, set either O12 or O13 to 0
(zero). See also: CYC
O13 floor 0-nf 0 Car Cycle Floor 2 - This adjusts the car cycle for floor 2, and the car will cycle
between floors 1 and 2. To deactivate this feature, set either O12 or O13 to 0
(zero). See also: CYC
O14 floor 0-nf 1 Hall Independent Return Floor - This adjustment sets the return landing of the car
(when Hall Independent Service is activated).
O15 F/R 0-1 0 Hall Independent Return Door - This adjustment assigns which door will open at
the return landing (when the landing has with selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O16 F/R 0-1 0 Low Oil Door - During low oil operation, this adjustment sets the selective doors to
open when returning to a landing.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O17 sec 20-255 100 Low Oil Timer - This adjustment sets how long the motor is allowed to run before
activating the low oil operation.
Note: If the floor-to-floor run time exceeds the timer value, the low oil operation
actives.
O18 floor 0-nf 1 Massachusetts Medical Floor - This adjustment sets which landing the car returns
to when Massachusetts Medical Service is activated.
Note: If a landing does not have front/rear openings (based on the value of O19),
the adjustment will be refused.

Printed in USA May, 2012 83

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

O19 F/R 0-1 0 Massachusetts Medical Door - This adjustment sets the selective door to open
landing return during Massachusetts Medical Recall Service Operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O20 — 0-1 0 Independent Overrides Lockouts - This adjustment (when enabled) allows the Car
Independent Service to override the Car Call Lockouts.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O21 floor 2-nf 2 Hoistway Access Top Floor - This adjustment sets which landing is designated for
the top landing of hoistway access operation.
See Also:O11 and O22
O22 inches 0-168 144 Hoistway Access Top Zone - When the car runs on hoistway access, this zone is the
distance (in inches) above the top hoistway access floor.
See Also: O11 and O21
O23 floor 1-nf 1 Viscosity Return Floor - This adjustment sets which return floor is used for viscosity
operation.
O24 — 0-1 1 Transfer Calls on Door Close - This adjustment (if enabled) allows call transfers to
occur while the doors are closing.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O25 — 0-2 0 B44 Type - If this adjustment is set to a non-zero value, B44 and B44 redundancy
checks are enabled.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Invalid entry - defaults to Enabled
2 = Enabled
O26 — 0-1 0 A17 Type - Which type of A17 code to activate.
Values:
0 = A17 Disabled
1 = A17 Enabled
O27 — 0-1 0 EN81 Type - Which type of EN81 code to activate.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O28 sec 5-60 10 Non-Interference Time - The delay (in seconds) after the doors close, and before
SAPB calls can be latched. This time delay gives priority to car calls.
O29 sec 5-30 6 Jack Resync Lower Time - This adjustment sets the time allowed for a jack resync
to be completed once the car reaches the bottom and begins the resync operation.
O30 days 1-3 1 Jack Resync Interval - This adjustment sets the number of days between automatic
jack resync operations.
See also: FJR and JRT
O31 floor 1-nf 1 Jack Resync Landing - This adjustment sets the return landing for the jack resync
return.

84 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

O32 F/R 0-1 0 Jack Resync Door - This adjustment sets the preferred door to open at the jack
resync return landing during jack resync operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O33 floor 1-nf 1 Lobby Recall Return Landing - This adjustment sets the landing that lobby recall
will return to during lobby recall operation.
O34 F/R 0-1 0 Lobby Recall Door - This adjustment sets the preferred door to open at the lobby
recall landing during lobby recall operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O35 sec 0-3600 300 Fan-Light Shutdown Timer - This adjustment sets the time that the fan and light
turn off (after all demand for service from the car has ended).
O36 floor 1-nf 0 Capture Return Landing -
Value:
0 = Stop car at the first available landing.
1 = Specify the floor of the capture return landing.
O37 F/R 0-2 0 Capture Door To Open -
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
2 = Both
O38 — 0-1 0 Capture Door Operation -
Values:
0 = The doors remain closed until opened with the CAPTD input.
1 = The doors open and stay open until deactivated.
O39 — 0-1 0 Capture Override Independent Service -
Values:
0 = No
1 = Yes
O40 — 0-1 0 Capture Override Car Stop Switch -
Values:
0 = No
1 = Yes
O41 — 0-1 0 Attendant Service Call Latch - This adjustment allows the attendant service to latch
car calls while the doors are open.
Values:
0 = Disable the latch
1 = Enable the latch
O42 — 0-1 0 This adjustment enables or disables the reverse car call cancel.
Values:
0 = Enable
1 = Disable

Printed in USA May, 2012 85

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

O43 — 0-255 0 Use this adjustment to enable or disable CE fixtures and VISTA monitoring.
Note: This adjustment also determines which communication protocol to use: 485,
232, or CAN.
Values:
0 = Off
1 = Enable CE fixtures on the 485 port
2 = Enable VISTA monitoring on the 485 port (if supported on given controller)
3 = Enable CE fixtures and VISTA monitoring shared on the 485 port (if supported
on given controller)
9 = Enable CE fixture on the car CAN channel 2
11= Enable CE Fixture and VISTA monitoring shared on the car CAN channel 2
41 = Enable CE fixtures for Destination Dispatch on the car CAN channel 2
Bit Definitions:
0 = (1) - Enable CE fixtures
1 = (2) - Enable VISTA monitoring
2 = (4) - Communications Protocol
0 = Pipe Vista to 485 port
1 = Pipe Vista to 232 port for use with TAC20-03 (VISTA is only on 232
FB782/784)
3 = (8) - Communications Protocol
0 = Pipe CE fixtures to 485 port
1 = Pipe CE fixtures to a CAN channel determined by the next bit
4 = (16) - CAN Channel
0 = Pipe CE fixtures to CAN Channel 2 (if not 485 or 232)
1 = Pipe CE fixtures to CAN Channel 1
5 = (32) - Destination Dispatch
0 = No DSC present
1 = DSC present; enable in-car destination display
6 = (64) - CE ADA audible announcements
0 = Enable CE ADA audible announcements for Destination Dispatch
1 = Disable CE normal audible announcements for Destination Dispatch
7 = (128) - CE normal audible announcements
0 = Enable CE normal audible announcements
1 = Disable CE normal audible announcements (only if the Destination Dis-
patch bit is set)
O44 # of starts 100- 1500 Jack Resync Interval - This adjustment sets the number of motor starts necessary
65535 before the launch of automatic jack resync operations.
See also: FJR, JRT, and O30
O45 — — — Enable Sabbath Operation -
O48 — 0-1 0 Automatic Hospital Emergency Service (HES) Enable - On a code blue call, the car
will automatically activate on HES.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O49 sec 0-300 7 Automatic Hospital Emergency Service (HES) Deactivation Timer - This adjustment
sets the time (sec.) that the doors must be open and no calls registered before the
car will go off of Automatic HES.

86 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

O51 — 0-1 0 Jack Resynch Termination -This adjustment sets the preference on when the jack
resynch function is finished when the car is on buffers.
Values:
0 = When timer O29 expires.
1 = When low pressure activates.
P10 — 1-3 3 Slowdown Type -
Job Values:
EPROM 1 = Hoistway Up and Down slowdown switches
2 = Not used
3 = Encoder or tape-derived continuous position count slowdown
P11 — 0-6 1 Position Type -
Job Values:
EPROM 0 = No Position Count Measuring System
1 = Tape Position Count Measuring System
2 = Encoder Position Count Measuring System
3 = Tape Encoder (TAC50-04)
4 = ISIS Tape (ISIS 2)
5 = TAC32 CAN Selector
6 = Absolute Encoder
P12 — 0-1 0 Rear Leveling Vane -
Job Values:
EPROM 0 = False (Front Selector only)
1 = True (both Front and Rear Selectors)
P13 — 0-1 1 Front Leveling Type -
Job Values:
EPROM 0 = LVU and LVD both Off at floor level
1 = LVU and LVD both On at floor level
P14 — 0-1 Job Rear Leveling Type -
EPROM Values:
0 = LVU and LVD both Off at floor level
1 = LVU and LVD both On at floor level
P15 floor 0-1 0 Long Terminal Slowdowns -
Values:
0 = Slowdown vane active only at slowdown points.
1 = Slowdown vane active at terminal landing floor levels.
P16 cpf 0-65535 128 Encoder Counts (per foot) -
Position resolution of tape or encoder system.
A typical value for TAC20 is 54. Other tapes and encoders will vary.
P17 dpp 0-65535 939 Up Slowdown Distance (for encoder and tape selectors) - The distance before the
target floor where the Up slowdown begins. To cause an earlier slowdown, increase
the P17 adjustment.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P18 dpp 0-65535 939 Down Slowdown Distance (for encoder and tape selectors) - The distance before
the target floor where the Down slowdown begins. To cause an earlier slowdown,
increase the P18 adjustment.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P19 cpf 0-512 21 Encoder Level Distance (for encoder selectors) - The distance away from the floor
level count that will cause the car to relevel. Encoder leveling also requires adjust-
ment P21=1.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.

Printed in USA May, 2012 87

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

P20 dpp 0-1024 90 Encoder Count Tolerance (for encoder selectors) - The encoder position count must
be within the encoder count tolerance, when level at that floor.
Notes:
• The encoder recalibration at LVU and LVD vanes must not change the encoder
count by more than the encoder count tolerance.
• Failure of either the position count or the recalibration will result in the loss of
encoder position with recovery of a floor hunt or terminal hunt.
• There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P21 — 0-1 1 Encoder Leveling -
Values:
0 = No encoder leveling
1 = Encoder leveling enabled (operative only on encoder selectors)
P22 dpp 0-16 6 Encoder Leveling Hysterisis - This adjustment prevents dithering on the re-level
activation point.
Notes:
• When the car is level, then the value of P22 is added to P19 encoded level dis-
tance to increase the level distance by P22.
• When the car crosses the re-level distance then the hysterisis is removed.
• The effect is to create a dead zone where the car will not re-level when sitting on
the re-level point.
See Also: P19, P21
RFL — — — This command clears the fault buffer and resets all of the fault data.
RRF — — — Reset Run Monitor Faults - This command resets all of the run monitor faults.
S10 — 1-10 0 Security Type - This adjustment (for car functions only) is a type of required Tenant
Security. The Type # must be coordinated with the group security type and the
group functions.
Values:
0 = (TYPE 0) No security required, or the group invokes security and car
homes, and shuts down if the return landing (S11) is set
1 = (TYPE 1) Car Call Lockouts in the group
2 = (TYPE 2) Car Call Lockouts in the group with override inputs in the car
3 = (TYPE 3-1) Car Call Lockouts in the group with override inputs in the car
4 = (TYPE 3-2) Security override output only
5 = (TYPE 4) Group Hall Card readers is an invalid selection for the car
6 = (TYPE 5) Security Override output only
7 = (TYPE 6) Car Call Lockouts at the car level
8 = (TYPE 7) Car Call Lockouts at the car level (no group function)
9 = (TYPE 8) Contract configurated security
10 = (TYPE 9) Contract configurated security
S11 floor 1-nf 1 Security Return Landing - The car will home to this floor when placed on Security
Operation. The car call for this floor will not be locked out.
S12 F/R 0-1 0 Door to Open Upon Return - This adjustment selects which door (front or rear)
opens when the car is homed to the Security Return Landing (see S11).
Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door

88 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

S13 — 0-1 0 Allow DOB on Security - This adjustment determines whether or not the Door Open
Button (DOB) is allowed to open the doors at a secured opening.
Note: This adjustment affects both front and rear doors.
Values:
0 = DOB is not allowed at secured floor.
1 = DOB is allowed at secured floor.
S14 — 0-1 0 One Car Call at a Time on Security - This adjustment allows registration of one car
call at a time while on security. All subsequent car call registrations will be inhib-
ited.
Values:
0 = Car calls are not limited to one at a time.
1 = Car calls are limited to one at a time.
S15 sec 0-255 30 Security Homing Delay - When Security Homing is enabled, this adjustment is the
delay that must expire before the car is forced to the security return landing.
S16 0.1 sec 0-255 50 Security Door Time - After security has homed the car, this adjustment is the
amount of time the doors will stand open when the car has arrived at the security
return landing.
S17 — 0-1 0 Security Exit Not Required - This adjustment allows all landings in a building to be
secured, including the security return landing.
Values:
0 = Security return landing can not be secured.
1 = Security return landing can be secured.
S18 — 0-1 0 Security Homing Enabled between Calls - This adjustment returns the car to the
security return landing when it has no calls.
Values:
0 = Security homing is not enabled.
1 = Security homing is enabled.
S19 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Lockout Activate - This adjustment will activate Program A
Security Lockout for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program A lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program A lockout block is activated.
S20 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Lockout Override Activate - This adjustment activates Program
A Lockout Overrides for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program A lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program A lockout block is activated.
S21 — 0-1 1 Security Program A Home On Init - Upon activation of Program A, this adjustment
will cause the car to home to the security return landing for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Do not home to return landing.
1 = Home to return landing.
S22 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Shuts Down Car - Upon activation of Program A, this adjust-
ment will cause the car to shut down for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Do not shut down
1 = Shut down

Printed in USA May, 2012 89

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

S23 — 0-1 1 Security Program A allows the car to answer unsecured Floor Calls during Emer-
gency Dispatch - While on Security Program A for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this
adjustment allows the car to run to unsecured floors when it is on Emergency Dis-
patch.
Values:
0 = Do not allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
1 = Allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
S24 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Independent Service Overrides - This adjustment activates
Independent Service to override lockouts when the car is on Security Program A for
TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = While simultaneously on Independent Service and Security Operation Program
A, Independent Service will only serve floors not secured.
Note: If Independent Service is active before security, all calls remain unsecured.
1 = During Security Program A, Independent Service will override lockouts.
S25 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Independent Service Activates Security Override Output -
When the car is on Security Program A for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment
prompts the Independent Service to activate (SOO).
Values:
0 = Independent Service will not activate the Security Override Output
Security Program A.
1 = Independent Service will activate the Security Override Output.
S26 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Inconspicuous Riser Overrides - This adjustment activates the
Inconspicuous Riser Operation to override the Security Program A for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will not override Security Program A.
1 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will override Security Program A.
S27 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Lanterns Only on Hall Call - When the car is on Security Pro-
gram A for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment prompts the lanterns to activate
only on the transfer of a hall call.
Values:
0 = Lanterns will operate normally during activation of Security Program A.
1 = Lanterns will operate only when a hall call is transferred by the car during acti-
vation of Security Program A.
S28 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Lockout Activate - This adjustment activates Program B Secu-
rity Lockout for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program B lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program B lockout block is activated.
S29 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Lockout Override Activate - This adjustment activates Security
Program B Lockout Overrides for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program B lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program B lockout block is activated.
S30 — 0-1 1 Security Program B Home On Init - Upon activation of Program B for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only, this adjustment activates the car to home to the security return land-
ing.
Values:
0 = Do not home to the return landing.
1 = Home to the return landing.

90 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

S31 — 0-11 0 Security Program B Car Shuts Down - Upon activation of Program B for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only, this adjustment activates the car to shut down.
Values:
0 = Do not shut down
1 = Shut down
S33 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Independent Service Overrides - This adjustment activates
Independent Service to override lockouts when the car is on Security Program B for
TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = While simultaneously on Independent Service and Security Operation Program
B, Independent Service will only serve floors not secured.
Note: If Independent Service is active before security, all calls remain unsecured.
1 = During Security Program B, Independent Service will override lockouts.
S34 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Independent Service Activates Security Override Output -
When the car is on Security Program B for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment
prompts the Independent Service to activate (SOO).
Values:
0 = Independent Service will not activate the Security Override Output Security Pro-
gram B.
1 = During Security Program B, Independent Service will activate the Security
Override Output.
S35 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Inconspicuous Riser Overrides - This adjustment activates the
Inconspicuous Riser Operation to override the Security Program B for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will not override Security Program B.
1 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will override Security Program B.
S36 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Lanterns Only on Hall Call - When the car is on Security Pro-
gram B for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment prompts the lanterns to activate
only on the transfer of a hall call.
Values:
0 = Lanterns will operate normally during activation of Security Program B
1 = Lanterns will operate only when a hall call is transferred by the car during acti-
vation of Security Program B.
S37 sec 0-255 5 Security Program A Car Available Delay - While on Security Program A for TYPE 8
or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment sets the time delay that a car remains unavailable
for hall calls after completion of a previous call.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
S38 sec 0-255 5 Security Program B Car Available Delay - While on Security Program B for TYPE 8
or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment sets the time delay that a car remains unavailable
for hall calls after completion of a previous call.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Printed in USA May, 2012 91

Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

S39 — 0-3 0 Car Call Lockout Override Registers Car Call - This adjustment activates a lockout
override input to register the associated car call.
Values:
0 = Lockout Override activation does not register the corresponding car call.
1 = Lockout Override activation registers the corresponding car call.
2 = While on Program A security, the Lockout Override activation registers the
corresponding car call.
3 = While on Program B security, the Lockout Override activation registers the
corresponding car call.
S40 floor 0-nf 0 Neo Natal Landing A.
S41 floor 0-nf 0 Neo Natal Landing B.
SNI — 0-1 0 Set Non-Proprietary Interface - Manufacturing use only.
STU — — — Selector Setup Command - This command toggles the setup mode On and Off.
Notes:
• To allow car to learn appropriate front versus rear leveling vanes for each floor.
During the setup mode, run the car on Inspection Operation from the bottom of
the hoistway to the top.
• The floor position counts will also be learned for encoder or tape selectors.
VER — — — Version - This adjustment displays the version/revision and part number of the car
generic software, and the DSP and ETSD/L.
Also displayed (if applicable):
• Integral group
• BETA S/W
• Enhanced CPU
• Word wide job EPROM
• Custom Software: Shell, and contract generic package number/revision.
WRT — — — Write Parameters - This command saves working values in RAM memory to
EEPROM (protects the working values in the event the controller's power is lost).
Note: On power-up, or if the terminal is disconnected, the working values are read
from EEPROM into RAM memory.
X10 — 0-1 1 Audible Car Call Enable - This adjustment provides an audible signal to alert a
handicapped passenger that a car call has been accepted by the elevator.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
X11 — 0-2 1 Arrow Type - This adjustment sets the direction and preference arrows.
Direction arrows indicate direction of actual car movement.
Preference arrows indicate direction in which car has a preference to run.
Values:
0 = Direction arrows
1 = Preference arrows
2 = Preference and direction arrows
X12 — 0-1 0 Car Lantern at Door Reversal Limit - This adjustment enables car lantern operation
when the door reaches the reversal limit switch.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

92 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

X13 — 0-1 1 Car Lantern at Lobby - This adjustment enables car lantern operation when the car
reaches the lobby.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
X14 0.1 sec 1-48 5 Flasher Rate - This adjustment sets the flashing rate for the flashing jewels.
X15 — 0-4 2 Front Lantern Type - This adjustment sets type of lanterns used for front openings.
Values:
0 = No Lanterns
1 = Car Lanterns only
2 = Hall Lanterns only
3 = Both Car and Hall Lanterns
4 = Arrival Lanterns
X16 0.1 sec 0-40 3 Lantern Delay at Lobby - This adjustment sets delay time of lantern activation at
lobby.
X17 — 0-2 0 Lantern Fire Position - This adjustment sets when the lanterns activate during fire
service.
Values:
0 = At slow-down
1 = At leveling zone
2 = At floor level
X18 0.1 sec 0-20 4 Lantern Off Time - This adjustment sets the duty of the off time during on/off cycle
of lanterns and gongs operation.
X19 0.1 sec 0-20 4 Lantern On Time - This adjustment sets the duty of the on time during on/off cycle
of lanterns and gongs operation.
X20 min 0-10 0 PI Timeout Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before the position indica-
tors (PI) will turn off (if allowed by other options that may be active).
Note: If this value is not set, PI Timeout will not be allowed.
X21 — 0-4 2 Rear Lantern Type - This adjustment sets type of lanterns used for rear openings.
Values:
0 = No Lanterns
1 = Car Lanterns only
2 = Hall Lanterns only
3 = Both Car and Hall Lanterns
4 = Arrival Lanterns
X22 — 0-2 1 Floor Passing Tone to Buzzer - This adjustment sets whether or not the buzzer in
the car station will be used for the floor passing tone.
Values:
0 = The car station buzzer not be used for the floor passing tone.
1 = The car station buzzer used for the floor passing tone (only if FPT does not
exist).
2 = The buzzer in the car station will be used for the floor passing tone.
X23 — 3-4 4 Number of Display Characters - This adjustment sets the number of display
characters available in the Digital PI. Note: For the Hall PI, see X28.
Values:
3 = 3-character display
4 = 4-character display
X24 0.1 sec 1-20 3 GAL Tone Timer Adjustment - This adjustment sets the actual length of time that
the floor passing tone signal will be active (to indicate that the car is passing or
arriving at a new floor).

Printed in USA May, 2012 93

Car Error Codes DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Car Error Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

981 Terminal Slowdown was activated before normal slowdown;
This fault does not shut the car down.
1001 OS could not create a software time during power up. This • Noise levels that affect CPU operation.
fault is mainly used during software development, but proves • Defective CPU software allocates too many timers
useful to detect operational issues on installed units. (only when installing a new software version).
1002 OS could not allocate memory - This fault is mainly used dur- • Noise levels that affect CPU operation
ing software development, but proves useful to detect opera- • Defective CPU software allocates too much mem-
tional issues on installed units. ory (only when installing new software version)
1003 Manufacturing Use Only.
1004 Gate and locks opened during a run - A car or hoistway inter- • Car doors clipping interlocks
lock opened while the car was running. • Defective I/O
• Defective gate contact
• Defective wiring
1005 DOL was detected while HW closed. • A defective DOL input
• A defective HDIF input
1006 The hoistway interlock failed to close. • A defective I/O
• A defective hoistway door contact
• A blocked hoistway door
1007 The safety string opened during a run and caused an emer- • An open device in the safety string
gency stop. • A defective I/O
1008 The motor contactor is already energized (MCD/MCE) - A run • A defective I/O
initiation was issued, but either MCD was already inactive, or • Software activation error
MCE was already active. • Defective relays
1009 • A valve contact error (MCD is open) • A defective MCD input
• A Down run failure • A defective MCE input
• Either the valves or MC are not ready • Defective relays
• MCD is inactive, or MCE is active during a Down run
1010 • Motor contactor error (MCD Open) • Defective MCD input
• MCD failed to energize or MCE failed to de-energize after • Defective MCE input
run • Defective MC contact
• Defective relays
1011 • The motor contactor failed to energize (MCD/MCE) • A defective MCD input
• MCD is active, or MCE is inactive after a run • A defective MCE input
• Motor Contactor Fault (MCF) input is activated • A defective MC contact
• Defective relays
• A defective MCF input
• A defective MCF output on the electronic starter
Possible Solutions:
• Verify the starting current on the solid state
starter
1013 NV hardware failure - The software issued a command to • A defective CPU
modify non-volatile memory that was not completed, or com- Possible Solutions:
pleted with invalid results. • Replace the CPU
1014 NV checksum error - The data in non-volatile memory was • A defective CPU
lost. Possible Solutions:
• Replace the CPU
1015 The software is making an invalid NV request.

94 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Car Error Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1016 The NV is full and cannot hold another client structure. There
is no more room for data in non-volatile memory.
1017 A change in run type occurred during a run. The car is not
performing an emergency stop and the software has
changed the type of run.
1018 Normal limit error - Both of the top and bottom normal limits • Defective wiring
(DL, NTST, NTSB) are active at the same time. • A defective I/O
1019 • The normal limits and the car position do not agree • Defective wiring
• The selector is not lost • A defective I/O
• The car position is not at the top or bottom floor
• The I/O DL, NTST, NTSB do not agree
1020 The I/O database has been corrupted, or the checksum for
the I/O has changed.
1021 • A Safety Node is Offline • A wiring error
• Inspection indicates an invalid I/O condition • A defective I/O: IN, INOP, INHA, INCN, INCT,
• The status of an I/O indicates a combination of active INHAM
and inactive inputs that are not allowed
1022 Run monitor - The run protect timer has expired. • Ran too long at leveling speed
1023 Run monitor - The wrong direction run. The software issued a • Defective wiring
command to run in one direction, but the car actually ran in • Defective I/O
the other direction.
1024 Excessive number of re-levels - A fault is issued if the eleva- • A defective valve
tor re-levels more than 25 times within a 5-minute interval. • A mis-adjusted valve
1025 BP parity error - • A magnet issue or selector.
1026 Door Zone Sequence Error - The door zone input was not
activated in expected sequence.
1027 Door Zone Monitor Error - The door zone monitor input was
not activated when expected.
DZM should be only be inactive if DZ1, DZ2, and DZE are
active.
DZM should be active all other times.
1028 The selector shows the level outside of the door zone - The
inputs indicate that the car is level at the floor-at some loca-
tion other than within the door zone.
1029 LU and LD are active at same time - This fault indicates that
both level up and level down inputs are active at the same
time.
1030 Leveling Sequence Error - The leveling inputs were activated
in an invalid sequence.
1031 Selector setup error - The selector was not properly setup. • The incorrect number of leveling vanes was
detected
• A bad floor position setup
• The selector setup is incomplete
• Scanning the hatch too fast
1032 False slowdown interrupt - The slowdown interrupt was
detected with no active slowdown input.
1033 Selector position error - The selector position is out of step
with either the encoder, the slowdown, or the BP position.

Printed in USA May, 2012 95

Car Error Codes DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1034 Expansion board error - The incorrect expansion board type • The wrong type of expansion board was installed
was returned. • A defective expansion board or cable
• An expansion cable was installed backwards
• An incorrect expansion board type adjustment
(see EIO adjustment)
1040 Door watchdog closing failure - The DCL input did not acti- • An incorrect D21 and/or D22 adjustment
vate within the expected time interval.
1041 Door watchdog opening failure - The DCL input did not acti- • An incorrect D21 and/or D22 adjustment
vate within the expected time interval.
1042 Viscosity shutdown (due to over temperature) - The OLTO
input is/was active.
1043 Low oil shutdown - The car did not complete a floor-to-floor • The O17 value was exceeded
run within the low oil timer interval.
1044 Both inputs are in the required state to activate and de-acti-
vate Fire Service Phase 1 at the same time.
1045 Both inputs are in the required state to activate and de-acti-
vate Fire Service Phase 2 at the same time.
1046 Failed to add I/O to the hardware assignments list - An invalid
I/O name was found.
1049 Open door protection failure - The doors failed to open in the • A defective I/O
allotted time. • A defective door operation
1050 Close door protection failure - The doors failed to close in the • A defective I/O
allotted time. • A defective door operation
1051 Stuck door opening device error - The SE, EE, DOB, or DHB I/ • A defective I/O
O is stuck in the active state. • A defective door operation
1052 Stuck DCB error - A DCB I/O is stuck in the active state. • A defective I/O
• A defective door operation
1053 The Fire Service Phase 1 secondary switch I/O does not • An invalid adjustment F16 for the fire service type
match the adjustment. • An invalid adjustment F15 for the secondary fire
service switch type
• The I/O provided does not match the require-
ments
1054 Down run time has exceeded 5 minutes - The down run • A defective I/O
request was longer than the time allowed for a full hoistway • A defective valve adjustment
run in the down direction. • A defective valve
1055 The selector car position does not match with the BP sensors • A defective selector
at the floor level - The BP magnets exist, and are valid, but • Faulty or missing BP magnets
do not agree with the position reported by the selector. Possible Solutions:
• The selector car position does not match with the
BP sensors at the floor level.
• The BP magnets exist, and are valid, but do not
agree with the position reported by the selector
1056 Floor tables of the encoder counts are not set up when • A defective hoistway scan
attempting an auto run. • A defective CPU
Note: When the elevator is not on inspection operation, and • A defective CPU battery
the level reference in non-volatile memory for any floor is • Loose battery connections
invalid. • An improper power unit setup
• Improper selector signals
• Verify Pnn and/or Mnn adjustments

96 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Car Error Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1057 The encoder is out of tolerance at the floor level - The car is • A defective encoder
at floor level, and the encoder position count is different than
the floor position count by more than the value in adjustment
P20.
1058 The selector position is wrong at the limit of travel - The car is
at the bottom or top of its travel limit, and the selector has
determined that the closest floor is not the corresponding
bottom or top floor.
1059 Bad encoder re-calibration - Two (2) consecutive encoder re- • A defective encoder
calibrations were out of range.
Note: The encoder reported a count (while at two consecutive
floors) that was different from each floor position count by
more than adjustment P20.
1060 The selector setup was not completed - The selector setup • A defective CPU
either failed or was terminated before completion. • A defective selector
1061 Selector setup position count table error - The setup has • A defective selector
determined that a value for a floor was invalid, and the setup
is invalidated.
1062 1. Encoder interrupt failure - A car passed a slowdown • A defective encoder
point without receiving confirmation from the encoder. • Defective encoder wiring
Possible Solutions:
• Check the slowdown magnets for gaps
• Verify the P17 and/or P18 adjustments

• The terminal slowdown (NTST input for top,

2. Improper normal terminal slowdown magnet placement NTSB input for bottom) is reached too early
(before the corresponding selector slowdown is
reached). See P17 for top, and P18 for bottom.
• If the NTSB input deactivates (metered logic) at
the top terminal, or if the NTST input deacti-
vates (metered logic) at the bottom terminal:
• A 1086 error is generated
• A 1062 error is generated
• The car will run at slow speed to the next
stop
Possible Solutions:
• Check the slowdown magnets for gaps
1064 LON resync fail channel A error - On power up, there is a fail-
ure to synchronize 188 with the channel A neuron.
Note: Channel A is shut down and no communications can
take place on channel A.
1066 LON resync fail channel B error - On power up, there is a fail-
ure to synchronize 188 with the channel A neuron.
Note: Channel B is shut down and no communications can
take place on channel B.
1067 Viscosity operation has detected activation of both low tem- • One or both sensors is out of adjustment
perature and high temperature sensors at the same time. • One or both sensors is defective
• Input wiring error
• A defective CPU card

Printed in USA May, 2012 97

Car Error Codes DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1068 Dual post jack resync fault (racking error) - Attempts to re- • Defective hydraulic system components seeping
synchronize the dual-post jack have failed. The jack cylinders oil, which leads to jack misalignment
are too far out of synchronization to allow operation, and the • Improper wiring
elevator shuts down. • Defective jack position sensors
• A defective CPU card
1069 False power failure error - The CPU received a false NMI inter- • Electrical noise affecting the power fail detection
rupt, indicating an impending power failure, and the power signal and/or the power supply (check grounding
did not fail. and noise suppression)
• Power supply adjustment
• Defective power supply
• A defective CPU card
1070 LVU-LVD error - Neither of the LVU or the LVD leveling sensors • Defective selector sensors
were active while the car was within the door zone. • Improper wiring
Minimum requirements: • A defective CPU card
• One sensor active within the door zone
• Both sensors active at the floor level
1071 Bottom limit switch override error - The bottom limit switch • A defective BLO relay and/or output
override circuit (controlled by output BLO) has been detected • A defective BLOM input
faulty by its monitoring input BLOM. • Improper wiring
Note: When this fault occurs, the elevator shuts down. • A defective CPU card
1072 Gate-Locks monitor error - The car gate hoistway interlock • A defective gate contact or hoistway interlock
circuit has been detected faulty by its monitoring input GLM, • Defective or improper wiring
or by redundant monitoring inputs GL1M and GL2M. • A defective GL relay, or defective GL1 / GL2 relays
• A defective GLM, GL1M, or GL2M input
• A defective CPU card
1073 Car/Gate door open limit error - A fault has been detected • A defective gate contact and/or door open limit
due to the simultaneous activation of the car gate contact • Improper wiring
and the door open limit. • Defective communication between the CPU card
and the electronic door operator
• A defective CPU card and/or electronic door oper-
ator
• A defective DOL or CDCF input
1074 Jack Low Pressure Error - The jack low pressure sensor has • The possibility that the car hangs up in the hoist-
activated, and down motion is not permitted. way during down motion, which allows oil to drain
out of the cylinder
• The car settled onto the buffers in the pit
• A defective pressure sensor
• Improper wiring
• A defective CPU card
• The expansion board cable is reversed
1075 Car Stop Switch Override Error - The car stop switch override • A defective CSTOM input
circuit (controlled by CSTO output) has been detected faulty • A defective CSTO output
by its monitoring CSTOM input, and the elevator shuts down. • Improper wiring
• A defective CPU card
1076 Freight door interlock stuck error - The freight door interlock • A defective interlock
(FDI) has failed to close at the start of a run, or failed to open • A defective retiring cam
at the end of a run. • Improper wiring
• A defective CPU card
1077 Loss of encoder pulse train error - While the car was in • A defective rotary encoder
motion, the encoder motion signal pulse train (furnished by • Defective tape motion sensors
either a tape or rotary encoder) was lost, and the elevator is • Improper wiring
shut down at a floor. • A defective CPU card

98 Vertical Express
ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Car Error Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1078 Low battery error - The 3-volt battery in the CPU card is either • A dead battery
low or dead: • The battery is missing, or installed backwards
• This battery is required to ensure retention of job configu- • A defective CPU card
ration and adjustments.
• If the job configuration and adjustments are lost, then the
job configuration must be uploaded again from IMS.
• Elevator adjustments may have to be repeated, including
scanning the hoistway to learn the floor positions.
1079 Down run attempted but velocity stayed zero - The position • A defective position system (encoder/selector)
system specified determines the car velocity, and a down run • A car or jack is bound and not able to move
is attempted. If the velocity returned by the position system • The position system adjustment does not match
remains zero, assume that the car has stalled. the provided hardware
1080 Bad group job data - The group software cannot run. Stored • An invalid configuration or adjustment
non-volatile data has invalid parameters in the group portion. • Corrupted memory: Install the previously down-
loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was generated previously by doing a Service /
Transfer / Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
• This error can also be generated by the following
information in the group memory:
• The number of floors = 0, or is greater than the
maximum number of floors permitted
• The number of cars in the group = 0, or is greater
than the maximum number of cars permitted
• The number of I/O = 0, or is greater than the
maximum number of I/O permitted
• Rear operation is specified, but there are no rear
openings specified
1081 Bad initialization of non-volatile memory - This fault can • Memory is temporarily unavailable - Reset the
occur if a new section of non-volatile memory is allocated by CPU
software, but the memory was not available at that time. • A software error
Note: This fault can also occur when updating software or • Corrupted memory - Install previously down-
performing an INIT or INIT ALL. The Remote FAST (if open) loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
will display which section of non-volatile memory failed. file was previously generated: Service>Trans-
fer>Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
1082 Bad save to non-volatile memory - This fault can occur if a • Memory is temporarily unavailable - Reset the
save to non-volatile memory is attempted by software but the CPU
memory was not available at that time. • A software error
Note: The Remote FAST (if open) will display which section of • Corrupted memory - Install previously down-
non-volatile memory failed. loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was previously generated: Service>Trans-
fer>Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card

Printed in USA May, 2012 99

Car Error Codes DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1083 Bad recall of non-volatile memory - This fault can occur if: • Memory was temporarily unavailable - Reset the
• A recall from non-volatile memory is attempted by soft- CPU
ware, but the memory was not available at that time, or • A job image error - Check for incorrect TAG sizes
• If a memory segment is set to an invalid size, or through the WRT Remote FAST command
• If a variable is set out of its valid range. The Remote FAST • A job image error - Check for variables set incor-
(if open) will display which section of non-volatile memory rectly through the GET Remote FAST command
failed. • Corrupted memory - Install previously down-
loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was previously generated: Service>Trans-
fer>Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
1085 An SPI error has been detected on an CN or HN node. • An invalid configuration or adjustment
• Corrupted memory - Install the previously down-
loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was generated through a Service / Transfer /
Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
1086 Normal terminal slowdown limit failure - This fault is normally • An invalid configuration or adjustment of mag-
caused by a sensor or magnet failure of NTST, NTSB, TSR1, nets or selector
TSR2. • Corrupted memory - Install the prior downloaded
If the car is located at a Terminal Landing: backup copy of non-volatile memory (this file was
• The sensors for that terminal did not operate as required previously generated: Service>Transfer>Down-
to back up normal slowdown. The car is shut down, with load from IMS)
a service status of SELECTOR. • A bad CPU card
• The sensors for the other terminal are not in the proper
state:
• A 1086 error is logged, but the car is not shutdown.
• A 1062 error will be generated (on the very next run
away from that terminal) and the car will run at slow
speed to the next stop.
If the car is located at the Bottom Terminal:
• Two consecutive failures of NTSB must occur before the
car is shut down, and a 1086 fault is generated with
each failure.
If the car is located at the Top Terminal:
• A single failure of NTST, TSL1, or TSL2 will cause the car
to shut down.
1087 Valve Contact Off Error - This fault occurs when the car has • A stuck valve pilot relay
no run request, but the MCD input indicates that the run cir- • A stuck motor contactor auxiliary contact
cuit contacts were active. • A defective MCD input
• A bad CPU card
• Magnets at top are bad or in the wrong sequence
1088 Motor contactor Off - This fault occurs when the car does not • A stuck motor contactor auxiliary contact
have a run request, but the MCE input indicates that the • A defective MCE input
motor contactor was still enabled. • A bad CPU card
1089 The car gate and door locks made, but the door close limit • Faulty gate or locks
(DCL) was not activated. • Jumpers on the gate or locks
• A defective DCL or CDCF input
• Improper timing between the DCL and CDCF
inputs
1090 LON Channel A is not functioning properly.
LON Channel A is not receiving any data from any LON
devices on the network.

100 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Car Error Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1091 LON Channel B is not functioning properly.
LON Channel B is not receiving any data from any LON
devices on the network.
1092 LON Host-A is not communicating with the 188/186 proces-
sor over the parallel-bus interface on the CPU card.
1093 LON Host-B is not communicating with the 188/186 proces-
sor over the parallel-bus interface on the CPU card.
1094 Hoistway access monitor failure - This fault occurs when
INHA and INHAM are in the same state.
1095 Dynamic sensor failure - This fault occurs when car runs to • Check TPDL, TPDR
top landing and one of the dynamic sensors fails to activate.
1096 CDCF failure - This fault occurs when CDCF and CDCFM are in
the same state.
1097 CDCR failure - This fault occurs when CDCR and CDCRM are
in the same state.
1098 HDIF failure - This fault occurs when HDIF and HDIFM are in
the same state.
1099 HDIR failure - This fault occurs when HDIR and HDIRM are in
the same state.
1100 Door bypass failure - This fault occurs when the bypass • A defective I/O (CDBM/HDBM)
switches are activated and car does not go on inspection • Improper wiring
operation. • A defective CPU card
1101 The front gate made, and DCL did not activate. • A defective I/O (CDCF, DCL, or CDCFM)
1102 The rear gate made, and DCLR did not activate. • A defective I/O (CDCR, DCLR, or CDCRM)
1103 Door communication loss was detected.
1104 Gate and lock error - The gate and lock circuit opened during • The car doors are clipping interlocks
a run. • A defective I/O (HDIF/HDIR)
• A defective gate contact
• Defective wiring
1105 Car door lock error - The car door did not close when DCL • A defective I/O (CDCF/CDCR or DCL)
was made. • A defective car gate contact
• Defective wiring
1108 Start retry shutdown - The controller will shutdown after 6
consecutive attempts to start a run.
1109 Normally, jack resync operation is completed when pressure • Improper resynch
switch activates or O29 expires (determined by O51setting). • A defective pressure switch
If pressure switch does not activate within 60 seconds of • A defective pressure switch input
reaching the bottom limit, Fault 1109 is generated.
1110 A17/B44 shutdown error - Inspection to reset.
1120 The left dynamic jack sensor did not activate when it should • Improper left dynamic sensor installation
have. • A defective left dynamic sensor
1121 The right dynamic jack sensor did not activate when it should • Improper right dynamic sensor installation
have. • A defective right dynamic sensor
1122 The car was already in slowdown when the dynamic jack • Improper dynamic sensor installation
resynch sensors were activated. • Defective dynamic sensors
Note: Dynamic sensors should activate 12 inches before the • The slowdown distance is too long
slowdown point.
1123 Up run stalled due to a command to run up, but no encoder • Z44 value exceeded.
pulses were detected with Z44.

Printed in USA May, 2012 101

Group Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Group Adjustments and Commands

These adjustments are always referred to as system adjustments (when REE = 0) or Car/Group adjustments (when REE= a Car
Number) The system adjustments are used for operations or functions which affect all the cars in the group, while the Car/Group
adjustments are for operations or functions which affect only that car.

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition

ALR cars 0-n 0 Alternate Lobby Request - The number of cars required to park at the alternate
lobby. CSW bit 9 must be set to activate.
ALY floor 1-nfloor 2 Alternate Lobby Floor - The floor that is designated as the alternate lobby floor. To
activate, the CSW bit 9 must be set.
AST 1/16 sec 255- 1000 Automatic Service Protection Time - This group adjustment must always be set a
62400 minimum of 15 seconds higher than the car AST.
To disable the group AST, See CS1 bit 10.
BDP 1/16 sec 0-720 0 Blind-crossing Dispatch Penalty Time - This adjustment is valid only when there is
an express zone and, when cars are available, this adjustment prevents assigning
calls across the express zone.
BITD — — — Bit Display - This command displays a binary list of all the control status word val-
ues.
See Also: BITR, BITS
BITR — — — Bit Reset - This command resets individual control status word bit values.
Example: BITR1,4 will reset bit 4 of CS1.
See Also: BITD, BITS
BITS — — — Bit Set - This command sets individual control status word bit values.
Example: BITS1,4 will set bit 4 of CS1.
See Also: BITD, BITR
CBH sec 0-900 20 Code Blue Door Hold Time - The time the doors will remain opened at the code
blue designated floor. If, after this time, the Hospital Service switch has not been
activated, the doors will close and the car will return to normal operation.
Note: If the AST timer expires before CBH, the car will return to automatic opera-
tion.
CB1-8 cars 0-ncars 1-8 Code Blue Priority 1-8 - Use this adjustment to establish priorities for the cars
responding to Code Blue Operation.
CB1 is the highest priority car followed by CB2, etc.
A zero (0) for this adjustment turns Off the Code Blue Operation for the car.
See related group adjustment CSW Bit 8 (determines the assignment scheme used
in selecting cars for Code Blue calls).
CCP sec 0-20 10 No Coincident Car Call Penalty Time - If carn has a coincident car call at a floor with
a hall call, and if the ETA for carn is less than the ETA of the best car, carn will get
the assignment.
CLA — 0-240 0 Car Link Address - The address used by the CPU card for all communications on
the J2 serial port.
Notes:
• To automatically generate an internal software value, set the CLA to 0.
• To disable the J2 port, set the CLA to 240 and save with the WRT command (this
action will occur after a power cycle).
• For integral car/group CPU cards, the car CLA adjustment overrides the group
CLA adjustment.
DDT 2 sec 10-255 90 Down-peak Duration Time - The minimum duration of down peak after down peak
demand is no longer present.

102 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

DES ASCII — car no. Designation - This adjustment sets the car character designation label displayed
Character on the Car Diagnostic Screen.
Example: DESn=xxx
xxx = ASCII designation
Enter the WRT command, cycle the CPU, and reload from the control panel.
DLB floor 1-nfloors 2 Dual Lobby Floor - The floor position number designated as the dual lobby landing.
DLR cars 1-ncars 1 Dual Lobby Request - The number of cars required to park at the dual lobby floor.
DZC cars 1-15 1 Maximum Number of Cars on Simultaneous Low Zone Operation - This adjustment
limits the number of cars that may be simultaneously dispatched to the lower por-
tion of the hoistway.
This adjustment should be typically set to 1 for smaller groups, or 2 for groups of
six or more cars.
• If this adjustment value is too small, lower floor service suffers.
• If this adjustment value is too large, upper floor service suffers.
To disable Down Peak Zoning Operation, set Adjustment DZC to zero (0).
DZF floors nfloors 4 Minimum Number of Floors in Low Zone - This adjustment enforces a minimum
number of floors contained in the low zone, and should be set according to the
number of floors that will typically almost fill up a car before it returns to the lobby.
Note: It is generally undesirable to dispatch a car from the lobby to serve only two
or three calls before returning to the lobby.
DZT sec 0-600 180 Long-Wait Call Threshold - One long-wait down call will trigger down peak zoning to
the low zone (if the time threshold is above this adjustment).
The time threshold will also trigger for a shorter threshold of two long-wait calls, or
a threshold of three long-wait calls.
• If this adjustment value is too large, lower floor service suffers.
• If this adjustment value is too small, upper floor service suffers.
Note: If Down Peak Operation is being triggered by an average down call wait
threshold, then this adjustment should be set greater than that threshold.
EAT sec 0-100 Job Emergency Power Auto Select Timer - If the groups are powered up on emergency
EPROM power simultaneously, this adjustment sets the time for each group (in the lowering
sequence) to initialize and begin lowering.
EL1-8 ncars 0-ncars 1-8 Emergency Power Lowering - This adjustment sets the automatic lowering
sequence for Emergency Power Operation.
Note: EL1 would be the first elevator to lower, and EL8 would be the last elevator to
lower.
ELT sec 0-60 Job Emergency Power Lower Timer - This adjustment sets the time for each group in
EPROM the lowering sequence.
Note: If the groups are powered up simultaneously, the previous group has suffi-
cient time to initialize and begin to lower.
EP1-8 ncars 0-ncars 1-8 Emergency Power Run -This adjustment sets the automatic select to run sequence
for Emergency Power Operation.
Note: EP1 would be the first elevator to lower, and EP8 would be the last elevator to
lower.
EPF floors 1-nfloors 1 Emergency Power Return Floor - This is the designated floor position number for
the emergency power recall floor.
FAL floors 1-nfloors 2 Fire Alternate Floor - This is the designated floor position number for the alternate
fire landing
FIR floor 1-nf Job Fire Recall Landing - This adjustment sets the designated floor position number for
EPROM the Main Fire Recall Floor.
Note: This should be set to the floor location of the Phase 1 Fire Service key switch.

Printed in USA May, 2012 103

Group Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

FL1 1/16 sec 1-48 8 Flashing Timer - This adjustment sets the flashing rate of flashing jewels.
FL2 1/16 sec 1-48 2 Flickering Timer - This adjustment sets the flickering rate of flickering jewels.
FLT — — — Fault Buffer Display - This command displays the contents of the fault buffer. The
fault buffer contains a record of the previous 24 faults that have occurred, along
with the number of occurrences of that fault.
Format: FLT[n]n = The fault number to display (plus the next three faults).
To display all 24 faults, type FLT and press Enter.
To display faults starting with fault number n type FLTn, press Enter, and the follow-
ing screen will appear:
GET — — — GET Parameters - This command retrieves the saved parameters from the EEPROM
and moves them into RAM.
Notes:
• The CPU only works with parameter values that are stored in its RAM memory.
• To display a parameter that caused an out of range error, type GET and press
Enter.
• To eliminate a parameter error, enter a value in the appropriate range, save with
the WRT command, and recall with the GET command.
GLA — 0-240 0 Group Link Address - The address used by the CPU card for all communications on
the J1 serial port.
Notes:
• To automatically generate an internal software value, set GLA to zero (0).
• To disable the J1 port, set GLA to 240 and save with the WRT command (the J1
port will be disabled after a power cycle).
GRP — 1-8 Job Group ID - Set this number to the group number.
EEPROM
GSI 1/4 sec 0-160 0 Generator Sequence Interval - This is the required time interval between starting
the MG sets.
HCT sec 0-60 30 Hold Car Time - The time interval that the car remains at the lobby on Hold Car
Operation.
HLD cars 0-ncars 1 Hold Cars Not Up Peak - This adjustment sets the number of hold cars when NOT
on Up-Peak Operation.
HLP cars 0-ncars 1 Hold Cars During Up Peak - The number of hold cars when on Up Peak Operation.
HPT 1/16 sec 0-962 48 Hold Car Penalty Time - The amount of time added to the hold car’s ETA bid time.
LBY floors 1-nfloors 1 Lobby - This adjustment sets the designated floor position number for the lobby
floor, and is also used as the homing floor for the lobby elevator request.
LER cars 0-nc 1 Lobby Elevator Request - This is the number of cars requested to park at the lobby.
To disable the lobby parking, set this adjustment to zero (0).
See also: CSW bits 6, 13, and 14
LRP 1/16 sec 0-960 0 Lobby Request Penalty Time - The time added to the ETA of the car returning to the
lobby. This penalty time allows the group to assign hall calls to other cars in the
group before it assigns them to this requested car.
MDM — — — Modem Command - This adjustment displays the IMS modem status.
See Also: MDMB, MDMI, MDMP, MDMS
MDMB — — — Modem Baud Rate - The IMS modem baud rate
Note: On ICG jobs, use the car adjustment: MDM, MDMB, MDMI, MDMP, MDMS
See Also: MDMI, MDMP, MDMS, MDM
MDMI — — — Modem Initialization - Initializes the IMS modem settings to manufacturing default.
Note: On ICG jobs, use the car adjustment: MDM, MDMB, MDMI, MDMP, MDMS
See Also: MDMB, MDMP, MDMS, MDM

104 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

MDMP — — — Modem Prefix - Displays the dial prefix.
Note: On ICG jobs, use the car adjustment: MDM, MDMB, MDMI, MDMP, MDMS
See Also: MDMB, MDMI, MDMS, MDM
MDMS — — — Modem Setup String - Displays the IMS modem initialization commands. This com-
mand can also be used to set the Modem initialization string (e.g., MDMS, ATE0 V0
and S0).
Note: On ICG jobs, use the car adjustment: MDM, MDMB, MDMI, MDMP, MDMS
See Also: MDMB, MDMI, MDMP, MDM
MEP cars 1-ncars 1 Maximum Elevators on Emergency Power - This is the maximum number of cars
allowed to run simultaneously on Emergency Power Operation.
MID sec 0-32 4 Minimum Differential Time (MID)
Example:
MID = 4 seconds
Car A ETA = 22 seconds
CAR B ETA = 10 seconds
DIFF ETA = 11 seconds difference
• If the DIFF ETA > MID, and Car A ETA/2 > Car B ETA, the call will be re-assigned.
• The difference between Car A and Car B ETA must be greater than MID.
• The best ETA car must have double the ETA as the assigned car.
MLT 1/16 sec 0-960 350 Maximum Lobby Travel Time (ETA to Lobby)
To Select a Next Up Car: If the car has a car call at the lobby and the ETA < MLT,
assign this car to the lobby.
Notes:
• If ETA > MLT, the lowest ETA car is selected.
• If MLT is set too low, no cars are selected to run to the lobby.
MXD sec 0-60 15 Maximum Dispatch Time - The maximum difference of ETA in the scan to force hall
call re-assignment.
NCO calls 0-20 3 Next-Up Car Call Override - If the number of car calls exceed the NCO value, the car
is removed from Next-Up Operation and allowed to service car calls.
NDH sec 3-30 8 Next-up Door Hold Time - The time the doors are held open on Next-Up Operation
(if another car is waiting).
Notes:
• The time is reduced to zero (0) if the 50% loadweigher is activated, or if more
than NCO car calls are registered.
• This timer is added into the ETA calculation for this car.
NUN cars 0-ncars 1 The number of Next-Up cars when not on Up Peak Operation.
NUP cars 0-cars 1 The number of Next-Up cars when On Up Peak Operation.
NZN zones 0-6 0 Number of Zones - The maximum number of zones or parking floors in the group.
Notes:
• If this number is set larger than the number of cars, the parking floors (or zone
floors) will be rotated on each assignment.
• This parameter is usually set to a value less than the total number of cars.
See Also: ZN1, CSW Bits 4 and 5.
PAR — — — Parameters Use this command to review the current value of all parameters. The
parameters are listed from left to right and top to bottom on the screen
Shortcut keys:
• CTRL S = To stop the parameters from scrolling off the screen.
• CTRL Q = To resume the scrolling process.
• CTRL C or CTRL Z = To end the process.
See Also: PARA, PARD, PARI

Printed in USA May, 2012 105

Group Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

PARA — — — Parameter Altered - Use this command to update all parameters, or to change the
parameter mode display information.
Type PARA, and press Enter. This action will list the parameters (one at a time) and
display the current value.
If the value needs to be changed, enter the new value and press Enter.
If the parameter does not need to be changed, press Enter, and the next parameter
is displayed.
See Also: PARD, PARI, PAR
PARD — — — Parameter Download - This command is used to download (from the CPU card to a
computer) all system parameters associated with the PAR command.
Not supported in 32-Bit
See Also: PAR, PARA, PARI
PARI — — — Parameter Initialize - This adjustment restores most parameters to the default val-
ues set by the job EPROM.
Notes:
• All of the parameters displayed by the PAR command are affected.
• To save these parameters, use the WRT command.
See Also: PARA, PARD, PAR
PFT 2 sec 0-60 8 Park Free Time - The adjustment sets the amount of time the car must be free in
order to zone.
See Also: ZN1
PHNx — — — The phone number dialed by the modem during remote monitoring.
Enter the number with no dashes.
Where a pause is necessary, a comma may be used to provide a 2-second delay.
PIA ASCII — — Position Indicator Adjustment - Use this command to display or make changes to
the floor marking for each floor,
To change Floor Markings - Enter up to two characters (0-9, A-Z, or a space), and
press Enter. If no changes are required, press Enter.
Notes:
• The computer will continue to display each floor in succession until all floors have
been displayed.
• Changes can only be made to the first 32 landings.
• Any changes will automatically be saved.
• Changes made in the group will affect only group-based IMS screens.
• Changes must also be made to each car affected.
• For the changes to be reflected on the IMS screens, ensure that the Reload but-
ton is clicked for each car affected.
• The characters displayed in the tens place are limited to 1 through 3, or any two
special characters (0, 4-9, A-Z) as allowed by the existing I/O.
• When special characters are required in the tens place, see ATP.
See Also: PIAI, PIAD
PIAD floors — — Position Indicator Adjustment Display - This adjustment displays the current floor
markings for all floors.
See Also: PIA, PIAI
PIAI — — — Position Indicator Adjustment Initialize - This command resets all floor markings to
manufacturing default values. Use the PIA command to delete all changes made to
floor markings.
See Also: PIA, PIAD
RCB — — — Reset Code Blue Calls - This command resets all registered Code Blue calls.
RDC — — — Reset Down Calls - This command resets all registered Down calls.

106 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

REE — — — Reference Elevator - Set this command for the group (REE = 0), or for an individual
car (REE = 1 to 8).
RFLn — — — Reset Fault - This command resets the related faults for the group system (n = 0),
or the group car (n = 1-8).
RLB floors 1-nfloors 2 Rear Lobby Floor - See LBY and CSW Bit 11.
RLR cars 0-ncars 1 Rear Lobby Car Request - See LER and CSW Bit 11.
RRD — — — Reset Rear Down Call - This command resets all registered rear down hall calls.
RRU — — — Reset Rear Up Call - This command resets all registered rear up hall calls.
RTC — — — Real Time Clock - This command shows the time elapsed since the last power-up.
Format: Day-hour:minute:second
RUC — — — Reset Up Calls - This command resets all registered up hall calls.
RUT — — — Reset Up Time - This command resets the stored, accumulated power-up time,
and will also reset the clock display on the video monitor.
Use the WRT command to save the changes.
SCA — — — Scan Call Assignment Table - This command finds a specific car as set by REE (1
thru 8), and reviews the Scan Assignment Table of all floors.
Use the SCAA command to enter the following values (with their designations):
See Also: SCAA, SCAI

Value Designation
Rear Front
Calls Calls
0 0 Do not accept Up or Down hall calls for that floor
1 1 Accept only Up hall calls for that floor
2 2 Accept only Down hall calls for that floor
3 3 Accept both Up and Down hall calls for that floor

SCAA — — — Scan Call Assignment Alter - This command changes the floor scan assignment
table for Car REE.
See Also: SCA, SCAI
SCAI — — — Scan Call Assignment, Initialize - This command will initialize the floor scan assign-
ment (for all cars) to manufacturing default.
See Also: SCA, SCAA
SCBf — — — Set Code Blue Call - This command will set a Code Blue Call at Floorf.
SCBRf — — — Set Code Blue Rear Call - This command will set a Rear Code Blue Call at Floorf
SDCf — — — Set Down Call - This command will set a down hall call at Floorf.
SEC floors 1-nfloors 1 Security Floor - When security is activated, the cars will home to this landing.
See Also: CS3 Bit 2

Printed in USA May, 2012 107

Group Adjustments and Commands DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

SFL — — — Secure Hall Call Lockout - This adjustment will lock out access to a hall button for
all cars in the group.
Format: SFL U|D <[>R]<[>S/U] n
U = Up calls
D = Down calls
R = Rear
S = Secure
U = Unsecure
n = Floor Number
Examples:
• To lock out the tenth floor rear up hall call, type SFLURS10 and press Enter.
• To unlock the third floor front up hall call, type SFLUU3 and press Enter.
• To view secured calls, use the DSF command.
SRDf — — — Set Rear Down Call - This command will set a rear down hall call at Floorf.
SRUf — — — Set Rear Up Call - This command will set a rear up hall call at Floorf.
SSI — — — Special Security Initialization - Use this adjustment to restore the security status
words and CS4/CS5 to Job EPROM defaults.
SUCf — — — Set Up Call - This command will set an up hall call at Floorf.
TES — — — Type Elevator Service - Type of elevator service in HEX (for REE = 1-8).

Value Designation
0H Automatic Operation
1H Out of Service from Car Controller
2H Loss of Communication
4H Time-out Service from Group
8H Code Blue Service
10H Emergency Power Recall Service
20H Loss of Hall Call Power Service
40H Simplex or Inconspicuous Riser Service
REE=0 Displays the total number of cars in auto service

TF1 floor 0-nfloors 0 Transfer Floor 1 - This adjustment sets which floor is designated as Transfer Floor 1
(which will only accept Down hall calls). A zero (0) will disable the transfer floor
operation.
Notes:
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is activated, and the car is below the transfer floor,
the car call for the transfer floor cannot be registered.
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is not active, or if the car is above the transfer floor,
the car call for the transfer floor can be registered.
• The TF1 adjustment in the car should be set to the same value as TF1 in the
group.
TF2 floor 0-nfloors 0 Transfer Floor 2 - This adjustments sets the floor designated as the transfer floor
(which accepts only Down hall calls). A zero (0) value will disable the Transfer Floor
Operation.
Notes:
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is activated, and the car is below the transfer floor,
the car call for the transfer floor cannot be registered.
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is not active, or if the car is above the transfer floor,
the car call for the transfer floor can be registered.
• The TF2 adjustment in the car should be set to the same value as TF2 in the
group.

108 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

TFC — — — Traffic Monitor - This command will activate and control traffic surveys through the
Remote FAST.
Syntax: TFC<[>B|E|In|M|S|R|T|VI]
Examples:
TFC = Display usage message
TFCB = Begin collecting data
E = End survey
TFCI = View interval size
TFCI=15, Set interval to 15
TFCM = Collection mode
0 = No wrap
1 = Wrap On
TFCS = Display current status
TFCR = Reset
TFCT = Display system time
TFCT = Change system time, (mm/dd/yy, hh:mm:ss)
TFCVI = Display in-service data
TIM — — — Time - This adjustment sets the length of time (total number of days) since the last
CPU power-up.
Display: Days-Hours:mins:secs.
UDP 1/16 sec 10-960 660 Up-peak Dispatch Penalty Time - Use this adjustment to set the penalty time added
to the car ETA time.
Note: The group will assign hall calls to other cars before it assigns them to the car
at the lobby.
UDT sec 10-255 60 Up-peak Duration Time - Use this adjustment to set the minimum duration of Up-
peak Time (after being triggered).
ULC trips 1-60 12 Up-peak Load Count - This adjustment sets the number of trips from the lobby in a
three-minute time interval with the car loaded (which triggers Up-peak Operations).
Loaded car indicators:
• A discrete load switch input
• An electronic loadweigher trip point activation
• The car leaves the lobby with more than 2 car calls registered
VER — — — Version - The Version/Revision of the group generic software.
WRT — — — Write Parameters - This command saves the working values in RAM memory to the
EEPROM (which protects the working values in the event the controller's power is
lost).
Note: On power-up, or if the terminal is disconnected, the working values are read
from EEPROM into RAM memory.
XLT min 2-10 2 Emergency Power Extended Lowering Time - Use this adjustment to set the time
allowed for cars to arrive at the emergency power floor.
ZN1 floors 1-nfloors 1 Zone 1 Floor - This adjustment sets the car that stays at the last floor served for
normal operation.
Notes:
• When parking is enabled and a car becomes free, it will be sent to one of the zone
floors (after a time delay - PFT).
• ZN1 through ZN6 allow for six different zone or parking floors.
• The number of zone floors used is set by NZN.
See Also: CSW Bits 4 and 5
ZN2 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 2 Floor - See ZN1.
ZN3 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 3 Floor - See ZN1.

Printed in USA May, 2012 109

Car and Group Adjustments DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (continued)

ZN4 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 4 Floor - See ZN1.
ZN5 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 5 Floor - See ZN1.
ZN6 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 6 Floor - See ZN1.
ZPS — — — Zone Pilot Status - This command will display where the car zone is located relative
to the car.
Format:
0H = Zone is at the car
1H = Zone is above the car
2H = Zone is below the car

Car and Group Adjustments

The following Car/Group adjustments tune the Group's ETA calculations for each individual car in that group. Default values are
acceptable in most instances. However, if a car (or multiple cars) in the group has different job parameters (car speed, door size,
door open and closing speeds, blind hatch, etc.), then setting these adjustments should improve group service. REE must be equal
to the car number to access the following adjustments.

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition

ACC 1/16 sec. 16-255 28 Acceleration time (Car/Group) - Average time it takes the car to accelerate to top
speed.
ATT 1/16 sec 8-160 60 Average Transfer Time (Car/Group) - The average time the doors are fully opened.
BTT 1/16 sec 0-720 0 Blind Travel Time (Car/Group) - The time it takes to travel through the blind shaft at
top speed. BTT = SPE x Number of floors in the blind shaft.
DCT 1/16 sec 16-160 40 Door Closing Time (Car/Group) - The average door closing time.
DEC 1/16 sec 16-255 28 Deceleration Time (Car/Group) - The average time it takes the car to decelerate
from top speed.
DOT 1/16 sec 16-160 30 Door Opening Time - (Car/Group) - The average door opening time.
SPE 1/16 sec 4-48 18 Speed of Elevator (Car/Group) - One-floor run travel time in time units. If the
average floor height (h) is 12 feet, and the speed of the car is 350 fpm, then
the one-floor travel time in 1/16 second increments is 32.

h  16
SPE = ----------------------------
Speed  60
Example:

12  16
SPE = ------------------- = 32
350  60

110 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Error Codes

Group Error Codes

Code Description
0 No errors have occurred.
10 Invalid Hall Call Assignment Error - The group had a non-existent hall call to a car, or the car cancelled a
hall call that was not assigned to it.
11 EEPROM Load Error - While attempting to write to EEPROM, one of the following problems occurred:
1. Write verify failed.
2. Checksum failed.
3. EEPROM stamp did not match (No EEPROM).
4. Group parameters were out of range (See Group Parameter Initialization).
5. Car/Group parameters were out of range (See Group Parameter Initialization).
6. EEPROM read error.
Note: Each occurrence of one of these problems will cause the EEPROM Load Error number to be stored in
the fault buffer.
Group Parameter Initialization
1. Remove the comm connectors from J1 and/or J2 of the CPU (on the cars that are to be initialized).
2. Turn ON the I/O and the CPU switches.
3. Connect the IMS laptop to the car that is to be initialized.
4. Establish communications to the correct group and car number (as shown in the header of the
Remote FAST window). Use the control panel to change the selection (if necessary).
a. Enter parameter REE=0:
b. Enter the PARI command.
c. Enter the SCAI command.
d. Enter the WRT command.
5. Set parameter REE=1.
a. Enter the PARI command.
b. Enter the WRT command.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for all cars with the Group I/O.
7. Reinstall communication connectors back into J1 and/or J2 of each CPU.
12 Real Time Clock Counting Error - Real time clock or sequence clock counter did not change within an allow-
able time period.
Possible Cause: A defective CPU
14 Sequence clock re-entry error - in Tick 0.
15 Sequence clock re-entry error - in Tick 1.
16 Sequence clock re-entry error - in Tick 2.
17 Sequence clock re-entry error - in Tick 3.
19 PMI Configuration RAM Database Error - The checksum for the PMI database did not match the RAM com-
puted checksum value stored in EEPROM. The PMI configuration table is rebuilt, and the checksum in
EEPROM is updated.
Possible Causes: A defective CPU or a defective RAM chip.
20 NMI Timeout - NMI interrupt was not a true power failure.
22 Traffic Survey was in progress during power down.
23 Traffic Survey Software Error.
24 Invalid Traffic Command (should never occur) - Contact manufacturing.
25 Invalid Shutdown Command.

Printed in USA May, 2012 111

Group Error Codes DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Code Description
60 Communication Receive Parity Error.
61 Communication Receive Framing Error.
62 Communication Receive Overrun Error.
63 Communication Wake-up Signal from the Car is Intermittent or Noisy.
64 Communication Error During Decoding the Record of Data Received from the Car.
Possible Causes: The car is not connected to the group controller, or defective communication wiring
66 Communication Receive Error - Data was received from the car with invalid information: start character,
length, command character, checksum, or end of text character.
Possible Causes: Noise on the communication line, or defective communication wiring
67 Communication Receive Time-out Error - No data was received from the car, and this occurred only once.
The next communication cycle was successful.
68 Communication Transmit Interrupt Enabled Error - The transmit interrupt was enabled without having a
transmit command.
Possible Causes: Communication wiring is disconnected, or the car controller is powered down.
73 Communication Transmit Interrupt Enabled Error - This error occurred during verify test, normal reception,
parity, overrun, or framing error.
76 Communication Transmit Time-out Error - The car was not able to complete transmission to the group
within an allowable time period.
77 Communication Receive or Transmit Time-out Error - The receive or transmit protection timer expired, and
communications to the group was not enabled.
78 Communication - Invalid receive sequence error.
79 Communication - Invalid transmit sequence error.
80 Invalid I/O Mnemonic Error - The generic software found an invalid I/O mnemonic. The number of I/O
names not recognized in the generic software does not match the number of contract I/O added in the con-
tract shell.

112 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Control Status Words

Group Control Status Words

Bit CSW Default Function

CSW-0 R Set = Cross-cancellation is enabled.

• During modernization installations, it is useful to cross-cancel the hall calls with the existing dispatch
controller.
• With this bit set, hall calls will not be latched by this group.
Reset = The hall calls will be latched normally.
• Requires Job EPROM enable if the software is earlier than 675HE12.
See Also: CS8-6, XAT, and XIT

CSW-4 R Set = The free cars will zone.

Reset = Parking is disabled.

CSW-5 R Set = The free cars park at specific floors by priority.

• ZN1 through ZN6, where ZN1 is the highest priority.
Reset = The car parks at or close to any available zone.

CSW-6 R Set = Extra cars will be parked at the lobby during their periods of no activity.
• This bit is valid only if LER is greater than 1.

CSW-8 R Set = A Code Blue call is assigned in a pre-established order as defined by the commands CB1 thru CB8.
Reset = A Code Blue call is assigned to the closest available car.

CSW-9 R Set = Use the Alternate lobby floor (ALY) parameter instead of the normal lobby floor (LBY).

CSW-10 R Set = Dual Lobby Operation is enabled.

CSW-11 R Set = Rear Lobby Operation is enabled.

Set = If LER is greater than 0, the group will not assign a lobby request to a car until it is free (with no calls
and the parking timer has expired).
Reset = The group will immediately assign a lobby request to a car any time the lobby request is not met.
• The lobby has a higher priority.
CSW-13 R • Down calls will be bypassed because cars dispatching to the lobby will have extended ETAs.

Set = The Nextup Door Operation is enabled.

Reset = The auto return to main is enabled.
CSW-14 R LER must be greater than 0 for this BIT to have any effect.

Set = The rear hall call cross-cancellation is enabled.

• During modernization installations it is sometimes useful to cross-cancel the rear hall calls with the exist-
ing dispatch controller.
• With this bit set, rear hall calls will not be latched by this group. Requires Job EPROM enable if the soft-
ware is earlier than 675HE12.
CSW-15 R Reset = The rear hall calls will be latched normally.

Printed in USA May, 2012 113

Group Control Status Words DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Group Control Status Words

(continued)

Bit CS1 Default Function

CS1-0 R This allows changes to the terminal to CPU baud rate.

CS1-1
1 0 Baud Rate

R R 1200 (normal mode)

R S 300

S R 9600

S S 2400

Note: Bits 0 and 1 are normally reset for 1200 baud. Alternate baud rates are selectable.

CS1-7 R Set = Pulse fire light during fire service.

CS1-9 R Set = Do not latch Code Blue Calls if no cars are available to service the call.

CS1-10 R Set = The automatic service protect timer (AST) is disabled.

CS1-11 R Set = Cars which are unavailable for hall calls (due to option activation), will be bypassed or deselected
during Emergency Power Automatic selection.
Note: This is not recommended on jobs with express zones or Code Blue operation.

CS1-12 R Job EPROM Set = The group has Type 3 Emergency Power.

CS1-13 R Job EPROM Set = Activation of Emergency Power will select cars on Hospital Emergency Service to lower
and run.

CS1-14 R Job EPROM Set = Manual selection of cars during Emergency Power Operation is inhibited until the lower-
ing process is complete.

Bit CS2 Default Function

CS2-0 R Set = The events are only sent to the first available IMS (an owner configuration).

CS2-1 R Set = The events are only sent to the first available IMS (an office configuration).

114 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Control Status Words

Group Control Status Words

(continued)

Bit CS3 Default Function

CS3-0 S Security SCAN Enable - This flag applies only to Security Types 2, 3-1, 3-2, and 5.
Set = The cars will be assigned one hall call from the security landing.
Reset = The cars will be assigned hall calls as if on automatic operation.

CS3-1 S Security Inter-floor Car Call - This flag applies only if CS3 bit 0 is set.
Set = The cars are not allowed to answer inter-floor car calls.
Reset = The cars are allowed to answer inter-floor car calls.

CS3-2 S Security Homing Enable - This flag applies only to Types 1, 2, 3-I, and 3-II Security.
Set = The cars will home to the security landing (SEC) when Tenant Security is activated.
Reset = The cars will park at the last landing served.
Note: For Types 2 and 3, if the Security SCAN Enable bit is set, homing will be enabled and this bit will
have no affect.

CS3-3 S Rear Security Landing

Set = The security landing is a rear landing.

CS3-4 S Set = Down Peak operation will override Nextup operation.

Reset = One car will remain on Nextup.

Notes:
• CS3 bits 5-9 control interactions with Tenant Security Types 1, 2, 3-I, and 3-II.
• If CS3 bit 0 is set, these bits are ignored and the group options are disabled during security.

CS3-5 S Set = Zone Parking is enabled during security operation.

Reset = Zone Parking is disabled during security operation.

CS3-6 S Set = Lobby Request (auto return to main) is enabled during security operation.
Reset = Lobby Request (auto return to main) is disabled during security operation.

CS3-7 S Set = Next Up is enabled during security operation.

Reset = Next Up is disabled during security operation.

CS3-8 S Set = Up Peak is enabled during security operation.

Reset = Up Peak is disabled during security operation.

CS3-9 S Set = Down Peak enabled during security operation.

Reset = Down Peak is disabled during security operation.

Printed in USA May, 2012 115

Group Control Status Words DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Group Control Status Words

(continued)
Notes:
• CS4 is used for Program A of Tenant Security Type 8 or 9.
• Type 8 Defaults for these bits are shown below.
• Type 9 Defaults for these bits will be determined by Job EPROM flags. See Special Security Initialization (SSI) - Use this adjust-
ment to restore the security status words and CS4/CS5 to Job EPROM defaults.

Bit CS4 Default Function

CS4-0 R (Type 8) Set = The car call lockout block is activated.
Reset =The car call lock-out block is deactivated.

CS4-1 R (Type 8) Set = The car call lockout override block is activated.
Reset = The car call lockout override block is deactivated.

CS4-2 R (Type 8) Set = Only one hall call assignment per car is allowed during Security Operation.
Reset = Hall calls will be assigned as normal during Security Operation.
Note: This CSW bit is valid only if hall call service is set to allow hall calls.

CS4-3 R (Type 8) Set = A hall call assignment will be made only to a car at the security landing during Security Operation.
Reset = A hall call assignment will be made to a car at any landing during Security Operation.
Note: This CSW bit is valid only if hall calls allowed is set to one hall call assignment at a time.

CS4-4 R (Type 8) Set = Only one car call at a time may be registered with the car at the security landing during Security
Operation.
Reset = Multiple car calls at a time may be registered with the car at any landing during Security Opera-
tion.
Note: This CSW bit is valid only if the number of hall call assignments allowed is set to one, and the hall
call assignment is allowed only at the Security landing.

CS4-5 R (Type 8) Set = Parking is disabled during Security Operation.

Reset = Parking is enabled during Security Operation.

CS4-6 R (Type 8) Set = Lobby Request (automatic return to main) is disabled during Security Operation.
Reset = Lobby Request (automatic return to main) is enabled during Security Operation.

CS4-7 R (Type 8) Set = Nextup Operation is disabled during Car Call Lockout Security Operation.
Reset = Nextup Operation is enabled during Car Call Lockout Security Operation.

CS4-10 R (Type 8) Set = Nextup Operation is disabled during Hall Call Lockout Security Operation.
Reset = Nextup Operation is enabled during Hall Call Lockout Security Operation.

CS4-11 R (Type 8) Set = If the car is communicating with the group, Emergency Dispatching will be disabled upon loss of
hall call power (during Hall Call Lockout Security Operation).
Reset = The car will Emergency Dispatch (as set in the Car CS6-Bit 4/CS7-Bit 4 Status Words) when the
loss of car/group communication or hall call power occurs during Car Call Lockout Security Operation.

CS4-12 R (Type 8) Set = Emergency Dispatching will be disabled upon loss of hall call power during Hall Call Lockout Secu-
rity Operation.
Reset = The group will Emergency Dispatch cars to unsecured floors set in the group.

CS4-13 R (Type 8) Set = Hall Call Lockout Security Operation is activated.

Reset = Hall Call Lockout Security is deactivated (Hall Call Lockout Security can also be activated by the
HCLA input).

CS4-14 R (Type 8) Set = The Hall Call Lockout Table per car is enabled.
Reset = The Hall Call Lockout Table per car is disabled.

CS4-15 R (Type 8) Set = Program B Security Operation is enabled.

Reset = Program A Security Operation is enabled.

116 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Group Control Status Words

Group Control Status Words

(continued)
Notes:
• CS5 is used for Program B of Tenant Security Type 8 or 9.
• Type 8 Defaults for these bits are shown below.
• Type 9 Defaults for these bits will be determined by Job EPROM flags. See Special Security Initialization (SSI) - Use this adjust-
ment to restore the security status words and CS4/CS5 to Job EPROM defaults.

Bit CS5 Default Function

CS5-0 R (Type 8) Set = The car call lockout block is activated.
Reset =The car call lock-out block is deactivated.

CS5-1 R (Type 8) Set = The car call lockout override block is activated.
Reset = The car call lockout override block is deactivated.

CS5-2 R (Type 8) Set = Only one hall call assignment per car is allowed during Security Operation.
Reset = Hall calls will be assigned as normal during Security Operation.
Note: This CSW bit is valid only if hall call service is set to allow hall calls.

CS5-3 R (Type 8) Set = A hall call assignment will be made only to a car at the security landing during Security Operation.
Reset = A hall call assignment will be made to a car at any landing during Security Operation.
Note: This CSW bit is valid only if hall calls allowed is set to one hall call assignment at a time.

CS5-4 R (Type 8) Set = Only one car call at a time may be registered with the car at the security landing during Security
Operation.
Reset = Multiple car calls at a time may be registered with the car at any landing during Security Opera-
tion.
Note: This CSW bit is valid only if the number of hall call assignments allowed is set to one, and the hall
call assignment is allowed only at the Security landing.

CS5-5 R (Type 8) Set = Parking is disabled during Security Operation.

Reset = Parking is enabled during Security Operation.

CS5-6 R (Type 8) Set = Lobby Request (automatic return to main) is disabled during Security Operation.
Reset = Lobby Request (automatic return to main) is enabled during Security Operation.

CS5-7 R (Type 8) Set = Nextup Operation is disabled during Car Call Lockout Security Operation.
Reset = Nextup Operation is enabled during Car Call Lockout Security Operation.

CS5-10 R (Type 8) Set = Nextup Operation is disabled during Hall Call Lockout Security Operation.
Reset = Nextup Operation is enabled during Hall Call Lockout Security Operation.

CS5-11 R (Type 8) Set = If the car is communicating with the group, Emergency Dispatching will be disabled upon loss of
hall call power (during Hall Call Lockout Security Operation).
Reset = The group will Emergency Dispatch (as set in the Car CS6-Bit 4/CS7-Bit 4 Status Words) when
the loss of car/group communication or hall call power occurs during Car Call Lockout Security Opera-
tion.

CS5-12 R (Type 8) Set = Emergency Dispatching will be disabled upon loss of hall call power during Hall Call Lockout Secu-
rity Operation.
Reset = The group will Emergency Dispatch cars to unsecured floors set in the group.

CS5-13 R (Type 8) Set = Hall Call Lockout Security Operation is activated.

Reset = Hall Call Lockout Security is deactivated (Hall Call Lockout Security can also be activated by the
HCLA input).

CS5-14 R (Type 8) Set = The Hall Call Lockout Table per car is enabled.
Reset = The Hall Call Lockout Table per car is disabled.

Printed in USA May, 2012 117

Group Control Status Words DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Group Control Status Words

(continued)

Bit CS8 Default Function

CS8-0 R Set = Owner IMS events are sent to first available owner system.
Reset = Send event to all owner systems selected (e.g., Phone A/B/C, direct connect).

CS8-1 R Set = Office IMS events are sent to first available office system.
Reset = Send event to all office systems selected.

CS8-2 R Set = Machine room inspection, when active, will disable event logging.
Note: Applies when car event monitoring is enabled - will not disable group-enabled event monitoring.

CS8-3 R Set = A car recalling to the alternate fire floor on Phase 1 will open the opposite side specified by CS3 bit
12. If the alternate fire floor has only one opening, this bit will be ignored.

CS8-4 Set = The Door Open PB will be allowed to reopen the doors at a locked out opening if those doors have
already cycled at the floor.

CS8-5 Set = The generic software is compatible with CE Electronics version P191 software.
Reset = The generic software is compatible with CE Electronics version P191.1 software.
Note: If a CE Electronics interface board exists on the job, and the software on the board is P191, this bit
should be set (see also car Bit CS2-9).

CS8-6 R Set = Events will be logged only for services being monitored. No event will be logged for a service type
which follows a service type that is monitored, unless the new service is also monitored.
Reset = All service type changes will be logged.

CS8-7 R Set = Power up events will not be logged.

CS8-8 R Set = For A17 and B44 2000 Fire Service - Phase II Recall will take the car to the current active fire floor.
Reset = Phase II Recall will take the car to the main fire floor.

CS8-9 R Set = The Fire Hat Light will remain active while Phase I or Phase II is active.
Reset = The Fire Hat Light will deactivate when the car arrives at the fire floor.

CS8-10 R Set = The Maryland variation of 2000 Fire Service will be active.
Note: The Maryland variance allows the active recall floor to be changed from the main landing to the
alternate landing if:
• the main landing sensor is active,
• the secondary switch (if provided) is in the OFF position, and
• the primary switch is moved to the RESET position and then to the OFF position (see Group CS2 bit 4).

CS8-11 R Set = The Ohio variation of 2000 Fire Service will be active.
Note: The Ohio variance allows alternate landing recall on Phase I to be overridden:
• Place either the primary or secondary switch in the ON position, causing the car to move to the main
landing.
• The car reverts to alternate landing recall if the primary switch and the secondary switch (if provided)
are in the OFF position and the main landing sensor is still active (see Group CS2 bit 5).

CS8-12 R Set = The Massachusetts variation of 2000 Fire Service will be active.
Note: The Massachusetts variance allows alternate landing recall on Phase I to be overridden:
• Place the primary switch in the ON position, and the secondary switch is ignored if the main landing
sensor is active (see Group CS2 bit 6).

CS8-13 R Set = The Manchester, NH variation of 2000 Fire Service will be active.
Note: The Manchester variance allows fire service initiated by sensors to be deactivated by resetting all
sensors.
• No switch change is required, unless a Phase I switch has been placed in the ON position prior to the
sensor reset (see Group CS2 bit 7).

118 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS On-Card Diagnostics

On-Card Diagnostics
CPU - WD LED On-Card Diagnostics

WD LED State (Green LED) Occurs Condition

Flickers once or twice, then ON Power-up / Reset • If the LED does not stay on after a minute or so, the CPU Card is bad
continuously. and must be replaced.
• If the LED does not stay ON after a new software upload, there may
be a software error.

CPU - INIT LED On-Card Diagnostics

INIT LED State (Green LED) Occurs Condition
Brief flicker, then ON continuously Power-up / Reset • The INIT LED is primarily used for manufacturing purposes. However,
if it does not come on after repeated power-ups and CPU resets,
replace the CPU Card.
Note: The INIT LED indicates a properly initializing Altera FLEX which
controls the on-card hardware selection and timing for proper software
operation. A failure of the Altera FLEX to load can also leave the LED
ON.
C4 INIT LED State (Red LED) Occurs Condition
ON continuously Power-up / Reset • Indicates a proper Cyclone FPGA initialization.
• OFF could indicate a corrupted card memory (eprom) or a card power
problem.

CPU - F6K STAT LED On-Card Diagnostics

LED State (Red LED) Condition

50/50 duty-cycle; 1500ms/OFF, 1500ms/ON, • The job image is missing and may, in some cases, be restored with
repeated (slow blink) either a BKPR command and CPU reset (restores battery backed RAM
from flash memory). Otherwise, upload job configuration file and reset
the CPU.

50/50 duty-cycle; 100ms/OFF, 100ms/ON, repeated Transfer Error–the CPU is not functioning– ZModem upload timeout or
(fast blink) card failure.
• If a CPU ZModem upload is initiated and the generic software is not
uploaded by the time the STAT LED stops flashing a Morse Code Z (2
long, 2 short), the CPU will timeout and the STAT LED will blink rapidly.
• If the rapid blink occurs immediately at power-up, remains on contin-
uously, and there was no attempt to ZModem upload, then the card is
bad and must be replaced.
Note: Before card replacement, cycle power and reset the CPU to
attempt to clear the condition.

Morse-Code "Z" (2 long, 2 short) repeated Ready for ZModem transfer of software.

Morse-Code "B" (1 long, 3 short) repeated Ready for Boot Block Upgrade Software transfer.

ON or OFF solid Indicates proper operation.

Erratic ON to OFF Door communication link packet error. Check door communication.

Morse-Code "SO" (3 long, 3 short) Special Operation Feature included in microprocessor software (V1R2
or later) and used during temporary operation.

Printed in USA May, 2012 119

On-Card Diagnostics DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

CPU - F6K STAT LED On-Card Diagnostics

(continued)

C4 STAT LED State (Green LED) Condition

Brief flash upon power up/reset, then OFF • When ON, indicates the Cyclone FPGA is undergoing initialization.
continuously. • Normal power up sequence: This LED flashes briefly, then goes out
and the C4 INIT Red LED turns ON.

LSRVA/LRSVB LED On-Card Diagnostics

LSRVA/LRSVB LED State Condition
Blink, then OFF continuously • Job is LON, and the node is on-line and operating normally.
• The Host has .nxe node software installed (this software is mfg.
loaded at manufacturing and enables communication between the CPU
processor and the Host).
• The CPU processor is configured for 1 or more LON ports via the Job
Config.file for Host A or B.
• The node has a LON configuration file installed.

Blink, then ON continuously • The node software is not loaded.

• Upload the .nxe file, bind the channel, then transfer the LON
configuration file into the node.

OFF The Host and the CPU have synced up.

50/50 duty-cycle; 1000ms/OFF, 1000ms/ON, There is no Host .nxe node software loaded into the channel.
Repeated
1. CPU Card:
90/10 duty-cycle; 900ms/OFF, 100ms/ON, Repeated
a. There is a Host.nxe loaded, but the Host and the CPU have not
synced up.
Possible cause: Job configuration file (_07c000.dat) says
there are no LON ports on the channel. Check J17 (Channel A)
and J18 (Channel B).
b. Upload node software file (*.nxe) and then transfer the LON
configuration file into the node.
c. The job is not LON, but is using a LON CPU Card (normal
operation for non-LON jobs).
2. LN or LPIC:
a. The device has either a corrupt node software file (*.nxe) or
defective hardware.
b. Upload node software file (*.nxe) and then transfer the LON
configuration file into the node.
c. Replace the card.
Continuous ON or OFF - Does not blink at all on Defective hardware - replace the node.
power-up.

120 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS On-Card Diagnostics

On-Card Diagnostics
(continued)

Selector Assembly Cards, TSM and TSA

LED
Color Displays Indicates
Name
Blinking pattern = 2 seconds off, 2 seconds No detected errors.
LD5 Green
on, 4 seconds blink-to-blink.
LD5 Green Turned OFF. Error during power-up.
If the TSA is installed upside down on the selector, its connec-
tor will not mate with the connector on the TSM.
Response to LD6 error: Internal check of quadrature encoder
in the PGA IC on the TSM.
Response to LD6 error: Failure of hall effect backup sensor
used with a reed switch. See Notes.
LD6 Red Turned ON briefly. During power-up.
Turned OFF. No detected errors.
Turned ON and stays ON. • The TSA Card is not connected to the TSM.
• The type code that is hard-wired on the TSA Card is not
compatible with the particular TSM Card.
Blinking pattern = 2 seconds ON, 2 seconds On power-up, there is an internal check of part of the quadra-
OFF. ture encoder in the PGA IC on the TSM. If this check fails, this
pattern displays.
Blinking pattern = 1/2 second ON, 1/2 sec- Failure of hall effect backup sensor used with a reed switch.
ond OFF. Note: There is a check of the hall effect backup sensor
used with a reed switch for each terminal directional
limit switch. When the car is moved far enough to
actuate the reed switch directional limit (DLTR or
BLTR), the backup hall effect sensor should have
also actuated.
The output of Phase A of the quadrature encoder that detects
LD7 Green Turned ON.
the tape holes.
LD8 Green Turned ON. The output of Phase B.

Printed in USA May, 2012 121

Inputs / Outputs DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Inputs / Outputs

C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
AFI AT FLOOR INDICATOR O L HW C
ALBA ALARM BUTTON ACTIVATED I L CAR C
ALBI ALARM BUTTON ACTIVATED INDICATOR O L HW C
ALBL ALARM BELL (FIRE BELL) O L HW C
ARL1-ARL16 ARRIVAL LANTERN - PER FLOOR O L HW C
ATB ATTENDANT BYPASS PUSHBUTTON I L CAR C
ATBI ATTENDANT BYPASS INDICATOR O L CAR C
ATDB ATTENDANT DOWN PUSHBUTTON I L CAR C
ATDC ATTENDANT DOOR CLOSE SPEED O L CAR C
ATDI ATTENDANT DOWN INDICATOR O L CAR C
ATT ATTENDANT SERVICE I L CAR C
ATUB ATTENDANT UP PUSHBUTTON I L CAR C
ATUI ATTENDANT UP INDICATOR O L CAR C
AUTOI AUTOMATIC OPERATION INDICATOR O L HW C
BLO BOTTOM LIMIT OVERRIDE O L CTRL C
BLOM BOTTOM LIMIT OVERRIDE MONITOR I L CTRL C
BP1 BINARY POSITION 1 I L CAR C
BP2 BINARY POSITION 2 I L CAR C
BP4 BINARY POSITION 4 I L CAR C
BP8 BINARY POSITION 8 I L CAR C
BPP BINARY POSITION PARITY I L CAR C
BUZ BUZZER - FLOOR PASSING, FIRE & NUDGING O L CAR C
C1-C16 CAR CALL - COMB. I/O I/O L HW C
CB1-CB16 CODE BLUE CALL - COMB. I/O I/O L HW G
CBAI CODE BLUE ACTIVE INDICATOR O L CTRL G
CBEL FREIGHT DOOR CALL BELL O L CTRL C
CBR1-CBR16 CODE BLUE CALL - REAR - COMB. I/O I/O L HW G
CCIE CAR CALL INDICATOR ENABLE O L CTRL C

122 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Inputs / Outputs

Inputs/Outputs
(continued)

C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
CDBM13 CAR DOOR BYPASS MONITOR I L CTRL C
CDCF CAR DOOR CONTACT FRONT I ON CTRL C
CDCFM CAR DOOR CONTACT FRONT MONITOR I L CTRL C
CDCR CAR DOOR CONTACT REAR I ON CTRL C
CDCRM CAR DOOR CONTACT REAR MONITOR I L CTRL C
CDI CAR DELAYED INDICATOR O L CTRL C
CL1-CL16 CAR CALL LOCKOUT I L HW C/G/C&G
CLD CAR LANTERN - DOWN O L CAR C
CLDR CAR LANTERN - DOWN REAR O L CAR C
CLFS CAR LIGHT/FAN SHUTDOWN O L CAR C
CLI1-CLI16 CAR CALL LOCKOUT INDICATOR O L CAR C/G/C&G
CLIR1-CLIR16 CAR CALL LOCKOUT INDICATOR - REAR O L CAR C/G/C&G
CLO1-CLO16 CAR CALL LOCKOUT OVERRIDE I L CAR C
CLOR1-CLOR16 CAR CALL LOCKOUT OVERRIDE - REAR I L CAR C
CLR1-CLR16 CAR CALL LOCKOUT - REAR I L CAR C/G/C&G
CLU CAR LANTERN - UP O L CAR C
CLUR CAR LANTERN - UP REAR O L CAR C
CR1-CR16 CAR CALL - REAR - COMB. I/O I/O L CAR C
CST CAR STOP SWITCH MONITOR I ON CTRL C
CSTI CAR STOP SWITCH INDICATOR O L HW C
CSTO CAR STOP SWITCH OVERRIDE O L CTRL C
CSTOM CAR STOP SWITCH OVERRIDE MONITOR I L CTRL C
D2-D16 HALL CALL - DOWN - COMB. I/O I/O L HW G
DAD DIRECTION ARROW - DOWN O L CAR/HW C
DADH DIRECTION ARROW - DOWN - HALL O L HW C
DAU DIRECTION ARROW - UP O L CAR C
DAUH DIRECTION ARROW - UP - HALL O L CAR C
DCB DOOR CLOSE BUTTON - FRONT - MAIN COP I L CAR C
DCB2 DOOR CLOSE BUTTON - FRONT - FRONT AUX. COP I L CAR C
DCB3 DOOR CLOSE BUTTON - FRONT - REAR COP I L CAR C
DCB4 DOOR CLOSE BUTTON - FRONT - REAR AUX. COP I L CAR C
DCBH DOOR CLOSE BUTTON HALL - FRONT I L HW C
DCBHR DOOR CLOSE BUTTON HALL - REAR I L HW C
DCBR DOOR CLOSE BUTTON HALL - REAR - MAIN COP I L CAR C
DCBR2 DOOR CLOSE BUTTON HALL - REAR - AUX. COP I L CAR C
DCBR3 DOOR CLOSE BUTTON HALL - REAR - REAR COP I L CAR C
DCBR4 DOOR CLOSE BUTTON HALL - REAR - REAR AUX. COP I L CAR C
DD DOOR DISCONNECT I L CTRL C
DELETED FIRE SERVICE SENSOR - EQUIPMENT I L CTRL C
DFI DISPATCH FAILURE INDICATOR O L HW C
DHB DOOR HOLD BUTTON I L CAR C
DHBR DOOR HOLD BUTTON - REAR I L CAR C

Printed in USA May, 2012 123

Inputs / Outputs DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Inputs/Outputs
(continued)
C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
DHBUZ DOOR HOLD BUTTON - FRONT O L CAR C
DHBUZR DOOR HOLD BUTTON - REAR O L CAR C
DHI DOOR HOLD INDICATOR I L HW C
DHRI DOOR HOLD INDICATOR - REAR I L HW C
DHS DOOR HOLD SWITCH I L CAR C
DHSR DOOR HOLD SWITCH - REAR O L CAR C
DISBR DISTRESS BUZZER RESET O L HW C
DISBZ DISTRESS BUZZER I L HW C
DISI DISTRESS INDICATOR I L HW C
DLB DIRECTION LIMIT - BOTTOM I L CAR C
DLB DIRECTION LIMIT - BOTTOM I ON HW C
DLT DIRECTION LIMIT - TOP I L CAR C
DLT DIRECTION LIMIT - TOP I L HW C
DOB DOOR OPEN BUTTON - FRONT - AUX. COP I L CAR C
DOB2 DOOR OPEN BUTTON - FRONT - REAR COP I L CAR C
DOB3 DOOR OPEN BUTTON - FRONT - REAR AUX. COP I L CAR C
DOB4 DOOR OPEN BUTTON - REAR - MAIN COP I L CAR C
DOBR DOOR OPEN BUTTON - REAR - AUX. COP I L CAR C
DOBR2 DOOR OPEN BUTTON - REAR - COP I L CAR C
DOBR3 DOOR OPEN BUTTON - REAR - REAR COP I L CAR C
DOBR4 DOOR OPEN BUTTON - REAR - AUX. COP I L CAR C
DOI DOOR OPEN INDICATOR O L HW C
DOIR DOOR OPEN INDICATOR - REAR O L HW C
DR2-DR16 HALL CALL - DOWN - REAR - COMB. I/O I/O L HW G
DZ1 DOOR ZONE #1 I H CAR C
DZ1M DOOR ZONE #1 - MONITOR I L CTRL C
DZ1R DOOR ZONE #1 - REAR I H CAR C
DZ1RM DOOR ZONE #1 - REAR - MONITOR I L CTRL C
DZ2 DOOR ZONE #2 I H CAR C
DZ2M DOOR ZONE #2 MONITOR I L CTRL C
DZ2R DOOR ZONE #2 - REAR I H CAR C
DZ2RM DOOR ZONE #2 - REAR - MONITOR I L CTRL C
DZE DOOR ZONE ENABLE - O ON CTRL C
DZER DOOR ZONE ENABLE - REAR O L CTRL C
DZM DOOR ZONE ENABLE - MONITOR I L CTRL C
DZMR DOOR ZONE ENABLE - MONITOR - REAR I L CTRL C
EES ELECTRIC EYE SHUTOFF SWITCH I L CAR C
EESR ELECTRIC EYE SHUTOFF SWITCH - REAR I L CAR C
EPA EMERGENCY POWER - AUTOMATIC I L HW G
EPAI EMERGENCY POWER - ACKNOWLEDGE INDICATOR O L HW C
EPALI EMERGENCY POWER - AT DESIG. LANDING IND. O L HW C
EPCS EMERGENCY POWER - MAN. CAR SELECT - PER CAR I L HW C

124 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Inputs / Outputs

Inputs/Outputs
(continued)
C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
EPCS1 EMERGENCY POWER - MANUAL CAR SELECT - CAR #1 I L HW G
EPCS2 EMERGENCY POWER - MANUAL CAR SELECT - CAR #2 I L HW G
EPCS3 EMERGENCY POWER - MANUAL CAR SELECT - CAR #3 I L HW G
EPSC4 EMERGENCY POWER - MANUAL CAR SELECT - CAR #4 I L MR G
EPCSI EMERGENCY POWER - CAR SELECTED INDICATOR O L HW C
EPEPI EMERGENCY POWER - EMERG. POWER INDICATOR O L HW G
EPLI EMERGENCY POWER LOWERING INDICATOR O L HW C
EPNP EMERGENCY POWER - NORMAL POWER I L MR C&G
EPNPI EMERGENCY POWER - NORMAL POWER INDICATOR O L HW G
EPW EMERGENCY POWER WARNING I L MR C
EQD EARTHQUAKE (SEISMIC) DETECTOR I L HW C
EQDR EARTHQUAKE DETECTION RESET I/O L CTRL C
EQI EARTHQUAKE SEISMIC INDICATOR O L HW C
ETSL1 EMERGENCY TERMINAL SPEED LIMIT - TOP #1 O L CAR C
ETSL2 EMERGENCY TERMINAL SPEED LIMIT - TOP #2 I L CAR C
F1-F16 FREIGHT SAPB CALL - COMB. I/O I/O L HW C
FALI FAILURE INDICATOR O L HW C
FALNI NOT FAILED INDICATOR O L HW C
FDIM FREIGHT DOOR INTERLOCK MONITOR O L CTRL C
FHS FLASHING HALL SIGNS O L CTRL C
FPT FLOOR PASSING TONE O L CAR C
FR1 - FR16 FREIGHT SAPB CALL - REAR - COMB. I/O I/O ON HW C
FS1FI FIRE SERVICE PHASE 1 SWITCH OFF INDICATOR O L HW G
FS1I FIRE SERVICE - PHASE 1 INDICATOR O ON CTRL C
FS1NI FIRE SERVICE PHASE 1 SWITCH ON INDICATOR O L HW G
FS1RI FIRE SERVICE PHASE 1 SWITCH RESET INDICATOR O L HW G
FS2FI FIRE SERVICE PHASE 2 SWITCH OFF INDICATOR O L HW C
FS2H FIRE SERVICE PHASE 2 SWITCH HOLD (FRONT) O L CTRL C
FS2HI FIRE SERVICE PHASE 2 SWITCH HOLD INDICATOR O L HW C
FS2HR FIRE SERVICE PHASE 2 SWITCH HOLD (REAR) O L CTRL C
FS2I FIRE SERVICE - PHASE 2 INDICATOR O L CTRL C
FS2NI FIRE SERVICE PHASE 2 SWITCH ON INDICATOR O L HW C
FSAFI FIRE SERVICE - ALT. FLOOR INDICATOR O L HW C
FSBZ FIRE SERVICE BUZZER O L HW C
FSC1 FIRE SERVICE - CAR - ON I L CAR C
FSC2 FIRE SERVICE - CAR - OFF I L CAR C
FSCC FIRE SERVICE - CALL CANCEL I L CAR C
FSDB FIRE SERVICE - DOOR BYPASS I L CAR C
FSDFI FIRE SERVICE - DOOR FAILED INDICATOR O L CAR C
FSDO FIRE SERVICE - FIREMAN’S DOOR OPEN I L CAR C
FSE FIRE SERVICE SENSOR - EQUIPMENT I L CAR C&G
FSH1 FIRE SERVICE - HALL - MAIN - ON I L CTRL C&G

Printed in USA May, 2012 125

Inputs / Outputs DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Inputs/Outputs
(continued)
C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
FSH2 FIRE SERVICE - HALL - MAIN - OFF I L HW C&G
FSH3 FIRE SERVICE - HALL - AUX - ON I L HW C&G
FSH4 FIRE SERVICE - HALL - AUX - OFF I L HW C&G
FSH5 FIRE SERVICE - HALL - MAIN - RESET (BYPASS) I L HW C&G
FSI FIRE SERVICE INDICATOR (PHASE 1 OR 2) O L HW C
FSM FIRE SERVICE SENSOR - MAIN I L CTRL C&G
FSMFI FIRE SERVICE - MAIN FLOOR INDICATOR O L HW C
FSRI FIRE SERVICE RETURN INDICATOR O L CAR C
FSSR FIRE SERVICE SENSOR RESET O L CTRL C
FST FIRE SERVICE SENSOR - HIGH TEMP. I L CTRL C&G
FSX FIRE SERVICE SENSOR - AUX. I L CTRL C&G
GLM GATE & LOCKS MONITOR I L CTRL C
HCIE HALL CALL INDICATOR ENABLE O L CTRL C
HCLD HALL/CAR LANTERN - DOWN - FRONT O L HW/CAR C
HCLU HALL/CAR LANTERN - UP - FRONT O L HW/CAR C
HCP HALL CALL POWER MONITOR I H HW C
HCPI HALL CALL POWER INDICATOR O L HW C
HDBM HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS MONITOR I L CTRL C
HDIF HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK - FRONT I ON CTRL C
HDIFM HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK FRONT MONITOR I L CTRL C
HDIR HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK - REAR I ON CTRL C
HDIRM HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK REAR MONITOR I L CTRL C
HES HOSPITAL EMERGENCY SERVICE I L CAR C
HESI HOSPITAL EMERGENCY SERVICE ACTIVE INDICATOR O L HW C
HLD2-HLD16 HALL LANTERN - DOWN - FRONT - PER LANDING O L HW C
HLDR2-HLDR16 HALL LANTERN - DOWN - REAR - PER LANDING O L HW C
HLU1-HLU15 HALL LANTERN - UP - FRONT - PER LANDING O L HW C
HLUR1-HLUR15 HALL LANTERN - UP - REAR - PER LANDING O L HW C
H1 HOMING - #1 I L HW C
HM1I HOMING - #1 - INDICATOR O L HW C
HM1NI HOMING - #1 - NOT ACTIVE INDICATOR O L HW C
HM2 HOMING - #2 I L HW C
HM2I HOMING - #2 - INDICATOR O L HW C
HM3 HOMING - #3 I L HW C
HM3I HOMING - #3 - INDICATOR O L HW C
HMCLI HOMING - CAR AT LOBBY INDICATOR O L HW C
HML HOMING - LOBBY RECALL I L HW C
HMLI HOMING -LOB RECALL OPER. ACTIVE IND. O L HW C
HMLNI HOMING -LOB RECALL OPER. NOT ACTIVE IND. O L HW C
ID2-ID16 INCONSPICUOUS RISER CALL - DOWN - COMB. I/O I/O L HW C
IDR2-IDR16 INCONSPICUOUS RISER CALL - DOWN - R - COMB. I/O I/O L HW C
IN INSPECTION I H CTRL C

126 Vertical Express

ICON Controller DIAGNOSTICS Inputs / Outputs

Inputs/Outputs
(continued)
C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
INCN INSPECTION - CONTROLLER I H CTRL C
INCT INSPECTION - CAR TOP I H CTRL C
IND INSPECTION - DOWN BUTTON I H CTRL C
INHA INSPECTION - HOISTWAY ACCESS I H CTRL C
INHAM INSPECTION - HOISTWAY ACCESS MONITOR I H CTRL C
INOP INSPECTION - OPERATING PANEL I H CTRL C
INSP INSPECTION - SPARE I H CTRL C
INU INSPECTION - UP BUTTON I H CTRL C
IRO INCONSPICUOUS RISER OPERATION I L HW C
IROI INCONSPICUOUS RISER OPERATION - INDICATOR O L HW C
ISC INDEPENDENT SERVICE - CAR I L CAR C
ISCI INDEPENDENT SERVICE - CAR - INDICATOR O L HW C
ISH INDEPENDENT SERVICE - HALL I L HW C
ISHI INDEPENDENT SERVICE - HALL - INDICATOR O L HW C
IU1 - IU15 INCONSPICUOUS RISER CALL - UP - COMB. I/O I/O L HW C
IUL IN USE LIGHT O L HW C
IUR1 - IUR15 INCONSPICUOUS RISER CALL - UP - R - COMB. I/O I/O L HW C
LVD LEVEL DOWN I L CAR C
LVDR LEVEL DOWN -REAR I L CAR C
LVU LEVEL UP I L CAR C
LVUR LEVEL UP - REAR I L CAR C
LWBI LOADWEIGHER - BYPASS - INDICATOR O L CAR C
LWO LOADWEIGHER -OVERLOAD I L CAR C
LWOI LOADWEIGHER -OVERLOAD - INDICATOR O L CAR C
MCC1 MOTOR CONTACTOR CONTROL #1 O ON CTRL C
MCC2 MOTOR CONTACTOR CONTROL #2 O ON CTRL C
MCC3 MOTOR CONTACTOR CONTROL #3 O ON CTRL C
MCD MOTOR CONTACTORS DE-ENERGIZED I L CTRL C
MCE MOTOR CONTACTOR ENERGIZED I L CTRL C
MCF MOTOR CONTACTOR FAULT I L CTRL C
MEC MEDICAL EMERGENCY - CAR I L CAR C
MEH MEDICAL EMERGENCY - HALL I L HW C
MEHI MEDICAL EMERGENCY - HALL INDICATOR O L HW C
MEI MEDICAL EMERGENCY - INDICATOR O L CAR/HW C
NES NON-EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN I L CTRL C
NTSB NORMAL TERMINAL STOPPING - BOTTOM I L CAR C
NTST NORMAL TERMINAL STOPPING -TOP I L CAR C
OFLNI OFF LINE INDICATOR O L HW C
OLLI OIL LEVEL LOW INDICATOR O L HW C
OLPO OIL PRESSURE - OVER LIMIT I L CTRL C
OLPU OIL PRESSURE - UNDER LIMIT I L CTRL C
OLTO OIL TEMPERATURE - OVER LIMIT I L CTRL C

Printed in USA May, 2012 127

Inputs / Outputs DIAGNOSTICS ICON Controller

Inputs/Outputs
(continued)

C = Car Function
G = Group Function
H = ON when High/24V HW = Hoistway C/G = Car or Group Function
L = ON when Low/OV CTRL = Controller C&G = Car and Group Function
ON = On when relay CAR = COP/Car Top C/G/C&G = Car OR Group;
Input / or opto is ON MR = Machine Room Car & Group Function
Mnemonic Name Output Active ON State I/O Location I/O Function Type
OLTS OIL TEMPERATURE - SET CONTROL I L CTRL C
PI1 - PI16 POS IND. - LIGHT UP - CAR OR CTRL, CAR & H/W O L CAR/HW C
PIA1 - PIA16 POS IND. - LIGHT UP - ALT. LDG. H/W O L CAR/HW C
PIC1 - PIC16 POS IND. - LIGHT UP - CAR O L HW C
PIH1 - PIH16 POSITION INDICATOR - MAIN LDG. H/W O L HW C
PRSW PRESSURE SWITCH I L CTRL C
SAFE SAFETY CIRCUIT MONITOR I ON CTRL C
SAHI1 SPARE ACTIVE HIGH INPUT #1 I H CTRL C
SAHI2 SPARE ACTIVE HIGH INPUT #2 I H CTRL C
SDD SLOWDOWN - DOWN I L HW C
SDDR SLOWDOWN - DOWN - REAR I L HW C
SDU SLOWDOWN - UP I L HW C
SDUR SLOWDOWN - UP - REAR I L HW C
SOA SECURITY OPERATION ACTIVATION I L HW C/G/C&G
SOO SECURITY OPERATION OVERRIDE I L HW CF
SOTL SECURITY OPERATION TOTAL LOCKOUT I L HW C/G/C&G
SOTLI SECURITY OPERATION TOTAL LOCKOUT INDIC. O L HW C/G/C&G
SOTOA SECURITY OPERATION TOTAL OVERRIDE ACTIVE I L HW C/G/C&G
SOTOAI SECURITY OPERATION TOTAL OVERRIDE ACTIVE IND. O L HW G
STBC SHUNT TRIP BREAKER CONTROL O L CTRL C
TMPI TAMPER INDICATOR O L HW C
TMPIR TAMPER INDICATOR RESET I L HW C
TPDL TPT JACK DYNAMIC LEFT SENSOR I L HW C
TPDR TPT JACK DYNAMIC RIGHT SENSOR I L HW C
TPSL TPT JACK STATIC LEFT SENSOR I L HW C
TPSR TPT JACK STATIC RIGHT SENSOR I L HW C
U1 - U15 HALL CALL - UP - COMB. I/O I/O L HW G
UR1 - UR15 HALL CALL - UP - REAR - COMB. I/O I/O L HW G
VC1A VALVE CONTROL #1A (DOWN SLOW / DOWN) O ON CTRL C
VC1B VALVE CONTROL #1B (DOWN SLOW / DOWN) O ON CTRL C
VC2A VALVE CONTROL #2A (UP SLOW / UP) O ON CTRL C
VC2B VALVE CONTROL #2A (UP SLOW / UP) O ON CTRL C
VC3A VALVE CONTROL #3A (DOWN FAST / DOWN) O ON CTRL C
VC3B VALVE CONTROL #3B (DOWN FAST/ DOWN) O ON CTRL C

128 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Door Communications Troubleshooting

Door Communications Troubleshooting

Determine if there is a loss of communication between the CPU and the door card.
• The doors are not working,
or
• The CON23 plug is removed from the CPU card while the system is powered up, and the
F6K_STAT LED on the CPU does not blink 3 times. See Figure 33 on page 130.

Determine the cause of the communication loss.

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.
2. Verify the fuses (1, 2, and 3) on the door card, and replace as necessary. See Figure 33 on
page 130.
3. Remove the CON23 plug from the 188E CPU card.
4. Use an Ohm Meter and measure for 100 Ohms on the CPU card, CON23, pins 1-2. If any other
measurement is seen, replace the CPU card.
5. Use an Ohm Meter and measure for 125-135 Ohms on the CON23 plug–as it hangs loose–pins
1-2.
If the measurement is correct: Move to Step 9.
If the measurement is not correct: Continue with Step 6.

6. Place a temporary jumper on the CON23 plug, pins 1-2.

7. Move to the car top with the Ohm Meter, then remove the CON7 plug from the door card.
8. Measure for a short (zero ohms) on the removedCON7 plug, pins 1-2.
If the Ohm Meter does not display the short (zero ohms),
a. Find the wiring problem. See Figure 34 on page 131.
b. Reconnect the CON7 plug to the door card.
c. Remove the temporary jumpers, and reconnect CON23 to the CPU card.
d. Verify the door communications.
If the Ohm Meter displays the short (zero ohms),
a. Replace the CON7 plug on the door card, and return to the machine room.
b. Remove the temporary jumper from the CON23 plug, and replace this plug on the CPU
card.
9. Power up the disconnect.
10. Check for the proper door communications. If communications do not work, use a voltmeter on
DC to measure voltage on the PSC and NSC terminals on the TCID Card (located at the top of
the controller).
Notes:
• A correct measurement is 2.25vdc to 2.75vdc (meter-averaged values of proper 5vdc
communications packet activity).
• If the correct measurement is not seen, replace the door card.

Printed in USA May, 2012 129

Door Communications Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Door Communications Troubleshooting

(continued)

CON23

F6K_STAT

FUSE 2

FUSE 3 FUSE 1 CON7

Figure 33 - 188E CPU Card (top) and Door Operator Card (bottom)

130 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Door Communications Troubleshooting

Door Communications Troubleshooting

(continued)

DTC

9 11
DOOR CONTROL CARD
PSC CON7-1 PSC
NSC CON7-2 NSC

DOOR OPERATOR
CON7-3

LEGEND:
SHG

PLUGGABLE CONNECTOR

CON210-5 PSC
CON210-6 NSC
CON210-7 SHG
MD485
SWING RETURN
9 11 CON5-2 PSC
CON5-3 NSC
CON5-4 SHG

CWID Card

TRAVELING
CABLE

CON23-1 BLK PSC CON90-3 CON5-9 PSC

CON23-2 WHT NSC CON90-2 CON5-8 NSC
CON23-3 SHIELD SHG CON90-1 CON5-7 SHG

PSC CON91-3
NSC CON91-2 TCID Card
SHG CON91-1

CPU Card CON91-3

CON91-2
CON91-1
9 11

CONTROLLER DCOM
HCID Card

Figure 34 - Door Operator Communications Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2012 131

Solid State Starter Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Solid State Starter Troubleshooting

This troubleshooting checklist does not represent an exhaustive list of maintenance steps
necessary to ensure safe operation of the equipment. Particular applications may require
further procedures. Refer these matters to the local sales office.
Note: See Figure 35 on page 138 for Delta Wiring Configurations.

LCD is not working

LCD Indication Problem Verification
• Inspect starter terminals for proper connections.
• Check for loose terminations and wires terminated on insulation.
• Dress connection as necessary.
• Confirm 120 VAC between terminals 1 & 3 on the starter.
If voltage is above 85 VAC replace the starter as it is defective.
No characters are shown The supply voltage for the starter
on the LCD screen is too low. If no voltage is present between terminals 1 & 3 on the starter:
• Verify MCC1 (I/O) is active and the MCC1 relay coil is energized.
• The MCC1 contacts should be closed supplying 120 VAC to the
starter (refer to system schematics).

If MCC1 (I/O) is not active, stop and check the controller system
for faults and troubleshoot the controller error.

The motor will not start

LCD Indication Problem Verification

• Inspect starter terminals for proper connections.

• Check for loose terminations & wires terminated on insulation.
• Dress connection as necessary.
• Confirm 120 VAC between terminals 3 & 4 on the starter.

If voltage is above 85 VAC, replace the starter as it is defective.

Voltage is too low or not present at
Status Ready
Run Input, terminal 4. If no voltage is present:
• Verify MCC2 & MCC3 (I/O) are active and that their relay coils
are energized.
• Verify MCC2 & MCC3 contacts are closed (see system schemat-
ics).
• If the MCC2 and/or MCC3 I/O are not active, stop and check
controller system for faults and troubleshoot the controller error.

Control Voltage
Powered Down Confirm voltage between terminals 1 & 3.
Voltage too low at Control Power
• If the voltage is less than 105 VAC, correct the voltage problem.
Input, terminal 1.
Control Voltage • If the voltage is greater than 105 VAC, replace defective starter.
Brown Out

Confirm voltage between terminals 1 & 3.

If the voltage is greater than 140 VAC, correct voltage problem.
Control Voltage Voltage too high at Control Power
Over Voltage Input, terminal 1. If the voltage is less than 140 VAC, and the starter is indicating
this fault: Use an Oscilloscope to check for distortion at the peaks
of the output waveform. Contact Siemens Technical Support at
800-323-5450 for further assistance

132 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Solid State Starter Troubleshooting

The motor will not start (continued)

LCD Indication Problem Verification

Fault The starter has detected a problem Press the RST button on the controller's CPU, (which will cycle
EEPROM Memory with the EEPROM Memory. power to the starter). If the EEPROM Memory Fault is still present,
replace the starter.

Fault The starter has detected a problem Press the RST button on the controller's CPU, (which will cycle
ROM Memory with the ROM Memory. power to the starter). If the ROM Memory Fault is still present,
replace the starter.

Fault The starter has detected an Press the RST button on the controller's CPU, (which will cycle
Watchdog internal fault with the software. power to the starter). If the Watchdog Fault is still present, replace
the starter.

1. Verify the correct motor wiring to the starter per the job sche-
matics.
2. Set the Line Rotation in the starter. Begin in the Parameter
Menu.
Note: For step-by-step instructions, see Pump Motor Rotation
for Non-TKE Pumps.
a. ABC for standard Dry (AP) units
• Standard Dry units have the motor mounted to the
left of the pump.
• CW rotation is standard when viewed from the shaft
end.
b. CBA for standard Wet (EP) units
• CCW rotation as viewed from the pump end.

3. Check the starter status. If "wrong rotation" is displayed:

a. De-energize the controller, and then Turn OFF, Lock, and
Wrong Rotation Tag out the mainline supply to the controller.
CBA set as ABC
OR Incoming 3 phase is opposite of b. Swap any two of the incoming lines at the top of the
the Line Rotation Setting. starter.
Wrong Rotation
ABC set as CBA c. Restore power to the controller ("wrong rotation" is cor-
rected).
d. Verify proper operation by momentarily running the unit
in the UP direction.
Note: If the motor is not in view, have someone else available
to listen to the power unit for proper operation.
e. For Temporary Operation mode, use the Run Bug.
f. For Automatic Operation mode, place the controller into
Inspection Operation and use the inspection station con-
trol buttons.

4. If the unit runs in the proper direction, but makes unusual

noise, check:
a. For proper mechanical mating between the pump/motor.
b. For binding issues with the pump.
c. Ensure that the pump screen did not get sucked into the
pump.

Printed in USA May, 2012 133

Solid State Starter Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

The motor will not start (continued)

LCD Indication Problem Verification

The motor is not correctly 1. De-energize equipment, and then Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out
connected to the starter. the mainline disconnect.
2. Confirm 10 ohms or less at the following locations:
In Delta applications:
T1 to MC1-4 (T4)
T2 to MC1-6 (T5)
T3 to MC1-2 (T6)

Notes:
• Restore power when checks are complete.
• Each winding should be close in resistive value to the
other two windings.
• Confirm high resistance value from ground to each of
T1-T3.
• See Motor Wiring Check Out.
Fault Motor Wiring
The fault contactor (MC1) is not 1. Verify the fault contactor (MC1) is being energized after power
energized. up. It should pull in, then drop out upon starter faulting.
a. If not, measure voltage between terminals 9 and 12;
Voltage should be 110 VAC.
b. Refer to job schematics, verify wiring to fault contact on
starter.
c. Correct wiring as necessary.
d. Connect voltmeter set to read VAC between terminals 9
and 12.
e. Push the Up and Down arrows on the starter simultane-
ously and look for 110 VAC to appear briefly.
2. Verify the incoming Line Power
a. Line to Line should be contract voltage.
b. Line to GND = Line to Line voltage divided by 1.73.
1. In the Status Menu, check the Line Voltages.
Fault High Line Volts The starter has detected a high line
condition on the incoming voltage
supply (L1, L2, L3). 2. With a voltmeter verify the incoming line voltages.
a. If the incoming voltage exceeds 527 VAC for 460 VAC
units, or 631 VAC for 575 VAC units
b. Stop and correct the incoming line voltage.
c. If the incoming voltage is acceptable, use the Reset Fault
Command in the System Menu, and reset the starter.
d. If the starter status comes up Motor Stopped and func-
tions properly: Use a power analyzer, multimeter with a
Min/Max function, or similar voltage monitoring instru-
ment to monitor and record incoming power to the unit.
Suspect building power.

134 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Solid State Starter Troubleshooting

The motor will not start (continued)

LCD Indication Problem Verification

Fault Motor Wiring The motor is wired correctly, but 1. De-energize equipment, and then Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out
the starter still indicates Motor the mainline disconnect.
Wiring Fault.
a. Mark the wire on starter terminal 9.
b. Move the wire on the starter from terminal 9 to terminal
10.
c. Energize the equipment.
d. Verify MC1 (fault contactor) is energized and pulled in.
e. Measure voltage AC across each set of contacts on the
MC1 contactor. See MC1 (Fault Contactor) Check Out
section.
f. If any voltage is greater than 5 VAC (indicates bad con-
tact(s)).

2. De-energize equipment, Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the

mainline disconnect, and restore wiring to the original state.
3. Bad contact(s) on fault contactor (MC1) - replace contactor.
4. De-energize equipment, and then Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out
the mainline disconnect.
a. With an ohmmeter, check across each motor winding:
• T1 to T2, T3, T5, T6;
• T2 to T1, T3. T4, T6;
• T3 to T1,T2, T4, T5;
• T4 to T2, T3, T5, T6
• T5 to T1, T3, T4, T6
• T6 to T1, T2, T4, T5
Notes:
• The motor leads should be labeled 1-6 corresponding to
T1-T6.
• The readings should be several Mega-Ohms to infinite
depending on the meter used.
5. Verify the Up To Speed (UTS) output and MUTS relay circuits,
See the MUTS Troubleshooting Chart.

Printed in USA May, 2012 135

Solid State Starter Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

The motor will not start (continued)

LCD Indication Problem Verification

Fault Shorted SCR A The starter has a shorted SCR in 1. De-energize equipment, and then Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out
or the indicated phase the mainline disconnect.
Fault Shorted SCR B a. Note the motor wiring terminations, marking wires as
or
necessary.
Fault Shorted SCR C
b. Disconnect the motor wires from the starter terminals
T1, T2, and T3.
c. With an ohmmeter, make the following resistance
checks:
L1 to T1
L2 to T2
L3 to T3
d. Restore motor wiring.
e. Restore power to the controller.
Notes:
• Less than 3000 Ohms or 3K Ohms is considered
shorted.
• 8000 Ohms or 0.8M Ohms is average, and all three
SCR’s should have balanced resistance within 1000
Ohms of each other.

Status Maintain Start Current limit is set too low or there 1. In the Parameter menu, check the Starting Amps setting. This
before switching to Status is an excessive load on the system should not be set below 200%.
Ramp to 450% during the start. Note: The TKE Manufacturing default is 3 x FLA rating.
2. Check the Overload Amps settings
Note: The TKE Manufacturing default is FLA rating.
3. Verify the valves are not energized during the start.
4. Verify the pump/motor is not in a bind.

Fault Low Leg Amps The starter has detected an 1. Check the fault currents in the fault menu.
imbalance in the motor currents. 2. Look for the leg with severely lower current (Amps).
3. With an Ohmmeter, verify each of the motor's windings.
(Expect ~0.5-2.0 Ohms).
Note: All windings should have the same resistance.
4. Check each of the winding leads to all other winding leads,
looking for two winds shorted together.
Note: Either of these conditions are indicative of a bad motor.
5.Record the values for future reference (Warranty Claims, if
applicable).
6. With an ammeter, verify the current draw of all three legs and
compare to the starter's fault menu current listing for each leg.
7. With a voltmeter, across the line and load terminals of the
starter, measure the voltage AC while the motor is up to speed.
(There should not be any reading above 10 VAC).
8. With a voltmeter across one of the three sets of contacts on the
fault contactor (MC1), measure the voltage while the motor is
up to speed.
Note: There should not be any reading above 10 VAC.

136 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Solid State Starter Troubleshooting

The motor will not start (continued)

LCD Indication Problem Verification

Fault Phase Loss The starter detected a problem This fault will reset when the power returns to normal.
with the incoming three phase 1. View the current line to line voltage, go to Status Menu -->
power during a run condition. Line-Line Volts.
2. With a voltmeter, verify the starter's reading of the line to line
voltages.
• If the starter and voltmeter measurements agree, cor-
rect the phase loss condition.
• If the starter and the voltmeter measurements do not
agree, replace the starter.

The motor trips out on an overload fault after coming up to speed

LCD Indication Problem Verification

Fault Overload The overload setting is set too low. 1. Check the fault currents, Run Status, and Run Time from the
Fault Menu for the last fault.
Note: Displayed currents should be multiplied by 1.73 to get
an approximate line value.
2. Verify that the starting Amps is set to at least 2 x FLA.
3. If the overload fault occurs during the "maintain 450%" and the
run time is several seconds (verified from the FAULTS menu),
there may be a mechanical issue preventing the motor from
coming up to speed.

The starter has detected an over- 1. Verify the starter overload and starting current settings.
load condition while up to voltage. 2. Correct to manufacturing defaults, if necessary.

3. If the overload settings are correct, verify that the currents dis-
played by the starter's fault menu agree with actual Ammeter
readings.
Notes:
• If the fault currents multiplied by 1.73 are in excess of
the job's FLA, there may be mechanical issues causing
this problem.
• If the overload mode is set for "All 3 Phases" and one
winding's current is significantly higher than the other
windings, nuisance overload trips may occur during
long up runs near or at the rated up load.

Printed in USA May, 2012 137

Solid State Starter Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Solid State Starter Troubleshooting

(continued)

CORRECT 3 WINDINGS DEAD

Incorrect

1 WINDING DEAD SWAPPED MOTOR LEADS

Incorrect Incorrect

Open
Contactor

Open
Connection Open
Contactor

Open
Contactor

OPEN CONTACTOR
OPEN CONNECTION (Power Applied)
Incorrect Incorrect

Figure 35 - Delta Wiring Configurations

138 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Change or Replace Cards

Change or Replace Cards

CPU Card Manufacturing installed software: Generic *.nxe, Boot block
Field installed software: Job configuration file, Generic OS, Car, and Group
Notes:
• Generic software files are not downloadable and must be obtained from manufacturing.
• All cars within the same group must have the same version/revision generic software. To
find the version/revision software used on a car, check the adjustment chart inside the
controller cabinet, or enter the VER command.
• On a single car group, a CPU with the latest revision software can be installed as long as
the version is the same as that being replaced.
• In order to work, the use of a generic software version that is different than originally sup-
plied may require a system software update or other controller modifications.
• If necessary, obtain generic software from manufacturing with the appropriate version/
revision. If the desired version/revision software is not available or has been discontinued,
all cars in the group will need to be updated to a later revision, and possibly a later version.
• Record any change to the generic software version/revision (on a particular job) on the
chart located inside the controller cabinet.

Install a Manufacturing Replacement Card or Exchange a CPU from One Group to Another
1. If a multi-car group, identify the required generic version/revision software. Check the chart
located inside the controller cabinet, or enter VER in the UIT for any of the cars in a functioning
group.

2. Locate the archived job configuration files that contain manufacturing default and field adjust-
ments.

3. Remove the car from service.

4. If present, turn OFF the universal power supply (UPS) for battery lowering.

5. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

6. Note the locations of all wires and MTA connectors, and remove them from the CPU Card.

7. Remove the existing CPU Card, and install the replacement.

8. Configure the jumpers on the replacement card the same as the old card.

9. Connect all wiring and MTA connectors that were removed in Step 6.

10. If a multi-car group, disconnect the CPU group communication Connector 21.

11. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

12. Turn ON the UPS for battery lowering.

Note: A new CPU will wake up as G1C1 and remain so until the job configuration file is uploaded.
If the CPU is from another job it will retain its previous identity until the job configuration
file is uploaded.

13. Press Reset on the CPU Card, and, before proceeding, wait for the watchdog LED to come ON
and stay ON.

14. Upload the required software. See “Upload CPU Software” on page 143.

Printed in USA May, 2012 139

Change or Replace Cards TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Setup for ICON Communications with Windows HyperTerminal

Notes:
• ICON CPU cards do not store software and, if replaced, must be uploaded to the CPU.

• Uploading software is the only function in the HyperTerminal program.

1. Start at the laptop or PC and click Start.

2. Select Programs->Accessories->HyperTerminal->HyperTerminal. The Connection Description

window opens.

3. Type in a name, such as "ICON COMM", select an Icon, and then click OK. The Connect To win-
dow opens.

4. Select the arrow beside Connect Using:, then select COM1 (or the laptop or PC port that will be
used) from the list.

5. Click OK. The COM1 Properties window opens.

6. Type in the following properties:

• Bits per second: 38400

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: None

• Stop bits: 1

• Flow Control: Hardware

7. Click OK. This session will be activated.

8. Select File->Save.

9. Connect a standard RS232 cable (communications cable) to the CPU RS232 port.

140 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Change or Replace Cards

Upload CPU Software

1. Record all settings because the elevator will need to be readjusted after this procedure.
2. Upload these files to the CPU:
_0E4000.dat (OS file)
_080000.dat (Car generic)
_0C0000.dat (Group generic)
_07C000.dat (job configuration file)
Note: On a multi-car group, the OS, Car, and Group generic files will be the same files for each
car, but each car has its own job configuration file.

3. Connect the RS232 cable (from the laptop), to the CPU's 9-pin D-Shell connector.

4. Start the HyperTerminal.

5. In the HyperTerminal, select Transfer->Send File. The Send File window opens.

6. With all 4 (four) required files on a flash drive or CD, insert the media into the laptop drive.

7. In the Send File window, enter A (or other appropriate drive name):\*.dat.

8. Place the CPU in the upload mode.

a. Verify if the JP2 jumper has been removed from the CPU card. Removing the JP2 jumper
prevents accidentally writing over a critical data area of CPU memory,
• If the jumper is removed: continue with Step 8c.
• If the jumper is on: power down the CPU, remove it, and power up the CPU.
b. Press and hold RST. While holding RST, press and hold UDL.
c. With both buttons down, release RST.
d. When the F6K_STAT LED on the CPU blinks 4 times (2 long, 2 short), release UDL.
Note: The CPU remains in the upload mode for about 30 seconds, and then resets itself to
normal mode if no instructions are received from the laptop. If this happens, repeat Steps
8b through 8d.

9. In the Send File window, click Send. The Zmodem File Send For ICON Hyperterm window
opens, and shows the upload progress.

10. When the upload is complete, the Zmodem File Send For ICON Hyperterm window closes.

Manually resetting the CPU or any power down of the CPU before allowing the
upload to finish could cause the CPU to lock up.

11. Allow the F6K_STAT LED activity to cease for a couple of minutes before proceeding. The CPU
will automatically reset.

12. When the Watchdog (WD) LED comes ON and stays ON, the new CPU is ready for readjust-
ment. Use the list of recorded settings to make all changes to the job.

13. Perform a hoistway scan.

14. To insure proper operation, perform the functional tests of the system.

Printed in USA May, 2012 141

Change or Replace Cards TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Selector Card TSA (Auxiliary Sensor Card)

Note: For all steps in this procedure, see Figure 36 on page 144.

1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Disconnect the ground wire from the auxiliary sensor assembly.

Note: Auxiliary sensor assembly = auxiliary sensor card + auxiliary sensor card cover.

4. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews holding the auxiliary sensor assembly.

5. Carefully separate the auxiliary sensor assembly from the main sensor card.
Notes:
• The connector (and sometimes the guides) between the two cards will offer resistance so
that the auxiliary sensor assembly cannot be removed evenly.
• Four (4) tape guide halves will remain attached to the auxiliary sensor card, and four (4)
will remain with the main sensor card.

6. Separate the guide halves from the auxiliary sensor card.

7. Remove the four (4) thumbscrews, and then remove the auxiliary sensor card from the cover.

8. Use the four (4) thumbscrews to assemble the new auxiliary sensor card with the cover.

9. Install the four (4) guide halves on the new auxiliary sensor card.

10. Align the auxiliary sensor assembly with the selector box alignment pins and the connector on
the main sensor card. Press the two connectors together.

11. Check the following, and readjust (if necessary),

• The selector box is centered on the tape.
• The guides are not deflecting the tape from the front to the back.
• The guides are not pressing against the sides of the tape.

12. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

13. Run the car up and down to verify proper selector alignment.

14. Return the car to service.

142 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Change or Replace Cards

Selector Card
(continued) TSM (Main Sensor Card)

Note: For all steps in this procedure, see Figure 36 on page 144.

1. Remove the selector box cover.

2. Remove all 40x connectors from the main sensor card.

3. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews holding the auxiliary sensor assembly.
Note: Auxiliary sensor assembly = auxiliary sensor card + auxiliary sensor card cover.

4. Carefully separate the auxiliary sensor assembly from the main sensor card.

Notes:
• The connector (and sometimes the guides) between the two cards will offer resistance so
that the auxiliary sensor assembly cannot be removed evenly.
• Four (4) tape guide halves will remain attached to the auxiliary sensor card, and four (4)
will remain with the main sensor card.

5. Hold the tape away from the selector box, and remove the main sensor assembly.

6. Remove the guide halves from the old main sensor card, and install them on the new card.

7. Ensure that all JP jumpers on the new main sensor card are installed like the original card.

8. Install the new main sensor card on the selector box. Make sure the tape is positioned correctly
between the guide halves.

9. Align the auxiliary sensor assembly with the selector box alignment pins and the connector on
the main sensor card. Press the two connectors together.

10. Tighten the thumbscrews, but do not cross-thread them.

11. Check the following, and readjust (if necessary),

• The selector box is centered on the tape.
• The guides are not deflecting the tape from the front to the back.
• The guides are not pressing against the sides of the tape.

12. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

13. Run the car up and down to verify proper selector alignment.

14. Return the car to service.

Printed in USA May, 2012 143

Change or Replace Cards TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Selector Card
(continued)
When removing either Selector Card from
the Selector Assembly, do not put undue
stress on or excessively bend the cards.

Formed Rail

Stile
Selector Tape

Auxiliary Sensor Assembly (TSA)

Selector Box Cover

Ground Wire

Selector Harness

CAR SIDE VIEW

To Car Header
Mounted Box

Selector Alignment Pins (8)

Main Sensor Card (TSM)

Auxiliary Sensor Card (TSA)

Thumbscrew (4)

Auxiliary Sensor
Card Cover
Ground
Wire
Tape Guide
(4 Sets)

Connector
RAIL SIDE VIEW
Exploded View

Figure 36 - Selector Box

144 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING Change the CPU Battery

Change the CPU Battery

Group Car CPU 1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Remove the old battery, and install the new battery.

4. Disconnect Connector 21 on the CPU card (to remove the car from the group).
Note: When a group car CPU is powered up after replacement of the battery, its identification
defaults to Car 1.

5. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

6. Reconnect Connector 21.

7. Restore the car to service.

Simplex Car CPU 1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Remove the old battery and install the new battery.

4. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

5. Restore the car to service.

Directional Limit Function Tests

Use the following procedures for testing the directional limit function independent of normal selec-
tor operation; See Figure 37 on page 146 for all steps in both procedures.

Bottom Directional Limit (DLB) Function Test

1. On Inspection, run the car up until there is more than 8" between the bottom of the selector
and the top of the bottom floor slowdown magnets.

2. Place a temporary 8" magnet on the selector tape in the directional limit channel so that it is
located above the normal slowdown magnets for the bottom landing.
Note: The magnet's yellow stripe (South Pole) must face away from the selector tape.

3. Use the magnet alignment tool to align the magnet to the edge of the tape.

4. Still on Inspection, run the car down until the selector engages the magnet. The car should
stop.

5. Attempt to run the car down to verify that it will not run down.

6. Run the car up to verify that it will run up.

7. Remove the temporary magnet and store it with the alignment template.

Printed in USA May, 2012 145

Directional Limit Function Tests TROUBLESHOOTING ICON Controller

Top Directional Limit (DLT) Function Test

1. On Inspection, run the car down until there is more than 8" between the top of the selector and
the bottom of the top floor slowdown magnets.

2. Place a temporary 8" magnet on the selector tape in the directional limit channel so that it is
located below the normal slowdown magnets for the top landing.
Note: The magnet's yellow stripe (South Pole) must face away from the selector tape.

3. Use the magnet alignment tool to align the magnet to the edge of the tape.

4. On Inspection, run the car down until the selector is below the temporary magnet.

5. Still on Inspection, run the car up until the selector engages the magnet. The car should stop.

6. Attempt to run the car up to verify that it will not run up.

7. Run the car down to verify that it will run down.

8. Remove the temporary magnet and store it with the alignment template.

Temporary Bottom Directional Temporary Top Directional Limit

Limit Magnet Placement Magnet Placement

Selector Box

Selector Tape

Temporary 8 " Magnet Placed Slowdown Magnets

in Direction Limit Channel (on back side of tape)
Greater Above The Slowdown Magnets Selector Tape
(on back side of tape, south
Than 8" facing away from tape) Bottom of
Slowdown Magnets

Top of Slowdown Magnets Greater

Than 8" Temporary 8 " Magnet Placed
Slowdown Magnet(s) in Direction Limit Channel
(on back side of tape) Below The Slowdown Magnets
(on back side of tape, south
facing away from tape)

Selector Box

.531 " Slowdown Temporary

Magnet Magnet(s) Magnet
Magnet
Alignment
Tool Car Side
Selector Tape Section A-A

Figure 37 - Temporary Directional Limit Magnet Placement (car side)

146 Vertical Express

ICON Controller TROUBLESHOOTING I/O Expansion Card Configuration

I/O Expansion Card Configuration

JP4 on 6300JG_ 24VDC Card
JP5 on 6300JH_ High Voltage Card

I/O
Card (numbers increase)
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
Card Number Jumpers On
1 A, B, D
2 B, D
3 A, D
4 D
5 A, B, C I/O Board to Face Center of Cabinet
6 B, C
7 A, C
8 C
9 A, B
10 B
11 A
12 None
Address Jumper Positions

JP1 – JP4 Ribbon Cable From

I/O Device Connections I/O Configuration CPU to Card 1
Jumpers
JP5
Jumpers

I/O Device
JP1 Connections
Jumpers

Ribbon
Cable from
CPU to
Card 1

24V Low Voltage I/O Expansion Card High Voltage I/O Expansion Card

Printed in USA May, 2012 147

Replacement Parts SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Replacement Parts
33-inch Controller Assembly

11 16

PHR1T

48
CHR2T

32

CHR3T

34
CHR4T

14
23

15

18

Center Panel Center Panel

Power Side Control Side

148 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Replacement Parts

42-inch Controller Assembly

11 16

PHR1T

48 CHR2T

32
CHR3T

CHR4T
34
CHR5T

14
23

15

18

Center Panel Center Panel

Power Side Control Side

Printed in USA May, 2012 149

Replacement Parts SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Controller Parts List

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 834CJ1 Terminal Block

834CJ2 Terminal Middle Block
834CJ3 Terminal Block Support
2 834CE1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail, Green/Yellow
834CC9 Terminal Block, DIN Rail, Gray
834CF11 Terminal Block, DIN Rail End Plate, Black
3 890AF2 Suppressor Assembly
4 6300ACA1 Card, Interface, Micro Comm, CE Electronics
5 9867345 6300HT2 Card, Modem, Distance Monitoring
6 9782813 6300JG1 Card, 24VIO, I/O Expansion, 24 VDC
9782825 6300JH1 Card, High Voltage I/O Expansion, 24/48 VDC
9987652 6300JH2 Card, High Voltage I/O Expansion, 115 VAC/VDC
6300JH3 Card, High Voltage I/O Expansion, 230 VAC/VDC
7 9782552 6300KY10 Card, 188E CPU
8 9782898 6300MD1 Card, Traveling Cable, Interface Distributed, (TCID)
9 9782874 6300MF1 Card, Hoistway Cable, Interface Distributed (HCID)
10 6300NP3 Card, Controller Wiring Interface Front, (CNWIF)
11 9898176 6300NJ112 Volt Battery Charger - 12VBC
12 6300PE1 Card, User Interface Tool, (job specific)
13 220DH3 Cable Assembly, I/O Expansion, 2 Receptacle, 16"
9782588 220DH1 Cable Assembly, I/O Expansion, 2 Receptacle, 5"
14 9782722 672BW1 Power Supply, 24 VDC, 50W
9816124 672BX1 Power Supply, 24 VDC, 100W
9816136 672BY1 Power Supply, 24 VDC, 150W
672CA1 Power Supply, 48 VDC, 50W
672CB1 Power Supply, 48 VDC, 75W
9816148 672CC1 Power Supply, 48 VDC, 150W
15 462FT1 Harness Wire, 18 GA, Power Supply
462FT2 Harness Wire, 18 GA, Power Supply
462FT3 Harness Wire, 18 GA, Power Supply
462FT4 Harness Wire, 18 GA, Power Supply
462FV1 Harness Wire, 20 GA, Power Supply
16 9752457 298AP1 Relay Contactor, 2 NC, 2 NO, 24VDC
298BB1 Relay Contactor, 3 NO, 1 NC, 24VDC
298BE1 Contactor, 24VDC, 2 NO, 2 NC
298BE2 Contactor, 120VAC, 2 NO, 2 NC
298BF1 Contactor, 24VDC, 4 NO
17 344AR1 Diode Assembly
18 381AF1 Filter Assembly

150 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Replacement Parts

Controller Parts List

(continued)
ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

19 9720467 128069 Resistor, 25 OHM, 200W, Adjustable

9720479 128070 Resistor, 50 OHM, 200W, Adjustable
9720492 128072 Resistor, 100 OHM, 200W, Adjustable
9744435 128074 Resistor, 250 OHM, 200W, Adjustable
9744447 128075 Resistor, 500 OHM, 200W, Adjustable
9744459 128076 Resistor, 1K OHM, 200W, Adjustable
9746663 128077 Resistor, 1.5K OHM, 200W, Adjustable
708BB1 Resistor, 3K OHM, 200W, Adjustable
20 545AF2 Jumper, Terminal, 2 Position
545AF3 Jumper, Terminal, 3 Position
545AF5 Jumper, Terminal, 5 Position
21 370AJ1 Module, Electronic, RRA
9739373 370AJ2 Module, Electronic, PSM
370AJ3 Module, Electronic, P24
370AJ4 Module, Electronic, P48
370AJ6 Module, Electronic, VS
22 9782618 409BR5 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 1A
9782620 409BR7 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 2A
9782631 409BR9 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 3A
9782655 409BR11 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 5A
9782667 409BR12 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 6A
9782679 409BR13 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 7A
9771246 409BR14 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 8A
9865245 409BR15 Fuse, Panel, MDA 250V 10A
23 412BC1 Fuseblock, 1 Pole, 250V
24 412BD1 End plate, Fuseblock, DIN Rail
25 412BF1 Fuse holder, DIN Rail, CLASS CC
26 9834606 690AJ7 Relay, RPR, SPDT, 10A, 575VAC
9834612 690AJ8 Relay, RPR, SPDT, 10A, 208VAC - 480VAC
27 9782321 690CA3 Relay, DPDT, 6A, 24 VDC
9782333 690CA5 Relay, DPDT, 6A, 110VDC
28 9840540 690BB10 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 5.5 22A
9840552 690BB1 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 10-40A
9840564 690B12 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 13-52A
9840576 690BB13 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 25-100A
9840620 690BB14 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 50-200A
9815200 690CJ1 Relay, DPDT, 120 VAC
29 9739397 770BK2 Socket, Relay, DPDT, Rail Mount
30 9815641 558AX2 Ejector, Relay

Printed in USA May, 2012 151

Replacement Parts SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Controller Parts List

(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

31 9739464 804BC1 Suppressor, 115 VAC (Used on AC Relay)

9739452 804BC2 Suppressor, 24VDC (Used on DC Relay)
9765656 804BF1 Suppressor, Relay Contactor, Diode, 24-60 VDC
804BN1 Suppressor Assembly
32 787AF1 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 22A
787AF3 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 55A
787AF11 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 68A
787AF12 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 80A
787AF5 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 105A
787AF7 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 130A
787AF9 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 157A
787AF14 Starter, Electronic, 200-230V, 252A
787AF2 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 22A
787AF4 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 55A
787AF13 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 68A
787AF6 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 105A
787AF8 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 130A
787AF10 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 157A
33 9782734 409BP20 Fuse, 3A, FNQ, 600V
9782746 409BP23 Fuse, 4A, FNQ, 600V
9782758 409BP24 Fuse, 5A, FNQ, 600V
9782760 409BP25 Fuse, 6A, FNQ, 600V
9782771 409BP28 Fuse, 8A, FNQ, 600V
9782783 409BP30 Fuse, 10A, FNQ, 600V
9782795 409BP31 Fuse, 12A, FNQ, 600V
9853241 409BP32 Fuse, 15A, FNQ, 600V
34 9728351 298AH23 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 43A
9847653 298AR101 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 78A
298AR104 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 157A
298AH31 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 252A
298AV1 Contactor, 4 Pole, 200-220/60 & 200/50 VAC Coil
298AV2 Contactor, 4 Pole, 208-240/60 VAC Coil
298AV4 Contactor, 4 Pole, 230-240/50 VAC Coil
298AV5 Contactor, 4 Pole, 380/60 VAC Coil
298AV7 Contactor, 4 Pole, 400-415/50 VAC Coil
298AV8 Contactor, 4 Pole, 440/50 & 480/60 VAC Coil
298AV9 Contactor, 4 Pole, 600/60 VAC Coil
298AW1 Contactor, Auxiliary, 700CF

152 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Replacement Parts

Controller Parts List

(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

35 9853431 661BA2 Connector Plug, 2 Position, 5.08mm

9725638 661BA3 Connector Plug, 3 Position, 5.08mm
9870936 661BA4 Connector Plug, 4 Position, 5.08mm
9831201 661BA7 Connector Plug, 7 Position, 5.08mm
9852461 661BA8 Connector Plug, 8 Position, 5.08mm
9787875 661BB8 Connector Plug, 8 Position, 7.5mm
9816254 661BB10 Connector Plug, 10 Position, 7.5mm
36 687AE2 Receptacle, MTA, 20 GA, .156, 2 Position
687AE3 Receptacle, MTA, 20 GA, .156, 3 Position
9835649 687AE4 Receptacle, MTA, 20 GA, .156, 4 Position
687AE5 Receptacle, MTA, 20 GA, .156, 5 Position
687AE6 Receptacle, MTA, 20 GA, .156 6 Position
687AE8 Receptacle, MTA, 20 GA, .156, 8 Position
9721212 687BY3 Receptacle, MTA, 22 GA, .100, 3 Position
9725544 687BY4 Receptacle, MTA, 22 GA, .100, 4 Position
9832214 687BY5 Receptacle, MTA, 22 GA, .100, 5 Position
9743325 687BY6 Receptacle, MTA, 22 GA, .100, 6 Position
9854436 687BY7 Receptacle, MTA, 22 GA, .100, 7 Position
9765547 687BY8 Receptacle, MTA, 22 GA, .100, 8 Position
37 220CN1 Cable Assembly, 16/3 Power Cord, Male
220CN2 Cable Assembly, 16/3 Power Cord, Female
38 834CG1 Clamp, DIN Rail, Terminal Block
39 274BR1 Clamp, Flat Cable
40 9719180 378AE1 Fan, 110 CFM, AC, Muffin
41 378AD1 Fan Guard and Filter

Wall Mounted Controller Material

42 265DX4 Unistrut 1-5/8” x 60”

43 72780 Unistrut Nut
44 396RW2 FS, Screw, CSBHS, 0.312-18UNC
45 196AWJ1 Controller Mounting Bracket

Printed in USA May, 2012 153

Replacement Parts SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Controller Parts List

(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

46 9754726 874DA1 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9754378 874DA2 Transformer, PRI 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9756436 874DA4 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
9867547 874DA5 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9754732 874DA6 Transformer, PRI 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 50Hz Only
9854545 874DB1 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115/115V, .75KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9709090 874DB2 Transformer, PRI 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9810398 874DB3 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9888800 874DC1 Transformer, PRI 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874DC3 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
9754740 874DJ1 Transformer, PRI 208/575V, SEC 115/115V, .25KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
9987640 874DJ2 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, .25KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
9754751 874DJ4 Transformer, PRI 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .25KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
874DK1 Transformer, PRI 230/230V, SEC 115V, .25KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
874DL1 Transformer, PRI 230/230V, SEC 115V, .15KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
9742852 874DL2 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115V, .15KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874DL3 Transformer, PRI 575V, SEC 115V, .15KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874DP1 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115/115V, .1KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
874DP2 Transformer, PRI 240/480V, SEC 115/115V, .1KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
874DP3 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 115/115V, .1KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
874DW1 Transformer, PRI 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .1KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874DW2 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, 1KVA, 1 Phase, 60Hz
874EM001 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EM002 Transformer, PRI 240V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EM003 Transformer, PRI 480V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EM004 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EN001 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 208V, 1KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EN002 Transformer, PRI 240V, SEC 208V, 1KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EN003 Transformer, PRI 480V, SEC 208V, 1KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz
874EN004 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 208V, 1KVA, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz

154 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Replacement Parts

Starter Diagrams

IEC Starter Single Phase Starter

Electronic Starter

Printed in USA May, 2012 155

Replacement Parts SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Selector

1
2 9

8
6

5 4
10

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 9882849 6300MJ4 Card, Main Sensor, Tape Selector, TSM

2 9841544 141549 Guide, Selector Tape
3 9782837 6300MK2 Card, Auxiliary Sensor, Tape Selector, TSA
4 760BF1 Shim, Aluminum, .093" x 1.25" x 5"
5 9987644 760BG1 Shim, Fiberglass, .093" x 1.25" x 5"
6 9987654 165RD1 Plate Nut Assembly
7 900AD60 Wire, 14 GA., Green, #8 Rings, 10"
8 9987653 462FW3 Harness, Selector
9 9987641 850PE1 Tool, Alignment, Magnet
10 9987642 814AF1 Template, Floor Magnets
11 9758318 568AG1 Magnet, Strip, 2.5"
12 9758320 568AG2 Magnet, Strip, 8"

156 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Cards

Cards

User
Interface
Tool
1

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 9782552 6300KY10 Card, 188E CPU, w/ 2 Serial Channels and Group (more
than one car)
2 9782321 690CA3 Relay, DPDT, 24 VDC (K1 through K12)
3 9721366 409AE7 Fuse, 125V, 1A, (F1, F2, F3)
4 9752478 116AB2 Battery, 12V, 1.2 A-H

Parts not shown / not labeled in drawing

5 9853431 661BA2 Connector Plug, 2 Position, 5.08 mm
6 9725638 661BA3 Connector Plug, 3 Position, 5.08 mm
7 9870936 661BA4 Connector Plug, 4 Position, 5.08 mm
8 9831201 661BA7 Connector Plug, 7 Position, 5.08 mm
9 9852461 661BA8 Connector Plug, 8 Position, 5.08 mm
10 9787875 661BB8 Connector Plug, 8 Position, 7.5 mm
11 9816254 661BB10 Connector Plug, 10 Position, 7.5 mm

Printed in USA May, 2012 157

Cards SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Cards
(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9867345 6300HT2 Card, Modem, Distance Monitoring

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9782813 6300JG1 Card, I/O Expansion, 24 VDC

158 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Cards

Cards
(continued)

6300JH1 6300JH2

6300JH3

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9782825 6300JH1 Card, I/O Expansion, High Voltage, 24/48 VDC
9987652 6300JH2 Card, I/O Expansion, High Voltage, 115 VAC/VDC
9987651 6300JH3 Card, I/O Expansion, High Voltage, 230 VAC/VDC

Printed in USA May, 2012 159

Cards SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Cards
(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9782916 6300LL3 Card, L24, I/O Expansion, 24V

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9782928 6300LM1 Card, LN, 24V, I/O

160 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Cards

Cards
(continued)

6300MB1 6300MB2 6300MB3

6300NP1

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 9738192 6300MB1 Card, Car Wiring Interface, Distributed, (CWID)
2 9782898 6300MD1 Card, Traveling Cable Interface, Distributed, (TCID)
3 9782874 6300MF1 Card, Hoistway Cable Interface, Distributed, (HCID)
4 6300NP3 Card, Controller Wiring Interface Front, (CNWIF)

Printed in USA May, 2012 161

Cards SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Cards
(continued)

6300LN1

6300LN2

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9729546 6300LN1 Card, High Voltage, 24V-48V
9863549 6300LN2 Card, High Voltage, 120V
6300LN3 Card, High Voltage, 240V (not shown)

162 Vertical Express

ICON Controller SERVICE INFORMATION Cards

Cards
(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9782849 6300MJ4 Card, TSM, Selector
6300MJ2 Card, TSM, Selector, w/EN-81 Floor Level Sensor
(not shown)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9782837 6300MK2 Card, TSA, Selector, Auxiliary Sensor

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

9898176 6300NJ1 Card, Battery Charger

Printed in USA May, 2012 163

Cards SERVICE INFORMATION ICON Controller

Cards
(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

6300ACA1 Card, Interface, MicroComm, CE Electronics

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

6300PE1 Card, UIT, (job specific, consult manufacturing)

164 Vertical Express

LD-03 Linear
Door Operator
with UIT
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Contents

LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Contents
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Arrival of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Setup using the UIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Direction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Auto Null . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Door Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Profile Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Closing Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Closing Kinetic Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Door Closing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Door Opening Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
The User Interface Tool (UIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Overview of Adjustments, Parameters, and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
The UIT Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Diagnostic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Profile Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CAN Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Control Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Diagnostic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Door Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Printed in USA May, 2012 1

Contents LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Contents
(continued)

Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Record Flight Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Upload FLASH Program Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Upload Generic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Upload the Door Operator Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Determine the Software Version/Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cycle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Restart the IGBT Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power Up Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
LED Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Power Supplies Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Checking the Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Change the Door Operator Belt (Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Change the Door Operator Belt (Center Opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1504BK Single Speed Left and Right Hand Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1504BL Center Opening Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1504BV 2-Speed Left and Right Hand Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
186CP Car Top Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment
safety information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

Printed in USA May, 2012 3

LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Safety Precautions

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety
information on installation and service.

Revision Change Bars

Each revised page included in this manual will have a vertical line (change bar) to the left of the
text that has been added or changed. The example at the left of this paragraph shows the size
and position of the revision change bar.

4 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the Vertical Express Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Printed in USA May, 2012 5

LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Contents

Contents

This page
intentionally
left blank.

6 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Specifications

Specifications • Maximum Door Opening Speed: 2 ft/s

• Maximum Combined Door Weight: 450 lbs.
(weight is the combined car and hoistway door assemblies and components)
• Motor Horsepower: 1/6 HP
• Motor Voltage: 120 VDC
• Encoder: 500 pulses per revolution (built into motor gearbox)
• Drive Belt: 1/2” pitch, 3/4” wide, H series, trapezoidal timing belt
• Door Card: Universal Door Controller (UDC), closed-loop

Installation
Mechanical 1. Place and fasten the operator. See Figure 1.
Installation
2. Install the door(s).

3. Install the clutch and pickup linkage.

Wiring 1. Route the door operator harness to the swing return, and connect the harness
connectors to the appropriate connectors on the Car Wiring Interface Card (CWID).

2. Connect the safety edge cables to the safety edge box.

Header to Cab Top

1/4" Hex Head Cap
and Pyramidal Tooth
Lockwasher (11)

Cab Top
Front Panel

Wall Panel

1/4" Hex Head Cap

Screw, Nut, and
Pyramidal Tooth
Lockwashers

Return/Strike 1/4" Hex Head Cap Screw

Column and Pyramidal Tooth
Lockwasher (2)

Figure 1 - Mount the Door Operator and Header Assembly to the Cab

Printed in USA May, 2012 7

Setup and Adjustment LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Setup and Adjustment

Setup using the UIT The Linear Door Operator (LD-03) is adjusted and configured by manufacturing. Only minor adjust-
ments, if any, should be required at the job site.

The supplied configuration of the door operator uses adjustment and parameter
values that are different from the default values shown in the Diagnostics Section.
Using the Factory Defaults Command (FDF) could result in a maladjusted or non-
functioning door operator.

Power-up 1. Place the car on Inspection Operation.

2. Verify that the following jumper settings and positions are correct. See Figure 2.
• JP1 is ON 1 and 2.
• JP2 is ON 2 and 3.
• JP3 is OFF.
• JP4 is Set (OFF = Front, ON = Rear).
• JP5 is ON.
Note: JP5 ON forces RS485 communications mode, and must have matching CPU
Adjustments D12/D13=8.
• JP6 is OFF.

JP2 JP6 JP1 JP3, JP4, JP5

Figure 2 - Door Operator Card with Jumper Settings and Positions

3. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

4. Verify that the VBUS and WD LEDs on the door card are ON.

5. Verify that the Harness Comm plug is on CON7.

8 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Setup and Adjustment

Direction Check
To prevent automatic movement of the door while adjusting limit switches, place
elevator on Inspection Operation.

1. Check the DOL and DCL limits.

a. Place the car on Inspection Operation.

b. Press and hold MDO on the door card to open the door(s). Verify that the door opens fully
and the DOL LED turns ON. If DOL/DCL do not appear to work, verify that the door adjust-
ments ELI and LDO are set to 1,
• If doors move in the open direction, continue with Step 1c.
• If doors do not move in the open direction, use the UIT to change the value of LHO.
See “LHO” on page 23, and cycle power must be completed.
• Repeat Step 1b.

c. Press MDC on the door card to close the door(s). Verify that the door closes fully, and that
the DCL LED turns ON. If DOL/DCL do not appear to work, verify that the door adjustments
ELI and LDO are set to 1.

d. If the value for LHO was changed, save the change.

e. Adjust the limit switch actuators (if necessary).

Auto Null 1. Start this procedure with the car on Inspection Operation and the doors FULLY CLOSED.

2. On the UIT, scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->ANL (Autonull).

3. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

ENT to AUTONULL
ESC to exit

4. Press ENTER and, after autonull is complete, the UIT displays,

AUTONULL COMPLETE
Save to Flash

5. Save the autonull parameters to FLASH.

a. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->SAVETOFLASH, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
ENT to save
ESC to exit

b. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

Adjs have been saved to FLASH

Printed in USA May, 2012 9

Setup and Adjustment LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Door Scan 1. Place the car on Inspection Operation.

2. Make sure the door(s) is FULLY CLOSED.

3. On the UIT, scroll to MAIN->PROFILE1->CMD->LEARN TRAVEL.

4. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

TRAVEL = (######)
Ent to Re-Learn

5. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

TRAVEL = 000
Move Doors Now

6. Press and hold the MDO button until the DOL LED turns ON and the UIT displays,
TRAVEL = (learned value)
Save to Flash

7. Save the Door Scan to Flash.

a. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->SAVETOFLASH, press ENTER, and UIT displays,
ENT to save
ESC to exit

b. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

Adjs have been saved to FLASH

Profile Adjustments 1. Place the car at the appropriate landing of the profile that is to be adjusted.
2. Scroll to MAIN->PROFILE#->ADJ-> and make the necessary door open and close adjustments.
Notes: For adjustment parameters,
• See “Door Closing Profile” and “Door Open Profile” on the right side of the label in the door
card cover, or,
• See “Door Closing Profile” on page12, and “Door Open Profile” on page 13.

To avoid mechanical damage to the elevator, DO NOT make drastic changes in Open
and Close high speeds.

3. Save any adjustment changes to Flash.

a. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->SAVETOFLASH, press ENTER, and UIT displays,
ENT to save
ESC to exit

b. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

Adjs have been saved to FLASH

IMPORTANT! Save changes to FLASH when the door is on DCL, or the changes may not be accepted.

10 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Setup and Adjustment

Closing Force 1. Use the UIT, scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->STALL, and note the value so that it can be set back
later.
2. Press ENTER, scroll to 0 (zero), and press ENTER again. This sets the value of STALL to 0.
3. Use a force gauge to measure the closing force. See Figure 3.
Notes:
• The closing force should be less than 30 lbf. in the middle 1/3 of travel.
• If the closing force is too high: Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->CTL2, reduce the value, re-
measure and repeat until the closing force is within limits.

Figure 3 - Safe Use of the Door Gauge

4. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->STALL, and set STALL back to its original value.

5. Save the values to FLASH.
6. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->SAVETOFLASH, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
ENT to save
ESC to exit
7. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays, Adj's have been saved to FLASH.

Closing Kinetic 1. Place the car at the landing where the test will be performed.
Energy 2. Place car on Inspection Operation.
3. Determine the minimum allowable closing time from the door operator nameplate.
Code Distance For the Time Measurement,
• Center Opening Doors: 1" from FULLY OPEN to 1" from FULLY CLOSED.
• Single Speed Doors: 2" from FULLY OPEN to 2" from the face of the strike column.
• For the LD-03 Operator: 2 inches = 4.286 revolutions and 1 inch = 2.143 revolutions.
Note: Each door operator is programmed with the correct stopwatch starting and stopping
points (used for measuring closing time with the stopwatch feature).
4. Place the car on Automatic Operation.
5. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->STOPWATCH, and press ENTER.
6. Choose the close time, press ENTER, and the UIT displays, POS Mark 1 n.nnn (value from
SWM1).
7. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays, POS Mark 2 n.nnn (value from SWM2).
8. Press DOOR OPEN, and when door is FULLY OPEN, press ENTER and the UIT displays, Stop-
watch armed.
9. When the door closes, the UIT displays the closing time. If the closing time is less than the min-
imum allowable closing time specified, reduce the value of the close high speed (CHS#) adjust-
ment and repeat until the closing time is greater than or equal to the minimum.
10. Save any adjustment changes to FLASH.

Printed in USA May, 2012 11

Setup and Adjustment LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Door Closing Profile

Close Torque Limit 3 Close Torque Limit 2 Close Torque Limit 1

(ctl3) (ctl2) (ctl1)

CloseHighSpeed
(chs#)

Close_Jerk_Rate
(cjdr#)

Speed

CloseDEcelRate
CloseLinearTargetGain
CloseACcelRate (cder#)
(cltg#)
(cacr#)

CloseManualSpeed
CloseNudgingSpeed (cms#)
(cndgs#)

Six Inch From

Close Point

DOL Door Closing DCL

Limit Limit
CloseDigitalTargetOffset
(cdto#)

six_inch_point_adj
(six)

Profile# Adjustment Door Adjustment

cacr# CloseACcelRate ctl1 Close Torque Limit 1
cbs# CloseBacklashSpeed ctl2 Close Torque Limit 2
cbt# CloseBacklashTime ctl3 Close Torque Limit 3
chs# CloseHighSpeed
cder# CloseDEcelRate
cms# CloseManualSpeed
cltg# CloseLinearTargetGain
cdto# CloseDigitalTargetOffset
cndgs# CloseNudgingSpeed
Note: # = Profile Number

12 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Setup and Adjustment

Door Opening Profile

Open Torque Limit 1 Open Torque Limit 2 Open Torque Limit 3

(otl1) (otl2) (otl3)

OpenHighSpeed
(ohs#)
Speed
OpenBacklashDistance
(obd#)

OpenDEcelRate
(oder#)

OpenACcelRate OpenManualSpeed
(oacr#) (oms#)

OpenLinearTargetGain
(oltg#)

DCL OpenBacklashSpeed DOL

Door Opening
Limit (obs#) Limit
OpenDigitalTargetOffset
(odto#)

Profile# Adjustment Door Adjustment

oacr# OpenACcelRate otl1 Open Torque Limit 1
obs# OpenBacklashSpeed otl2 Open Torque Limit 2
obd# OpenBacklashDistance otl3 Open Torque Limit 3
ohs# OpenHighSpeed
oder# OpenDEcelRate
oms# OpenManualSpeed
oltg# OpenLinearTargetGain
odto# OpenDigitalTargetOffset
Note: # = Profile Number

Printed in USA May, 2012 13

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Diagnostics
The User Interface Tool (UIT)

UP or DOWN Arrow - Scrolls

through menus, adjustments,
and displays.
ThyssenKrupp
Universal Door ESC - Exits the current level of a
menu, adjustment, or display.

ENTER - Selects a menu, adjust-

ment, or display.

UP DOWN ESC ENTER

Arrow Arrow

Overview of Adjustments, Parameters, and Commands

• All adjustments must be made when the doors are idle.

• Before the card is reset or powered down, save any adjustment changes to FLASH.

• When the adjustment is a speed value:

Increase the value = The door runs at a faster speed.
Decrease the value = The door runs at a slower speed.

• When the adjustment is an acceleration or deceleration rate value:

Increase the value = The door accelerates or decelerates faster.
Decrease the value = The door accelerates or decelerates slower.

• When the adjustment is a distance or point value:

Increase the value = The distance or point is further from either the door open limit (DOL) or
door close limit (DCL), depending on whether the door is opening or closing.
Decrease the value = The distance or point is closer to either the door open limit (DOL) or door
close limit (DCL), depending on whether the door is opening or closing.

• Door position is stored at 0 on DCL and at Travel (TRV) on DOL.

• Speeds are (+) in the opening direction, and (–) in the closing direction.

14 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

The UIT Menu Tree

Main Menu

Door Profile_# CAN Control System Diagnostics

Adjustment Adjustment Monitor Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
OTL1 OHS# CAN_esr IBM0 LHO TPA1
OTL2 OMS# CAN_gsr DBM0 DCM TPA2
OTL3 OACR# CAN_mder IBM1 DCI TPM1
CTL1 ODER# CAN_tcr DBM1 DOI TPD1
CTL2 ODTO# CAN_rcr IBM4 ELI TPM2
CTL3 OBS# CAN_cec DBM4 MAL TPD2
CLT OBD IBM5 LDO DM0
SIX OLTG# Command DBM5 FSP DZ0
DIREV CHS# CAN Err Rst IIM UPM DM1
STALL CMS# OIM DRM DZ1
ADP CACR# CDT TPL1
PPR CDER# Monitor TPL2
IFB CDTO# Command HEX
SW_v_r
RPM CJDR# Cycle Mode
LPTC CLTG# Command Monitor
ADZ1 CNDGS# Monitor TP1_out
MDC KPCMD# PASSWORD CONTROL
mcss_cmd_num SAVE TO FLASH TP2_out
MNC KICMD# TP1s_in
P_in_0 STACK USAGE
IKP KDCMD# TP2s_in
P_in_1 FACTORY DEFAULTS
IKI KPFB# TP1l_IN
P_in_4
IVL KDFB# TP2l_in
P_in_5
SWM1 LAG (Profile 1 only)
P_out_0
SWM2 RSC (Profile 1 only) Command
P_out_1
P_out_4 DISPLAY FAULTS
Monitor # = profile number P_out_5 CLEAR FAULTS
DOOR_trav Exp_in
DOOR_pos Command
upid_cmd_vel
upid_torque Learn Travel
upid_mtr_vel
upid_vel_err
upid_pos_err
adc_1
slip_comp_op
slip_comp_cl
DTG_open
DTG_close
profile_ID

Command
IGBT Err Rst
Shutdown
Stopwatch
Autonull

Printed in USA May, 2012 15

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Adjustments
Control Adjustments
Mnemonic Adjustment Definition

CDT Cycle Delay Time The time (in seconds) that the door control will delay at each limit when the
doors are on continuous cycle mode
Min: 0
Default: 32
Max: 255

DBM0 De-Bounce Bit Mask 0 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X Input Input Input X X X X
X Electronic Encoder Encoder X X X X
DCL Phase B Phase A

DBM1 De-Bounce Bit Mask 1 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Input Input X X X X X X
Hall Limit Hall Limit X X X X X X
DOL DCL

DBM4 De-Bounce Bit Mask 4 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input Input X X X X
X X VBUS SE X X X X
DBM5 De-Bounce Bit Mask 5 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input Input Input Input Input Input
X X Electronic X F/Rn CAN/485n MDC MDO
DOL

16 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Control Adjustments (continued)

Mnemonic Adjustment Definition (continued)

IBM0 Invert Bit Mask 0 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default indicates that the Encoder Phase B and Encoder Phase A
signals are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 32
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X Input Input Input X X X X

X Electronic Encoder Encoder X X X X
DCL Phase B Phase A

IBM1 Invert Bit Mask 1 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default indicates that the Hall Limit DOL and Hall Limit DCL signals
are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 192
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Input Input X X X X X X
Hall Limit Hall Limit X X X X X X
DOL DCL

IBM4 Invert Bit Mask 4 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default value indicates that the SE signal should be high when not
obstructed. If the value is set to 0, then SE signal should be low when not
obstructed.
Min: 0
Default: 0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input Input X X X X
X X VBUS SE X X X X
IBM5 Invert Bit Mask 5 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default indicates that the Electronic DOL, MDC, and MDO signals
are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 35
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input X Input Input Input Input

X X Electronic X F/Rn CAN/485n MDC MDO
DOL

Printed in USA May, 2012 17

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Control Adjustments (continued)

Mnemonic Adjustment Definition (continued)

IIM Input Invert Mask This is the input invert mask for the I/O Expansion. The signals shown in the
table can be inverted by setting the corresponding bit. The default indicates
that all of the input signals are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 95
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
X DCL DOL HDI2 HDI1 NDG CD OD
OIM Output Invert Mask This is the output invert mask for the I/O Expansion. The output signals
shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding bit. The
default indicates that none of the signals are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 0
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X X X Output Output Output Output
X X X X DRL DL6 DCL DOL

Diagnostic Adjustments
Notes:
• These values are for diagnostic purposes and cannot be changed using the UIT.
• The test points have a range of 0V minimum to +3V maximum.
• The test point outputs are based on Equation 1 and Equation 2.
Equation 1= TP1out = ((TP1in * TPM1) / TPD1) * 0.73mV + 1.5V
Equation 2 = TP2out = ((TP2in * TPM2) / TPD2) * 0.73mV + 1.5V

Diagnostic Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

DM0 0 2048 4095 DAC 0 Multiplier - Multiplier for DAC0; 2048 = 1.000. Do not
use DM0, use TPM1 instead.

DM1 0 2048 4095 DAC 1 Multiplier - Multiplier for DAC1; 2048 = 1.000. Do not
use DM1, use TPM2 instead.

DZ0 -1228 0 1228 DAC 0 Offset - Zero offset for DAC0. Adjust for 1.500V
output when input to DAC0 = 0.

DZ1 -1228 0 1228 DAC 1 Offset - Zero offset for DAC1. Adjust for 1.500V
output when input to DAC1 = 0.

HEX – 0 – Values in Hex - Set to 1 to display numerical values in hexa-

decimal format. Set to 0 to display numerical values in deci-
mal format.
TPA1 0 2048 32767 Test Point 1 Address - Address for the variable information
to be output at Test Point1.

18 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Diagnostic Adjustments (continued)

Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

TPA2 0 2048 32767 Test Point 2 Address - Address for the variable information
to be output at Test Point 2.

TPD1 0 0 32767 Test Point 1 Divider - Divider for Test Point 1. Used to facili-
tate viewing signals on Test Point 1. Refer to Equation 1.

TPD2 0 0 32767 Test Point 2 Divider - Divider for Test Point2. Used to facili-
tate viewing signals on Test Point 2. Refer to Equation 2.

TPL1 – 0 – Test Point 1 Length - Length of variable for Test Point 1. Set
to 0 for short and set to 1 for long.

TPL2 – 0 – Test Point 2 Length - Length of variable for Test Point 2. Set
to 0 for short and set to 1 for long.

TPM1 1 1 32767 Test Point 1 Multiplier - Multiplier for Test Point 1. Used to
facilitate viewing signals on Test Point 1. See Equation 1.

TPM2 1 1 32767 Test Point 2 Multiplier - Multiplier for Test Point 2. Used to
facilitate viewing signals on Test Point 2. See Equation 2.

Door Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

ADP 1 1 DPL Adj Active Door Profile - Use to manually select the door profile.

ADZ0* -8192 0 8192 A/D Digital Zero0 - The digital zero value for the analog to
digital input number 0. This is on the W phase.

ADZ1* -8192 0 8192 A/D Digital Zero1 - The digital zero value for the analog to
digital input number 1. This is on the U phase.

CLT 0 10 25 Closing Torque (%) - This adjustment sets the closing

torque limit. This adjustment is a percent of Maximum Drive
Current.
CTL1 0 20 100 Close Torque Limit 1 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
last third of close cycle.
CTL2 0 20 100 Close Torque Limit 2 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
middle third of close cycle.
CTL3 0 40 100 Close Torque Limit 3 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
first third of close cycle.
DIREV 0 100 500 Smooth Turnaround (RPM) - This is the speed of the motor
that must be reached before reversing the door motor to re-
open the doors after a safety edge has been activated.
IFB* 0 0 1 Invert Feedback - Do Not Change.

IKI* 0 807 6400 Current Loop Integral Gain - Do Not Change.

IKP* 0 1.25 8.0 Current Loop Proportional Gain - Do Not Change.

IVL* 10 95 100 Current Loop Voltage Limit - Do Not Change.

LPTC* 0 .015 .050 Low Pass Time Constant - This value is used as the time
constant for the low pass filter. This adjustment is in milli-
seconds.

Printed in USA May, 2012 19

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Door Adjustments (continued)

Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

MDC* MNC 6.79 6.8 Maximum Drive Current - The maximum drive current in
Amps rms. Do Not Change.

MFC* 0 1.0 MNC Motor Field Current - Motor field current in Amps rms. Do
Not Change.

MNC* MFC 1.4 MDC Motor Nameplate Current - Motor nameplate current in
Amps rms. Do Not Change.

MTP* 2.0 6.0 8.0 Motor Poles - The number of poles of the AC door motor. Do
Not Change.

OTL1 0 50 100 Open Torque Limit 1 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
first third of open cycle. This is a percentage of the maxi-
mum drive current.

OTL2 0 45 100 Open Torque Limit 2 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
during the middle third of open cycle.

OTL3 0 20 100 Open Torque Limit 3 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
last third of open cycle.

PPR* 64 500 2048 Encoder Resolution - This is the pulses per revolution of the
door operator motor encoder.

RPM* 500 1150 2048 Motor RPM - This is the nameplate door operator motor
RPM.

RSF* .10 3.1 6.0 Rated Slip Frequency - The rated slip frequency of the
AC motor in Hertz. Do Not Change.

SIX 0 1.0 15.9 Six Inch Point (rev)- This is the point at which the six inch
from close signal will be sent to the controller. This adjust-
ment is in tenths of motor revolutions.
Note: To determine the relationship of travel distance to mo-
tor RPM, see Door Parameter POS.

STALL 0 50 300 Stall Velocity - This sets the motor RPM that is used to deter-
mine when the door motor is stalled and the reduced stall
torque adjustment value is applied to the door motor. This
adjustment is in RPM.

SWM1 0 0 32.767 Stop Watch Mark 1 (Rev) - Used in conjunction with the
Stopwatch feature. SWM1 is Mark 1.

SWM2 Stop Watch Mark 2 (Rev) - Used in conjunction with the

Stopwatch feature. SWM2 is Mark 2.

*System Adjustment MAL must equal 1 for the availability of the adjustment.

20 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Profile Adjustments Notes:

• # = Profile Number
• Several different door operation profiles are available.
• Each profile has adjustments for both Open and Close; The profile adjustments have the same
minimum, default, and maximum values.
• Each value may be adjusted for a different purpose.
• Adjustment values can relate to one another only within the same door operation profile.

Profile Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

CACR# 0 1200 3600 Close Acceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Close acceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from zero speed and the door
open limit to top speed.

CDER# 0 900 1919 Close Deceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Close deceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from top speed to manual close
speed.

CDTO# -2.0 0 2.0 Close Digital Target Offset (Rev) - This adjustment shifts the
deceleration portion of the opening cycle away from the
door close limit. Increasing this value will cause the doors to
begin deceleration further from the close limit.

CHS# Close manual 300 Rated RPM of Close High Speed (RPM) - Maximum close speed of the door
speed adjust- motor in RPM motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor that the control
ment value. adjustment. system will attain during a close door cycle.

CJDR# 0 3100 8192 Close Jerk Rate (RPM/sec2) - This is the jerk rate in the close
direction when transitioning from top close speed to decel-
eration. This controls the amount of rounding/ smoothing
that occurs during the transition. Units are RPM/sec/sec.

CLTG# 60 120 3000 Close Linear Target Gain - 1/min

CMS# 0 40 Close high Close Manual Speed (RPM) - Manual close speed of door
speed motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor when the
adjustment doors are closed with the manual push buttons or during the
value. last portion of a close cycle.

CNDGS# 0 125 Close high Nudge Close Speed (RPM) - This is the speed of the door
speed motor when nudging operation is activated.
adjustment
KDCMD# 0 0 327.67 Speed Control Derivative Gain - Do Not Change.

KDFB# 0 0 327.67 Speed Feedback Derivative Gain - Do Not Change.

KICMD# 0 22.2 3276.7 Speed Control Integral Gain - Do Not Change.

KPCMD# 0 0 327.67 Speed Command Proportional Gain - Do Not Change.

KPFB# 0 3.33 327.67 Speed Feedback Proportional Gain - Do Not Change.

LAG 0 0.150 0.250 Profile Lag Compensation (sec) - Adjusts the compensation
in the profile that accounts for the delay between the
demand and the motor response. Units are in seconds.
Available only in Profile1. Do Not Change.

Printed in USA May, 2012 21

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Profile Adjustments (continued)

Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

OACR# 0 1200 3600 Open Acceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Open acceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from backlash speed to top
speed.

OBD 0 1.0 10 Open Backlash Distance (Rev) - Sets the distance that the
doors will move at open backlash speed (OBS#) at the
beginning of an open cycle. The backlash distance begins
just after the doors leave the door close limit and is in motor
revolutions. This distance is used to allow the hoistway door
to be picked up by the car door interlock rollers, and is
effective in the opening cycle only.
Note: To determine the relationship of travel distance to mo-
tor RPM, see Door Parameter POS.

OBS# 0 60 Open high Open Backlash Speed (RPM) - This is the speed of the door
speed motor in rpm during the open backlash distance (OBD#).
adjustment This speed is used to keep the door speed low until the car
value. door interlock rollers pick up the hoistway door.

ODER# 0 1200 3839 Open Deceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Open deceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from top speed to manual open
speed.

ODTO# -2.0 0 2.0 Open Digital Target Offset (Rev)- This adjustment shifts the
deceleration portion of the opening cycle away from the
door open limit. Increasing this value will cause the doors to
begin deceleration further from the open limit.

OHS# Open manual 400 Rated RPM of Open High Speed (RPM) - Maximum open speed of the door
speed adjust- motor in RPM motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor that the control
ment value. adjustment. system will attain during an open door cycle.
OLTG# 60 150 3000 Open Linear Target Gain (Rev) - 1/min.

OMS# 0 40 Open high Open Manual Speed (RPM) - Manual open speed of door
speed motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor when the doors
adjustment are opened with the manual push buttons or during the last
value. portion of an open cycle.

RSC 0 0 2000 Re-open Slip Compensation - This is the slip compensation

factor used during a re-open. Available only in Profile 1. Do
Not Change.

22 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

System Adjustments These adjustments will not take effect until the new value is saved to FLASH and the door operator
card is reset.

System Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

DCI – 0 – Discrete Controller Interface -

• Set to 1 for relay controller or discrete signal interface
(modernization jobs).
• Set to 0 for serial controller interface; DCL and DOL
can be selected to input through hall effect or through
the I/O Expansion card. See Electronic Limit Interface
(System Adjustment ELI).

DCM – 1 – DC Motor Control Selection - Set to 1 to select DC motor con-

trol, 0 to select AC motor control.

DOI – 0 – Discrete Operator Interface - Set to 1 to allow door operator

card to accept signals from the expansion interface card. Set
to 0, and the door operator card does not accept signals from
the expansion interface card.

DPL 1 5 5 Door Profile Limit - Number of active profiles.

DRM 1 4 50 Multiple for Slow Clock - Do Not Change.

ELI – 0 – Electronic Limit Interface -
• Set to 1 for DCL and DOL signal inputs from header
hall effect sensors.
• Set to 1 to use UDC card with Linear Door Operator.
• If set to 0 and discrete controller interface (System
Adjustment DCI) is set to 1, then DCL and DOL are
input through the hall effect sensors on the UDC card
(harmonic operator).
• If set to 1 and DCI is set to 1, then DCL and DOL are
input through the I/O Expansion Card.

FSP 250 1000 2500 Sample Frequency - Do Not Change.

LDO – 0 – Linear Door Operator - Set to 1 to select the linear door opera-
tor application, 0 for harmonic application. Must Cycle Power.

LHO – 1 – Left Hand Operation - Set to 1 for left hand operation,

0 for right hand operation. Must Cycle Power.

MAL – 0 – Menu Access Level - Set to 1 for full menu access, 0 for
restricted or limited menu access.

UPM 1 2 50 Multiple for Medium Clock - Do Not Change.

Printed in USA May, 2012 23

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Parameters
CAN Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in factory-level diagnostics. Not for field use.

Mnemonic Command Definition

CEC Transmit and Displays the value of the transmit and receive error counters.
Receive Error
Counters

ESR Error Status Displays the value of the error status register.
Register

GSR Global Status Displays the value of the global status register.
Register

MDER Mailbox Direction/ Displays the value of the mailbox direction/enable register.
Enable Register

RCR Receive Control Displays short test point 1 input variable.

Register

TCR Transmission Displays the value of the transmission control register.

Control Register

Control Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.
MCS = Motion Control State Number - Indicates the current motion
control state shown below.

Motion Control
Description
State Number

4 Direction Reversal

8 Stop Door

9 Hold Closed

10 Nudge Close

11 Manual Open

12 Manual Close

13 Open Door

14 Close Door

24 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Control Parameters
(continued) For the availability of the following parameters, System Adjustment MAL must equal 1.

Mnemonic Command Definition

PIN0 Input Parameter 0 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X Electronic Encoder Phase Encoder Phase X X X X
PIN1 Input Parameter 1 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Hall Limit Hall Limit X X X X X X
PIN4 Input Parameter 4 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LCD Back X VBUS SE X X X X
PIN5 Input Parameter 5 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X FTP Electronic DOL VF/PWMn F/Rn CAN/485n MDC MDO
POUT0 Output Parameter 0 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X X X X X X X X
POUT1 Output Parameter 1 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X X X X X X X X
POUT4 Output Parameter 4 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LCD Back X X X X X X X
POUT5 Output Parameter 5 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X FTP X VF/PWMn X X X X

Diagnostic Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.

Mnemonic Command Definition

TPL1 Test Point 1 Long In Displays long test point 1 input variable.

TPL2 Test Point 2 Long In Displays long test point 2 input variable.

Displays test point 1 voltage out

TPO1 Test Point 1 Out
(above and below 1.5V nominal).

Displays test point 2 voltage out

TPO2 Test Point 2 Out
(above and below 1.5V nominal).

TPS1 Test Point 1 Short In Displays short test point 1 input variable.

TPS2 Test Point 2 Short In Displays short test point 2 input variable.

Printed in USA May, 2012 25

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Door Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.

Mnemonic Command Definition

ADC0 Analog to Digital Displays the value of analog to digital converter number 0,
Converter 0 which is the lwfbk signal (W phase current feedback).

ADC1 Analog to Digital Displays the value of analog to digital converter number 1,
Converter 1 which is the lufbk signal (U phase current feedback).

CSC Close Slip Compen- This value is automatically set. It indicates the amount of belt
sation slip during a close door cycle. This value is in motor revolu-
tions. Do Not Change.

DPID Profile ID Displays current profile.

DTGC Distance To Go Calculated value based on travel and close slip compensation.
Close

DTGO Distance To Go Calculated value based on travel and open slip compensation.
Open

OSC Open Slip Compen- This value is automatically set. It indicates the amount of belt
sation slip during an open door cycle. This value is in motor revolu-
tions. Do Not Change.

POS Door Position This parameter displays the position of the door in motor rev-
olutions from the door close limit (DCL). To use this feature,
move the doors to the desired position and read the number
displayed. Used for setting OBD and SIX.
Minimum = 0
Default = 0
Maximum = TRV

TRV Door Travel This is the travel value learned when a door scan is per-
formed. The value is in motor revolutions

UCV UPID Command Displays the dictated or commanded velocity.

Velocity

UMV UPID Motor Velocity Displays the dictated or commanded motor velocity.

UPE UPID Position Error Displays the difference between calculated position and actual
position.

UTQ UPID Torque Displays the dictated or commanded torque.

UVE UPID Velocity Error Displays the difference between dictated or commanded
velocity and actual velocity.

System Parameters This value is viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.

Mnemonic Command Definition

VER Software Version/Revision Displays the version/revision of door operator software.

26 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Fault Codes Notes:

• IMS 2.2 or greater is required to adjust the LD-03 Door Operator.
• IMS 2.2.0.3 or greater is required to upload door profiles.
• A UDC Door FAST IMS application is available. This application allows communication with the
door operator at the door operator car top box using the orange cable and the 485 communi-
cation link.
• 2000 Series Fault Code = Front Door Operator
3000 Series Fault Code = Rear Door Operator

Fault Codes
Fault Code Description / Causes / Solutions
2036 / 3036 IGBT FAULT - A defective IGBT.
Possible Causes
• This can be caused by an over current condition.
Possible Solutions
• Try to restart the power module. See Restart IGBT Power Module.
• If the fault can not be cleared, verify that the doors are free of binds. If the
doors bind, correct the cause of the bind and restart the power module.
See Restart IGBT Power Module.
• Check for wiring shorts.
• If the fault remains, replace the door card or motor, or check for shorts.
2050 / 3050 ENCODER FAULT - An invalid encoder count.
Possible Causes
• This can be caused by an over current condition.
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the encoder wiring is correct (e.g. phase A and phase B are not
swapped).
2. Verify that encoder is working properly. See Checking Encoder.
3. Make sure the magnetic limits are fastened securely on the cam shaft.
Do not overtighten, the cams are plastic and can be
damaged rather easily.
4. Verify that all of the belts are in good shape and replace (if necessary).
5. Check the belt tension.
Note: Tighten the belt (if necessary). Do not overtighten the drive belt because it
can cause premature motor bearing failure.
6. Verify that the DCL and DOL limits activate at the proper time. If necessary,
readjust the limits and perform a new door scan.
7. If the fault remains, replace the door card.

Printed in USA May, 2012 27

Diagnostics LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Fault Codes (continued)

Fault Code Description / Causes / Solutions (continued)
2051 / 3051 XS BELT SLIP FLT - Excessive Belt Slip.
Possible Solutions
1. Make sure the magnetic limits are fastened securely on the cam shaft.
Do not overtighten, the cams are plastic and can be
damaged rather easily.
2. Verify that all of the belts are in good shape and replace (if necessary).
3. Check the belt tension.
Note: Tighten the belt (if necessary). Do not overtighten the drive belt because it
can cause premature motor bearing failure.
4. Verify that the DCL and DOL limits activate at the proper time. If necessary,
readjust the limits and perform a new door scan.
5. If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2053 / 3053 MOTOR WIRE WRONG - The door timed out, more than 14 seconds, while trying to
power off a limit during scan.
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the motor is wired properly.
2. Verify that Left Hand Operation (LHO) is set correctly.
3. Perform a new door scan.
4. If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2054 / 3054 REV ENCODER FLT
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the encoder wiring is correct (e.g., phase A and phase B are not
swapped).
2. Verify that the encoder is working properly.
3. Perform a new door scan.
4. If the fault remains, replace the door car.
2055 / 3055 TRAVEL FAULT - An invalid door travel value.
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the motor is wired properly.
2. Verify that the system adjustments are set correctly.
3. Perform a new door scan.
4. Verify that the encoder wiring is correct (e.g. phase A and phase B are not
swapped).
5. Verify that encoder is working properly.
6. Verify that the DCL and DOL limits activate at the proper time. If necessary,
readjust the limits and perform a new door scan.
7. If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2056 / 3056 OPEN OS FAULT - Door overspeed in open direction with Open Command.
Possible Solutions
• Verify that the RPM adjustment is set correctly.
2057 / 3057 CLOSE OS FAULT - Door overspeed in close direction with Close Command.
Possible Solutions
• Verify that the RPM adjustment is set correctly.
2058 / 3058 CL RUNAWAY FAULT - Door over speed in close direction with no Close Command.

28 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Fault Codes (continued)

Fault Code Description / Causes / Solutions (continued)
2059 / 3059 BUS POWER FAULT - Loss of BUS supply.
Possible Solutions
• Check fuse F2 on the door card and replace (if necessary).
• Verify the wires for power (wires going to CON11) are securely fastened
and in the correct place.
• If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2060 / 3060 OP RUNAWAY FAULT - Doors overspeed in open direction with no Open Command.
2061 / 3061 OP OV DRIVE FAULT - Doors overdriven in open direction with Open Command.
2062 / 3062 CL OV DRIVE FAULT - Doors overdriven in close direction with Close Command.
2063 / 3063 IFBK FAULT - Failure to regulate the DC current (only) on DCL.
Possible Causes
• An open motor armature circuit.
• A defective board, replace the board.
2064 / 3064 I SERIAL COM FAULT - Failure to receive data from the controller within 5 seconds.
Possible Solutions
• Check for a defective door board.
• Check for a defective controller board.
• Check the wiring.
2065 / 3065 I SCALE FAULT - Current adjustments are out of range.
Possible Solutions
1. Correct the Maximum Drive Current (MDC) and/or the Motor Nameplate
Current (MNC).
2. After making corrections, save and reset the board.
2066 / 3066 DOL DCL FAULT - Both DOL and DCL are on at the same time.
Possible Solutions
1. Adjust the cam and/or magnet.
2. Replace the switch.
3. Replace the board.
2067 / 3067 DOL FAILURE - The Door Open Limit (DOL) sensor failed to operate after 60 sec-
onds.
Possible Solutions
• Adjust the cam and/or magnet.
• Perform a door scan.
• Replace the reed switch.
• Replace the board.
2068 / 3068 DCL FAILURE - The Door Close Limit (DCL) sensor failed to operate after 60 sec-
onds.
Possible Solutions
• Adjust the cam and/or magnet.
• Perform a door scan.
• Replace the reed switch.
• Replace the board.
2069 / 3069 MAX TORQUE FAULT - One or more torque limit adjustments are greater than the
maximum allowed torque.
Possible Solutions
1. Adjust the Open Torque Limit (OTL#) and/or the Close Torque Limit (CTL#).
2. Correct the Maximum Drive Current (MDC) and/or the Motor Nameplate
Current (MNC).
3. After making corrections, save and reset the board.

Printed in USA May, 2012 29

Technical Information LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Technical Information
Record Flight Time This procedure requires two people - one in the car, and one on top of the car.

1. Place the car at the landing where the test will be performed.

2. Place car on Inspection Operation.

3. Change the value of door adjustment SWM1 to 0 (zero).

4. Record the value of door parameter TRV.

5. Use MDC or MDO to move the doors to 3/4 FULLY OPEN position.

6. Record the value of door parameter POS.

7. Subtract the POS value from the TRV value, and enter this value in door adjustment SWM2.

8. Place the car on Automatic Operation. The doors will close.

9. Select the stopwatch flight (SWF) command from the command pull-down menu.

10. Press and hold Door Open (located in the car) to open the doors.

11. Enter a car call for the next landing - Up or Down.

12. Release Door Open. The doors will close, and the car will run to the selected car call. When the
car makes its run and the doors open, the flight time is displayed.
Note: SWM1 and SWM2 values are retained, without saving, until the door operator power is
cycled or the door card is reset.

Upload FLASH Program Software

Upload Generic Software

If the "CHECKSUM FAILURE" Fault has been displayed, the generic software has been corrupted
and must be reloaded. In addition, the door operator profile must be reloaded.

Before uploading a new door profile, Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline dis-
connect. Disconnect the motor leads. If the door profile is loaded with the motor
connected, damage to the board or motor may result.

1. Upload the latest generic software. Contact Field Engineering to obtain the latest software.
Note: If the door card has been replaced, the latest generic software is already uploaded.

2. Upload the appropriate door operator profile (available in IMS).

3. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

4. Remove CON10 from the UDC card to disconnect the door motor leads.

5. Install a UIT (User Interface Tool) on CON2.

6. Use a serial cable with a 4-pin connector adapter to connect a laptop with the HyperTerminal
software to the UDC card at CON6.

30 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Technical Information

Upload Generic Software

(continued)
7. Click Start.

8. Select Programs -> Accessories -> HyperTerminal. The Connection Description window opens.

9. Type in a name, such as "FLASH COMM", select an Icon, and then click OK. The Connect To
window opens.

10. Select the arrow beside Connect Using:, then select COM1 (or the port that will be used) from
the list and click OK. The COM1 Properties window opens.

11. Type in the following properties:

• Bits per second: 38400
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: None
• Stop bits: 1
• Flow Control: Hardware

12. Click OK. This session will be activated.

13. Select File -> Save.

14. Select File -> Properties. The Properties dialog box opens.

15. Select Settings. Verify the following:

• The function, arrow, and ctrl keys act as terminal keys
• The backspace key sends: Ctrl+H
• Emulation: Auto detect
• Telnet terminal ID: ANSI
• Back scroll buffer lines: 500

16. Click ASCII Setup, and verify the following:

• Line delay: 0 milliseconds
• Character delay: 0 milliseconds
• Wrap lines that exceed terminal width is the only item checked

17. Click OK on both dialog boxes.

18. Select the Transfer pull-down menu, then select Send File.

19. Use the Browse Command to find the correct file, click the filename, and then click Open.

20. Install jumper JP3.

21. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

Note: The HyperTerminal displays the status message "ZMODEM READY." If this message is not
shown, replace the door card.

Printed in USA May, 2012 31

Technical Information LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Upload Generic Software

(continued)
22. To start the software upload, click Send in the HyperTerminal screen.

23. When the upload is complete, the UIT displays,

ThyssenKrupp
Universal Door

21. Remove jumper JP3, press Reset, and the UIT displays,
ThyssenKrupp
Universal Door

22. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

23. Remove the cable from CON6.

24. Reconnect CON10.

Upload the Door Operator Profile

Obtain the Correct Door Operator Profile from TKE Manufacturing

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Remove CON10 from the UDC card to disconnect door motor leads.

3. Use a serial cable with a 4-pin connector adapter to connect a laptop with the HyperTerminal
software to the UDC card at CON6.

4. Turn ON the mainline disconnect, and the HyperTerminal window displays,

ZMODEM READY
Version 1.04

a. If this message is not shown, check the following,

• The JP3 jumper is installed properly.
• The cables are installed properly.
• The HyperTerminal settings are correct.

b. If these check out, replace the door card.

Note: If more than one minute goes by after turning ON the mainline disconnect before the
transfer starts, the door card and the HyperTerminal will time out and the HyperTerminal
window displays,
ZMODEM FAILED
No Files Recvd

c. If this occurs, press the reset button on the door card, and the HyperTerminal displays,
ZMODEM READY
Version 1.04

32 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Technical Information

Upload the Door Operator Profile

(continued)
d. If this message is not shown, check the following,
• The JP3 jumper is installed properly.
• The cables are installed properly.
• The HyperTerminal settings are correct.
e. If these check out, replace the door card.

Improper DCM setting can cause damage to the door card and/or motor.

5. Verify the proper DCM setting: Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->ADJ->DCM (1 = DC Motor and 0 = AC

Motor).
6. Turn OFF, Lock, and TAG out the mainline disconnect.
7. Remove the cable from CON6.
8. Re-connect CON10.
9. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.
10. Verify proper door operation.

Determine the Software Version/Revision

1. Begin with the doors FULLY CLOSED.
2. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->MON->SW_v_r and press ENTER.
Note: The UIT will display the software version and revision. The first two digits are the version,
and the second two digits are the revision.
2. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Cycle Mode The Cycle Command (CYC), when activated, will cause the doors to continuously cycle. The delay at
the DOL and the DCL is controlled by the Cycle Delay Time (CDT) Adjustment.
Activate the Cycle Command
1. Scroll to MAIN->CONTROL->CMD->Cycle Mode, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
ENT to ENABLE
CYCLE Mode
2. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
Control/Cmd
Cycle Mode
Note: The doors will start cycling.

Deactivate the Cycle Command

1. Scroll to MAIN->CONTROL->CMD->Cycle Mode, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
ENT to ENABLE
CYCLE Mode
2. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
Control/Cmd
Cycle Mode
Note: The doors will stop cycling.

Printed in USA May, 2012 33

Technical Information LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Restart the IGBT Power Module

The power module may be reset if an overcurrent circuit condition has caused the power module to
send a shutdown signal to the DSP. The power module can only be reset after the fault condition
has been cleared.

1. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->IGBT ERR Rst, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
ENT to Proceed
ESC to Exit

2. To reset the power module, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,
PWM Reenabled

Note: The power module has now been reset.

3. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Shut Down the IGBT Power Module

This command prevents any motor operation including the Manual Door Open (MDO) and Manual
Door Close (MDO) functions.

1. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->Shutdown, and press ENTER.

Note: The UIT display will not change, and the power module has now been shutdown.

2. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Restore Factory Defaults

Each LD-03 Door Operator is shipped with certain parameters and adjustments modified to match
the job condition. The defaults, however, remain the same for all units.

The supplied configuration of the door operator uses adjustment and parameter
values that are different from the default values shown in the Diagnostics Section.
Using the Factory Defaults Command (FDF) could result in a maladjusted or non-
functioning door operator.

1. Begin with the doors FULLY CLOSED.

2. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->FACTORY DEFAULTS, press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

ENT to Restore
ESC to Exit

3. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays,

Values Restored

Note: All adjustments, parameters and commands are now set to the factory defaults.

4. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

34 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Power Up Verification
1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Unplug the connectors from the door card.

3. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

4. Measure AC voltage on the door operator terminal strip across AC1S and AC2. The voltages
should match the voltages in Table 1 (below). If the voltage measured is zero (0), verify the
following:
• The power switch in the door control box is ON.
• The AC1S switch is ON in the swing return.
• The connections in the swing return are good.
• The power is ON at the elevator controller.
• The fuses in the elevator controller are good.
• The connections in elevator controller are good.

5. Measure the AC voltage across AC1S and ACG.

a. If the voltage is in range of 0 and 80 VAC, measure AC2 to ACG.
b. If AC2 to ACG is in range of 103 and 126 VAC, AC1S and AC2 have been reversed;
Reverse AC1S and AC2.

6. With the system still powered up, measure the DC voltages on the door operator terminal strip
across P24 and G24. The voltages should match the voltages in Table 1. If the voltage
measured is zero (0), verify the following:
• The P24 switch in the swing return is ON.
• The connections in the swing return are good.
• The power is ON at the elevator controller.
• The fuses in the elevator controller are good.
• The connections in the elevator controller are good.

Voltage Meter Setting Positive Meter Probe Negative Meter Probe Voltage Measured

AC1S Volts AC AC1S terminal 6 AC2 terminal 5 120 VAC

AC1S Volts AC AC1S terminal 6 ACG terminal 4 120 VAC

AC2 Volts AC AC2 terminal 5 ACG terminal 4 0 VAC

P24 Volts DC P24 terminal 17 G24 terminal 20 24 VDC

Table 1 - Voltage Settings

Printed in USA May, 2012 35

Troubleshooting LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

LED Verification
1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect. Reconnect the connectors on the door
card (located inside the door operator).

2. Make sure the doors are in the FULLY CLOSED position.

3. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

4. Verify that the VBUS and WD LEDs are ON. See Figure 4 on page 37.
Note: If the VBUS or the WD LED does not come ON, see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 39.

5. Verify that the doors are still in the FULLY CLOSED position, and that the DCL LED is ON.

6. Turn OFF the toggle switch (located in the door operator).

7. Manually move the doors to the FULLY OPEN position.

8. Turn ON the toggle switch.

9. With the doors in the FULLY OPEN position, verify that the DOL LED is ON.

Power Supplies Check

1. Turn the UDC card ON and measure the voltages (from the table, Figure 4 on page 37) at
the specified points on the door card. The voltage for each measurement should be in the
range noted.

When checking door card power supplies, take great care to avoid electrical shock
and/or damage to the door card.

The power supply for the door motor is named V-Buss. The voltage for this power rail is
generated from the incoming 115 VAC, and the 115 VAC is rectified and filtered to produce
the DC power supply. A VBUS LED is on the card.

2. The VBUS LED will indicate whether this power supply is good,

• If the VBUS LED is not ON, see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 39.
• If 115 VAC is available at CON11, pins 1 and 2, and the VBUS LED is not ON,
replace the door operator card.

36 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting

LED Verification and Power Supplies Check

(continued)

GND-ISO Test Point DGND P3.3 Reset Magnetic

P5-ISO Test Point Test Point Test Point Button Sensor
P15-ISO Test Point

Fuse F2 VBUS JP1 Watchdog

LED LED MDO
Fuse F3 JP6 MDC Button
AGND P3.3A P5 Fuse
Test Test Test JP2 F1 Button
Point Point Point JP3, JP4, JP5 Magnetic
Sensor

Power Supply Measurement Locations Acceptable Voltage Range (VDC)

P5 P5 Test Point to DGND Test Point 4.875 to 5.125

P3.3 P3.3 Test Point to DGND Test Point 3.2 to 3.37

P3.3A P3.3A Test Point to AGND Test Point 3.2 to 3.4

P5_ISO P5_ISO Test Point to GND_ISO Test Point 4.5 to 5.5

P15_ISO P15_ISO Test Point to GND_ISO Test Point 14.625 to 15.375

Figure 4 - Door Card Power Supply Check

Printed in USA May, 2012 37

Troubleshooting LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Checking the Encoder

Perform this check to ensure that the encoder signals are working properly.

1. Before conducting this test, verify that fuse F1 on the door card is good.

2. Use a digital multimeter, and measure the voltage across fuse F1,
• If the voltage reads higher than 1.5 volts, replace the fuse.
• If the voltage reads below 1.5 volts, the fuse is good.

The best way to check the encoder signals is with an oscilloscope. If an oscilloscope is not avail-
able, use the digital multimeter method.

Oscilloscope Method

Required tool: An oscilloscope with two working channels.

1. Set the vertical channel to 5V/div.

2. Set the horizontal channel to 1uS/div.

3. Connect the ground leads for both channels to the GND test point.

4. Connect the channel A probe to CON8-2 (PHA).

5. Connect the channel B probe to CON8-3 (PHB).

6. Slowly rotate, by hand, the door motor.

Note: PHA and PHB should be 90 degrees out-of-phase, and toggle between 0 to 1 and 4.5 to 5
volts.
If both signals, PHA and PHB, toggle as they should then the encoder is working. The door card
may need replacing.

Digital Multimeter Method

Required tool: A digital multimeter set to measure DC volts.

1. Connect the negative lead to the GND test point, and the positive lead to CON8-2 (PHA).

2. Slowly rotate, by hand, the door motor.

Note: The digital multimeter display should toggle between less than 1 volt and greater than 4
volts.
3. Connect the negative lead to the GND test point, and the positive lead to CON8-3 (PHB).

4. Slowly rotate, by hand, the door motor.

Note: The digital multimeter display should toggle between less than 1 volt and greater than 4
volts.
If both signals, PHA and PHB, toggle as they should then the encoder is working. The door card
may need replacing.

38 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting Guide

Troubleshooting Guide
For assistance, please call 1-866-HELP-TKE.

Problem Possible Causes or Solutions

Doors Run the Opposite Direction 1. Change the hand of the operator by changing the LHO adjustment.
When First Powered Up
2. To verify that the change corrected the problem, press MDO to verify that the doors
move in the open direction.
3. Press MDC to verify that the doors move in the close direction.
4. Save this adjustment change to FLASH.

Door Motor Vibrates When Trying to 1. Verify that the proper motor type is selected in the DCM adjustment.
Move the Door
2. Verify that the motor leads are connected per the Motor Connections Chart below.
Note: The motor and encoder connections must match what is shown in the charts
below. If any of these connections are not correct, unstable operation will result.

Do not change motor or encoder connections to change door direction. To

change door direction, use the LHO Adjustment.
3. Verify that the encoder is connected per the Encoder Connections Chart below.
4. Verify 5 VDC to encoder connector.
• Use a digital multimeter to measure the voltage from CON8-1 to CON8-4. Place
the red probe on CON8-1 and the black probe on CON8-4.
• If the voltage reads less than 4.5 volts, check the fuse.
• If the voltage reads above 4.5 volts, check the encoder signals.
5. Verify that the encoder power fuse F1 on the door card is good.
6. Verify that the encoder works.

Motor Connections

Connector-Pin VFD Cable AC Motor DC Motor

Wire No. Leads Leads

CON10-2 1 1 no connect

CON10-4 2 2 Black

CON10-3 3 3 Red

GND Screw Green Green no connect

Encoder Connections
Connector-Pin Wire Color Signal

CON8-1 Red P5

CON8-2 White PHA

CON8-3 Green PHB

CON8-4 Black GND

Printed in USA May, 2012 39

Troubleshooting Guide LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Problem (continued) Possible Causes or Solutions

Doors Will Not Open to FULLY OPEN 1. Verify that the DOL limit is adjusted properly, and that the DOL LED comes ON when
Position the magnet is aligned with the hall-effect sensor.
2. Verify that the mechanical stop is set properly and is not interfering with the open
cycle.
3. Verify that the drive arms are setup and aligned properly.

Doors Will Not Close to FULLY 1. Verify that the DCL limit is adjusted properly, and that the DCL LED comes ON when
CLOSED Position the magnet is aligned with the hall-effect sensor.
2. Verify that the mechanical stop is set properly and is not interfering with the close
cycle.
3. Verify that the drive arms are setup and aligned properly.

VBUS LED Will Not Light 1. Verify that the power switch in the operator is in the ON position.
2. Check for 115VAC across pins 1 and 2 of CON11.
3. Check fuse F2 on the door card; Replace if necessary.
4. Verify that the wires for power (those going to CON11) are securely fastened and in
the correct place.

WD LED Will Not Light 1. Verify that power switch in operator that is located on the PC card shelf is in the ON
position.
2. Check fuse F3 on the door card; Replace if necessary.
3. Verify that the wires for power (those going to CON11) are securely fastened and in
the correct place.

DCL or DOL LED Will Not Light Note: The DCL or DOL LEDs will not light unless the magnet cam is aligned with the hall-
effect sensor on the end of the card.
1. Verify proper alignment of the magnetic limit cam with the hall-effect sensor. If not
aligned properly, adjust the magnetic limit cam on the door operator cam shaft.
2. Verify that the DCI, ELI, and LDO adjustments are all set to 0 (zero).
3. Verify that the power switch in the operator is in the ON position.
4. Check fuse F3 on the door card; Replace if necessary.
5. Verify that the wires for power (those going to CON11) are securely fastened and in
the correct place.

Doors Will Not Reverse on Safety Edge 1. Verify that the wires for safety edge signal are securely fastened and in the correct
Activation connector. The safety edge signal wire goes to CON9-5 on the UDC.
2. Verify that the SE signal return wire (G24) is connected to CON9-6.
3. Verify that the signal is getting to the UDC card.
a. Use a digital multimeter to place the black probe on CON9-6 and the red probe on
CON9-5.
b. Activate the safety edge, and verify that the digital multimeter reads less than 2
volts. The safety edge input is active low.
• If the voltage at CON9 is greater than 2 volts, then the wiring in the safety edge enclo-
sure will have to be changed so that the signal goes low when an obstruction is in the
doorway.
• Setting IBM4 to 0 will invert the active state for the SE Input.

MDO Starts to Open Doors, But Doors Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDO is overridden by a close door
Reclose command from the elevator controller.

MDC Starts to Close Doors, But Doors Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDC is overridden by a open door
Reopen command from the elevator controller, or by an active SE signal.

40 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting Guide

Problem (continued) Possible Causes or Solutions

Doors Will Not Set Up 1. Verify that the motor moves the door in the correct direction when MDC or MDO are
pushed.
2. Verify that the encoder is connected properly.
3. Verify 5 VDC to the encoder connector.
4. Use a digital multimeter to measure the voltage from CON8-1 to CON8-4. Place the
red probe on CON8-1, and the black probe on CON8-4.
• If the voltage reads less than 4.5 volts, check the fuse.
• If the voltage reads above 4.5 volts, check the encoder signals.
5. Verify that the encoder power fuse F1 on the door card is good.
6. Verify that the encoder works.

Doors Will Not Close After Opening, or 1. Verify that the SE signal is not active; The SE signal is active low.
Doors Open Without Command and
2. Use a digital multimeter to place the black probe on CON9-6 and the red probe on
Will Not Close
CON9-5.
3. Activate the safety edge, and verify that the digital multimeter reads less than 2 volts.
Note: If the voltage at the CON9 is greater than 2 volts then the wiring in the safety
edge enclosure will have to be changed so that the signal goes low when an
obstruction is in the door way.

Doors Will Not Move When MDO or 1. Verify that there are no mechanical restrictions or binds.
MDC Is Pushed
2. Verify that the IGBT has not been shut down due to a fault. Check faults and follow the
instructions for the particular faults that are listed. If the fault listed is the
IGBT_FAULT, reset the IGBT power module.
3. If MDO does not work:
a. Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDO is overridden by a close
door command from the elevator controller.
b. Verify that the DOL limit is not active. If it is active, the doors will not open. If on the
DOL limit, move the doors off of the open limit and verify that MDO does cause the
doors to open.
4. Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDC is overridden by an open door
command from the elevator controller, or by an active SE signal.
5. If MDC does not work:
a. Verify that the DCL limit is not active. If it is active, the doors will not close. If on the
DCL limit, move the doors off of the close limit and verify that MDC does cause the
doors to open.
6. Verify that VBUS LED is ON.
7. Verify that WD LED is ON.
8. Power down the card, remove the connector to the motor, and power up the card.
9. Connect a voltmeter to the motor output pins; be very careful not to short the pins
together.
10. Press MDO or MDC, and verify that there is voltage on the motor output pins.
a. If voltage is present, check the motor wiring. If wiring is good, the motor may be
bad.
b. If no voltage is present, verify that the correct door operator profile is loaded for the
type of door and motor being used. If the correct door operator profile is loaded
and the IGBT is not faulted out, the card may be damaged.

Printed in USA May, 2012 41

Maintenance LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Maintenance
Change the Door Operator Belt (Single Speed)
1. Turn the 3/8” adjustment screw (located between the idler base and the push bar) clockwise
into the idler base to loosen it. See Figure 5 for all steps in this procedure.
2. Loosen the idler base by loosening the two 3/8” bolts on either end of the idler base.
3. Push the idler base toward the push bar.
4. Remove the two #10 hex socket cap screws in the top belt clamp, and remove the top belt
clamp.
5. Remove the door operator belt.
6. Measure and cut the new belt to the proper length (if required).

Opening Width Belt Length

36 inches 98 inches
42 inches 110 inches

7. Use the top belt clamp as a template and match drill two 3/16” holes, one in each end of the
belt.
8. Place the belt into position and use the two #10 hex socket cap screws to reinstall the top belt
clamp.
9. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise from the idler base to tighten the belt for
acceptable belt tension.
10. Tighten the two 3/8" bolts on either end of the idler base.

Idler base 3/8” Adjustment Screw Push Bar

3/
Idler Base
8 Hex Head 3 / Adjustment
8
Cap Screws (2) Screw (between idler
base and push bar)

Push Bar
3/8” Bolts (2)
Top Belt #10 Hex Socket
Clamp (see Cap Screw (2)
Detail A)
Idler Pulley
Door
Top Belt
Belt Clamp Operator Clamp
Belt
#10 Hex
Socket Cap
Screw (2)
(See Detail A) Door
Operator
Belt

Belt clamp Match Drill Two (2) 3/16”

Holes in the Belt Ends
Detail A

Figure 5 - Change Single Speed Door Operator Belt

42 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Maintenance

Change the Door Operator Belt (Center Opening)

1. Turn the 3/8” adjustment screw (located between the idler base and the push bar) clockwise
into the idler base to loosen it. See Figure 6 for all steps in this procedure.
2. Loosen the idler base by loosening the two 3/8” bolts on either end of the idler base.
3. Push the idler base toward the push bar.
4. Remove the two #10 hex socket cap screws in the top belt clamp, and remove the top belt
clamp.
5. Remove the door operator belt.
6. Measure and cut the new belt to the proper length (if required).

Opening Width Belt Length

42 inches 151 inches

7. Use the top belt clamp as a template and match drill two 3/16” holes, one in each end of the
belt.
8. Place the belt into position, and use the two #10 hex socket cap screws to reinstall the top belt
clamp.
9. Use four #10 hex socket cap screws to reinstall the center opening belt clamp on the belt brace
clamp.
10. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise from the idler base to tighten the belt for
acceptable belt tension.
11. Tighten the two 3/8" bolts on either end of the idler base.

3/
Idler Base #10 Hex Socket
8 Hex Head 3/ Adjustment
8 Cap Screw (2)
Cap Screws (2) Screw (Between Idler
Base and Push Bar)

Door
Push Bar Top Belt
Operator
Clamp
Belt
Top Belt
Clamp (See
Detail A)
Idler Pulley

Belt Clamp
Belt Clamp Match Drill Two
#10 Hex (2) 3/16” Holes in
Socket Cap Belt Ends
Screw (2) Door
(See Detail A) Operator Belt Detail A

Idler Base 3/8” Adjustment Screw #10 Hex

Push Bar Socket Cap
Screw (4)

Belt Brace
Clamp Door
Operator
Belt
Center
Opening Belt
3/8” Bolts (2) Clamp

Figure 6 - Change Center Opening Door Operator Belt

Printed in USA May, 2012 43

Replacement Parts LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

Replacement Parts
1504BK Single Speed Left and Right Hand Assemblies

5
3

6
7
8
9

11

10

44 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Replacement Parts

1504BK Single Speed Left and Right Hand Assemblies

(continued)

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 186CP Box Assembly, Car Top

2 596DB2 Mount, Motor
3 677AG1 Pulley, Assembly, Idler
4 9817920 590DA2 Motor, Assembly, Belt Pulley
5 125AD2 Belt, Drive, 36" Opening
125AD3 Belt, Drive, 42" Opening
6 171EP3 Switch Assembly, Gate, Single Speed
7 69865 Cam Assembly, Safety Edge Pickup
8 9834526 596CP1 Mount, Magnetic Sensor
9 286AT1 Conduit, Flexible, Aluminum, .375 x 15.00
10 232DC001 Cap, Header, End
11 860AD1 Track, Door, Car
12 461CJ1 Hanger Assembly, Car, LH, 36" Opening
461CJ2 Hanger Assembly, Car, LH, 42" Opening
461CJ4 Hanger Assembly, Car, RH, 36" Opening
461CJ5 Hanger Assembly, Car, RH, 42" Opening

(Parts not shown/not labeled in drawing)

13 461AJ1 Hanger, Pad Button, #4 Stainless Steel
461AJ4 Hanger, Pad Button, #8 Stainless Steel
461AJ3 Hanger, Pad Button, #4 Bronze
461AJ5 Hanger, Pad Button, #8 Bronze
14 320JP3 Cover, Support, Car Top Box
15 717CJ2 O-Ring, 0.062" x 0.750" (ID) x 0.875" (OD)
16 448AB1 Grommet, Rubber, 1.062 Hole, .875 (ID)
17 9952172 146693 Spacer, Track
18 9801121 40114 Spacer, Interlock
19 123794 Support, Cord, Safety Edge
20 9811291 41129 Clip, Cable, Electrical
21 274CF1 Clamp, Belt
22 196ALE1 Bracket, Cam Pickup
23 196ALH2 Bracket, Weldment, Idler Pulley Adjustment
24 286AG6 Conduit, Connector, Screw-in, .375 Zinc, Flex

Printed in USA May, 2012 45

Replacement Parts LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

1504BL Center Opening Assemblies

4
1

2
6

8
11
3

12

10

46 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Replacement Parts

1504BL Center Opening Assemblies

(continued)
ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 186CP Box Assembly, Car Top

2 596DB2 Mount, Motor
3 677AG1 Pulley, Assembly, Idler
4 9817920 590DA2 Motor Assembly, Belt Pulley
5 125AD10 Belt, Drive, 36" Opening
125AD11 Belt, Drive, 42" Opening
125AD12 Belt, Drive, 48" Opening
6 171EP3 Switch Assembly, Gate
7 69865 Cam Assembly, Safety Edge Pickup
8 9834526 596CP1 Mount, Magnetic Sensor
9 286AT1 Conduit, Flexible, Aluminum, .375 x 15.00
10 232DC001 Cap, Header, End
11 127035 Track, Door, Car
12 461CK1 Hanger Assembly, Car, LH, 36" Opening
461CK2 Hanger Assembly, Car, LH, 42" Opening
461CK4 Hanger Assembly, Car, LH, 48" Opening
461CL1 Hanger Assembly, Car, RH, 36" Opening
461CL2 Hanger Assembly, Car, RH, 42" Opening
461CL4 Hanger Assembly, Car, RH, 48" Opening

(Parts not shown/not labeled in drawing)

13 461AJ1 Hanger, Pad Button, #4 Stainless Steel
461AJ4 Hanger, Pad Button, #8 Stainless Steel
461AJ3 Hanger, Pad Button, #4 Bronze
461AJ5 Hanger, Pad Button, #8 Bronze
14 274CF1 Clamp, Belt
15 274CH1 Clamp, Belt, CO
16 196AJT1 Bracket, Cam Pickup Mounting
17 166AP1 Catch Assembly, Safety
18 717CJ2 O-Ring, 0.062" x 0.750" (ID) x 0.875" (OD)
19 448AB1 Grommet, Rubber, 1.062 Hole, .875 (ID)
20 9952172 146693 Spacer, Track
21 9801121 40114 Spacer, Interlock
22 123794 Support, Cord, Safety Edge
23 9811291 41129 Clip, Cable, Electrical
24 196ALH2 Bracket, Weldment, Idler Pulley Adjustment
25 286AG6 Conduit, Connector, Screw-in, .375 Zinc, Flex

Printed in USA May, 2012 47

Replacement Parts LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

1504BV 2-Speed Left and Right Hand Assemblies

1
4

5
6 3
9

11 8

12 13

10
7

48 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Replacement Parts

1504BV 2-Speed Left and Right Hand Assemblies

(continued)
ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 186CP Box Assembly, Car Top

2 596FE001 Mount, Motor
3 677AG1 Pulley, Assembly, Idler
4 9817920 590DA2 Motor Assembly, Belt Pulley
5 125AD7 Belt, Drive, 36" Opening
125AD8 Belt, Drive, 48" Opening
125AD9 Belt, Drive, 54" Opening
6 171EP3 Switch Assembly, Gate
7 69865 Cam Assembly, Safety Edge Pickup
8 9834526 596CP1 Mount, Magnetic Sensor
9 286AT1 Conduit, Flexible, Aluminum, .375 x 15.00
10 232DC001 Cap, Header, End
11 125908 Track, Door, Rolled, Formed
12 860AF1 Track Door, Solid
13 461CE1 Hanger Assembly, Car, Fast Door, RH, 36" Opening
461CE2 Hanger Assembly, Car, Fast Door, RH, 48" Opening
461CE3 Hanger Assembly, Car, Fast Door, RH, 54" Opening
461CE5 Hanger Assembly, Car, Fast Door, LH, 36" Opening
461CE6 Hanger Assembly, Car, Fast Door, LH, 48" Opening
461CE7 Hanger Assembly, Car, Fast Door, LH, 54" Opening
461CF1 Hanger Assembly, Car, Slow Door, RH, 36" Opening
461CF2 Hanger Assembly, Car, Slow Door, RH, 48" Opening
461CF3 Hanger Assembly, Car, Slow Door, RH, 54" Opening
461CF5 Hanger Assembly, Car, Slow Door, LH, 36" Opening
461CF6 Hanger Assembly, Car, Slow Door, LH, 48" Opening
461CF7 Hanger Assembly, Car, Slow Door, LH, 54" Opening

(Parts not shown/not labeled in drawing)

14 461AJ1 Hanger, Pad Button, #4 Stainless Steel

461AJ4 Hanger, Pad Button, #8 Stainless Steel
461AJ3 Hanger, Pad Button, #4 Bronze
461AJ5 Hanger, Pad Button, #8 Bronze
15 274CF1 Clamp, Belt
16 196AJB3 Bracket, Cam Pickup
17 717CJ2 O-Ring, 0.062" x 0.750" (ID) x 0.875" (OD)
18 448AB1 Grommet, Rubber, 1.062 Hole, .875 (ID)
19 9952172 146693 Spacer, Track
20 123794 Support, Cord, Safety Edge
21 9811291 41129 Clip, Cable, Electrical
22 196ALH2 Bracket, Weldment, Idler Pulley Adjustment
23 286AG6 Conduit, Connector, Screw-in, .375 Zinc, Flex

Printed in USA May, 2012 49

Replacement Parts LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

186CP Car Top Box

7 8

3 1

4 2 5

Right Hand View, Top Cover Removed

50 Vertical Express
LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT Replacement Parts

186CP Car Top Box

(continued)
ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 9863877 6300PA3 PCB Assy, Universal Door Controller (UDC)

2 9765841 6300WK1 PCB Assembly, SE Interface

3 9876954 6300HL1 PCB Assembly, VVVF User Interface Tool (UIT)

4 462LD1 Harness Assy, Linear Door Operator, Front

462LD2 Harness Assy, Linear Door Operator, Rear

462MG1 Harness Assy, Linear Door Operator, Cimarron

462LE1 Harness Assy, DK Encoder, LD-03

462LD3 Harness Assy, Linear Door Operator, Front, Extended

462LD4 Harness Assy, Linear Door Operator, Rear, Extended

5 9782527 108252 Audible, Emergency Alarm Bell

9736254 177AM1 Audible, Signal Alarm Horn, 12V

6 687BR1 Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

7 9781821 78182 Socket, Light

8 109789 Guard, Lamp

9 9875412 850RW1 Tools, Magnetic-Based Trouble Light

(Parts not shown/not labeled in drawing)

10 9743637 76703 Switch, Light, Snap-in

11 9748632 127195 Guard, Pushbutton

12 9739555 127196 Switch, Pushbutton

13 9810985 109888 Switch Assembly, Inspection

9810857 108150 Switch Assembly, Run-Stop

14 286AH37 NM Connector, Zinc Die Cast, .500

Printed in USA May, 2012 51

Replacement Parts LD-03 Linear Door Operator with UIT

This page
intentionally
left blank.

52 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator
with UIT
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Contents

HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Contents
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Arrival of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Mechanical Installation and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Prepare the Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Mounting the Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting the Stroke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adjusting the Drive Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting the Mechanical Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Electronic Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Limit Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Direction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Auto Null . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Profile Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Closing Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Closing Kinetic Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Set the Gate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Final Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The User Interface Tool (UIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Overview of Adjustments, Parameters, and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The UIT Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Printed in USA May, 2012 1

Contents HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Contents
(continued)

Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Record Flight Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Upload FLASH Program Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Determine the Software Version/Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cycle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Restart the IGBT Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Shut Down the IGBT Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Restore Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Up Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
LED Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Power Supplies Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Checking the Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment
safety information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

Printed in USA May, 2012 3

HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Safety Precautions

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety
information on installation and service.

4 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the Vertical Express Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Arrival of Equipment Receiving

Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage. Promptly report all visible damage to the
carrier. All shipping damage claims must be filed with the carrier.

Storing

During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator job site, precautions should be taken to protect
the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture, and temperature extremes.

Handling

The door operator is packaged in a cardboard box and crated. If possible, leave completely crated
when handling.

Printed in USA May, 2012 5

HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Safety Precautions

This page
intentionally
left blank.

6 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Overview

Overview
The following is a list of the major components of a door operator including a description of
their functions, an overview of some of the critical adjustments, and maintenance information.
See Figure 1 on page 8.

• Adjustable Arm - The arm mounted to the drive wheel is used to change the amount
of linear door movement or stroke.
• Connecting Arm - Connects the drive arm to the door panel.
• Door Operator Support - A metal plate welded to the header. The door operator is
mounted to the door operator support with four bolts through the four mounting slots of
the door operator.
• Drive Arm - The linkage connected between the drive arm support and the connecting
arm.
• Drive Arm Support - The bracket containing two holes is located on top of the door
operator. The drive arm should be connected to the right-hand hole, looking from the
hatch, at the front of the door operator.
• Drive Wheel - A metal sheave containing a slotted cam surface. The adjustable arm
mounts to the drive wheel and is adjusted in the slotted cam surface. The drive wheel is
driven by the jack shaft sheave using 3 V belts.
To change the linear door travel or stroke, move the adjustable arm:
• Closer to the center of the drive wheel = less door travel for the same amount of wheel
rotation.
• Further from the center of the drive wheel = more door travel for the same amount of
wheel rotation.

• Idler Arm - An adjustable arm mounted to the front of the door operator which controls the
tension of the 3 V belts between the jack shaft sheave and the drive wheel.
• Intermediate Arm - Adjustable linkage connected between the drive wheel adjustable arm
and the pivot arm. The connection at the pivot arm is adjustable to control the length of the
intermediate arm.
• Mechanical Stops - Metal L brackets mounted to the front of the door operator. The stops
have slots to adjust the amount of drive wheel rotation and, once positioned, they limit the
physical rotation of the drive wheel.
• Motor - 115V or 230V DC Motor
• Pivot Arm - Connects the drive arm to the intermediate arm and provides an adjustment
for the length of the intermediate arm.
• Sheave, Jack Shaft - A spoked sheave driven by the door operator motor with a single
V belt. The motor sheave drives the jack shaft sheave which drives the drive wheel.
• Sheave, Motor - A sheave attached directly to the door operator motor shaft.
• Support Strut - Unistrut legs on the rear of the door operator which are used to secure the
rear of the operator to the car top, and also to plumb the face of the drive wheel.

Printed in USA May, 2012 7

Mechanical Installation and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Overview
(continued)
Motor Drive Arm Support
Drive Arm

Mechanical Stops

Drive Wheel

Intermediate Arm Jack Shaft Sheave

Adjustable Arm
Pivot Arm

Connecting Arm

Figure 1 - Single Speed Door Operator

Mechanical Installation and Adjustment

Prepare the Door Operator
Note: Installation and adjustment of the door operator is best accomplished from an upper
landing. Place the car top at a comfortable working height, and use the landing as a
working platform.

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Remove the door operator from the shipping carton and crate. Locate and store the bag of
parts.

3. Remove the cover from the rear of the operator by loosening the two top screws and the two
lower rear screws.

4. Inspect the wiring. Make sure all connections are secure.

5. Loosen the bolts holding the mechanical stops.

6. While observing the shaft containing the cams (inside the operator), rotate the drive wheel.

8 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Mechanical Installation and Adjustment

Mechanical Installation and Adjustment

(continued)
7. Check and adjust, as necessary, the tension of the 3 Vee belts between the drive wheel and the
jack shaft sheave. See Figure 2.

a. Loosen the two bolts on the idler arm, and turn the locknut on the adjustment screw
(located at the end of the idler arm).
b. Securely tighten the idler arm bolts and the locknut.

Idler Arm

Locknut

Figure 2 - Locknut Adjustment Screw

8. Check and adjust as necessary the tension on the single V belt between the motor sheave and
jack shaft sheave:

a. Loosen the four motor mounting bolts and position the motor.
b. Securely tighten the motor mounting bolts.

Mounting the Door Operator - See Figure 3.

1. Lift the door operator to the car top. Center the operator in the slots of the door operator
support. Install the four bolts and tighten. See Detail A.
Note: The operator may require repositioning within the slots to achieve the correct drive arm-to-
connecting arm relationship with the doors fully open. The hole in the drive arm support
bracket may also be used to achieve this relationship. For more details, see Figure 5 on
page 13.

2. Attach the drive arm to the right hand hole in the drive arm support, as you look at the front of
the operator, in the drive arm support. See Detail B.

3. Attach the connecting arm to the door panel. See Detail C.

4. Install the rear support. See Detail D.

a. Attach the rear foot mount to the car top. Use the support clips to attach the strut to the
mount.
b. With a level, plumb the face of the drive wheel. Loosen the cap screws inside the door
operator frame and adjust the strut nuts up or down in the support struts (as needed).
c. Tighten all bolts securely.

Printed in USA May, 2012 9

Mechanical Installation and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Mounting the Door Operator

(continued)

5. With a level, check the drive arm for plumb. If necessary, position the drive arm from the
door with no more than 3/8" (10mm) flat washers.

Drive Arm Support

Left-hand Right-hand
Drive Arm

Drive
Wheel
Drive
Wheel

Support Support
Connecting
Arm

3/
8 Flat Bearing Spacer Rear
Drive Washers Support
Door Arm Bearing Strut
Operator Door Spacer
Support Operator
Frame Rear
Drive Arm
Door Support
Support
Panel Clip

Connecting
Arm

Detail A Detail B Detail C Detail D

Figure 3 - Mounting the Door Operator

Setting the Stroke

Notes:

• The two cap screws securing the intermediate arm to the pivot arm should be loose when
setting the stroke.

• Fully Open Position - The point where the doors are flush with or slightly recessed behind
the open door jamb.

• Fully Closed Position - The point where the leading edge of the door contacts the door
jamb, or in the case of center opening doors, the point where the two leading edges of the
doors contact.

10 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Mechanical Installation and Adjustment

Setting the Stroke

(continued)
1. Place the doors in the fully open position.

2. Measure the distance from B to C and record this measurement as Door Open (DO). See
Figure 4.

3. Place the doors in the fully closed position.

4. Measure the distance from B to C and record this measurement as Door Closed (DC).
See Figure 4.

5. Calculate the stroke using the following formula:

DO – DC 1
STROKE = ----------------------- + --- “
2 8

6. Loosen the two cap screws in the adjustable arm.

7. Move the adjustable arm in the circular slot of the drive wheel so that the distance from A to B
is equal to the calculated stroke length. See Figure 4.

8. Tighten the two cap screws in the adjustable arm.

Door
Door
Open C Stroke
B Close
C B
B A

Figure 4 - Door Operator Stroke

Adjusting the Drive Arms

See Figure 5 on page 13 for all steps in this procedure.

1. Place the doors in the fully open position.

2. Slide the pivot arm to the end of the slot in the intermediate arm so that the hole in the bearing
is exposed.

3. Attach the pivot arm to the intermediate arm through the bearing with a 3/8" (10mm) flathead
socket cap screw.
Note: Ensure that the spacer plate is between the two arms, the bearing spacer is installed, and
that the doors are still in the fully open position.

Printed in USA May, 2012 11

Mechanical Installation and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Adjusting the Drive Arms

(continued)
4. Align the drive arm and connecting arm in a straight line. Vice grips may be used to hold these
two arms in alignment.

5. Maintain the doors in fully open position, and rotate the drive wheel until all three points A, B,
and C are in a straight line.

6. Tighten the two cap screws attaching the pivot arm to the intermediate arm.

7. Use a pencil to trace a line along both sides of the adjustable arm on the drive wheel.
Note: This will be the reference mark in the event that the stroke requires further adjustment.

8. Remove the vice grips and move the doors to the fully closed position.
Note: If the doors will not fully close: loosen the two cap screws in the adjustable arm, and
reposition the arm toward the outside of the drive wheel in small increments of 1/8"
(3mm).
9. Measure the distance from the top of the intermediate arm to the center of the drive wheel. The
correct distance for this measurement is 1/2" (13mm) to 1 1/2" (38mm). Ensure that the doors
can be opened from the inside per local code. The smaller this diameter, the more difficult it will
be to pull the car doors open manually.

If the measurement is correct - Securely tighten the cap screws in the adjustable arm and the
cap screws connecting the intermediate arm to the pivot arm. Proceed to Setting the Mechani-
cal Stops.

If the measurement is less than 1/2" (13mm) - Loosen the two cap screws in the adjustable
arm. Reposition the arm toward the outside of the drive wheel and tighten the two cap screws.

If the measurement is more than 1 1/2" (38mm) - Loosen the two cap screws in the adjustable
arm. Reposition toward the center of the drive wheel and tighten the two cap screws.

a. Move the doors to the fully open position, and check the alignment of the connecting arm
and the three points A, B, and C.

b. Move the doors to the fully closed position, and measure the distance from the top of the
intermediate arm to the center of the drive wheel.

c. If these measurements are not correct, repeat the adjustment of the arm until the correct
operation and measurement is obtained.
Note: Once the stroke has been properly adjusted, check to ensure that the two cap screws in
the adjustable arm and the two cap screws holding the pivot arm to the intermediate arm
are securely tightened.

12 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Mechanical Installation and Adjustment

Adjusting the Drive Arms

(continued)

A C
B Adjustable
Point B is center Intermediate
of Drive Wheel. Spacer Arm
Plate

Pivot
Arm

Straight line Drive

through points Arm
B, A, and C.

Bearing
Spacer

Drive Arm and Connecting Arm in straight line.

Doors Fully Open

A B C

This is the distance between

top of intermediate arm and
center of the drive wheel
(point B).

1/2" to 1 1/2"
(13mm to 38mm)

Doors Fully Closed

Figure 5 - Adjusting the Drive Arms

Setting the Mechanical Stops

1. Move the doors to the fully open position.

2. Position the open mechanical stop 1/8" (3mm) from the inside surface of the drive wheel, and
tighten the bolt securely.

3. Move the doors to the fully closed position.

4. Position the closed mechanical stop 1/8" (3mm) from the inside surface of the drive wheel, and
tighten the bolt securely.

Printed in USA May, 2012 13

Electronic Setup and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Electronic Setup and Adjustment

The configuration done by manufacturing uses adjustment and parameter values
that are different from the default values shown in the Diagnostics section.

Preparation 1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Route the door operator harness to the swing return, and connect the harness connectors to
the appropriate connectors on the car wiring interface card.

3. If required, connect the safety edge cables to the safety edge box.
Note: On jobs with both front and rear doors, adjust front and rear door operators separately.

4. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

5. Verify that the VBUS and WD LEDs on the door card are ON.
Note: If LEDs are not ON, refer to the Troubleshooting section.

Limit Setting 1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Manually move the door to the fully closed position, noting which direction the cam shaft
rotates. See Figure 6.

3. Loosen DCL and DOL cams, and rotate them until their magnets face the door card.

4. Loosen the door card mounting bracket screws.

5. Slide the door card and bracket toward or away from the DCL and DOL cams until there is 1/8"
between the card and the cams. The card MUST be square with the DCL and DOL cams.

DOL Gate
Switch
DCL Cam

Magnet
Door
Card

Figure 6 - Door Operator Cams

6. Tighten the door card mounting bracket screws.

7. Slide the DCL and DOL cams to align the center of their magnets with the center of their
respective magnetic sensors at the edge of the door card.

14 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Electronic Setup and Adjustment

Limit Setting
(continued)
8. Ensure that the door configuration jumpers on the door card are installed per Table 1. See
Figure 7 on page 16 for locations.

9. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

To prevent automatic movement of the door while adjusting limit switches, place the
elevator on Inspection Operation.
10. Rotate the DCL cam in the same direction that the cam shaft rotated in Step 3 until the DCL
LED just turns ON. Tighten the set screw.

11. Move the door to the fully open position, noting which direction the cam shaft rotates.

12. Rotate the DOL cam in the same direction the cam shaft rotated in the previous step until the
DOL LED just turns ON. Tighten the set screw.

Jumper Jumper Setting/Position Description

Jumper on 1 and 2 Selects the DSP to run as a microcontroller. Factory Use Only.
JP1
Jumper on 2 and 3 Selects the DSP to run as a microprocessor. Factory Use Only.

Jumper on 1 and 2 Provides +5 VDC programming voltage for the DSP core FLASH. Factory Use Only.
JP2
Jumper on 2 and 3 Removes +5 VDC programming voltage to the DSP core FLASH. Factory Use Only.

On Selects Zmodem Mode for uploading new s/w. Field Selectable.

JP3*
Off (default) Selects Normal Mode for running. Field Selectable.

On (default) Selects Rear Door Mode for receiving rear door commands. Field Selectable.
JP4*
Off Selects Front Door Mode for receiving front door commands. Field Selectable.

On Selects RS485 Communication Link Mode. (Door Parameters D12 and D13=8) Field Selectable.
JP5*
Off Selects CAN Communication Link Mode. (Door Parameters D12 and D13=7 or 9) Field Selectable.

Selects 100K baud for CAN communication link. (JP6 ON for ISIS 1) (Door Parameters D12 and D13=9)
On Field Selectable.
JP6*
Selects 50K baud for CAN communication link. (JP6 OFF for TAC 50/03 and TAC 50/04) (Door Parame-
Off (default) ters D12 and D13=7) Field Selectable.

* Must push reset to take affect.

Table 1 - 6300PA4 Door Operator Card Configuration Jumpers

Printed in USA May, 2012 15

Electronic Setup and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Limit Setting
(continued)
GND-ISO Test Point DGND P3.3 Reset Magnetic
P5-ISO Test Point Test Point Test Point Button Sensor
P15-ISO Test Point

Fuse F2
JP1 Watchdog
LED MDO
Fuse F3 VBUS LED JP6
Fuse MDC Button
JP2 F1 Button

JP3, JP4, JP5 Magnetic

Sensor

Figure 7 - 6300PA2 Door Operator Card

Direction Check 1. Check the Door Open Limit (DOL) and the Door Close Limit (DCL).

a. Place car on Inspection Operation.

b. Press MDO on the door card to open the door. Verify that the door opens fully, and that the
DOL LED turns ON.
• If the doors move in the open direction, continue with this procedure.
• If the doors do NOT move in the open direction, use the UIT and scroll to
MAIN->SYSTEM->ADJ->LHO to change the value. (LHO = 1 for left hand,
and LHO = 0 for right hand). Repeat Step 1b.

Auto Null 1. Begin with the doors fully closed.

2. Use the UIT and scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->AUTONULL.

3. Press Enter and the UIT displays: Nulling ADC offsets

Note: When complete, the UIT displays: Null complete

4. Save the autonull parameters to FLASH by selecting Save.

16 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Electronic Setup and Adjustment

Door Scan 1. Place the car on Inspection Operation.

2. Make sure that the door is fully closed or fully open.

3. On the UIT, scroll to MAIN->PROFILE1->CMD->LEARN TRAVEL.

4. Press Enter and the UIT displays:

Travel = (some number)
Ent to Re-Learn

5. Press Enter and the UIT displays:

Travel = 0.000
Move Doors Now

6. Press MDO until the DOL LED turns ON and the UIT displays:
Travel = (learned value)
Save to Flash

7. Save the door scan to FLASH.

a. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->SAVETOFLASH, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
ENT to save
ESC to exit
b. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays: Adj's have been saved to FLASH

Profile Adjustments The doors should perform well with default settings. However, if changes to the performance are
required, see the Diagnostics section.

1. Place the car at the appropriate landing of the profile that is to be adjusted.

2. Use the UIT, scroll to MAIN->CONTROL->CMD->CYCLE MODE, and press ENTER to place the
door in cycle mode.
Note: Some adjustments can not be changed with the door in motion. If the cycle mode does not
have a delay, make adjustment changes only when the door is at rest on either limit.

3. Scroll to MAIN>CONTROL>ADJ>CDT to adjust the delay time at each limit. Some delay at the
door close limit is necessary to allow other adjustments to be changed.

To avoid mechanical damage to the doors when increasing open and close high
speed, do NOT make drastic changes.

4. On the UIT, scroll to MAIN->PROFILE#->ADJ-> and make the necessary door open and door
close adjustments. See “- Door Closing Profile” on page 18 and “- Door Opening Profile” on
page 19.

5. Save any adjustment changes to FLASH.

IMPORTANT! Save changes to FLASH when the door is on DCL or the changes may not be accepted.

Printed in USA May, 2012 17

Electronic Setup and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Profile Adjustments
(continued)

Close Torque Limit 3 Close Torque Limit 2 Close Torque Limit 1

(ctl3) (ctl2) (ctl1)

CloseHighSpeed
(chs#)

Close_Jerk_Rate
(cjdr#)

Speed

CloseDEcelRate
CloseLinearTargetGain
CloseACcelRate (cder#)
(cltg#)
(cacr#)

CloseManualSpeed
CloseNudgingSpeed (cms#)
(cndgs#)

Six Inch From

Close Point

DOL Door Closing DCL

Limit Limit
CloseDigitalTargetOffset
(cdto#)

six_inch_point_adj
(six)

Profile# Adjustment Door Adjustment

cacr# CloseACcelRate ctl1 Close Torque Limit 1
cbs# CloseBacklashSpeed ctl2 Close Torque Limit 2
cbt# CloseBacklashTime ctl3 Close Torque Limit 3
chs# CloseHighSpeed
cder# CloseDEcelRate
cms# CloseManualSpeed
cltg# CloseLinearTargetGain
cdto# CloseDigitalTargetOffset
cndgs# CloseNudgingSpeed
Note: # = Profile Number

Figure 8 - Door Closing Profile

18 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Electronic Setup and Adjustment

Profile Adjustments
(continued)

Open Torque Limit 1 Open Torque Limit 2 Open Torque Limit 3

(otl1) (otl2) (otl3)

OpenHighSpeed
(ohs#)
Speed
OpenBacklashDistance
(obd#)

OpenDEcelRate
(oder#)

OpenACcelRate OpenManualSpeed
(oacr#) (oms#)

OpenLinearTargetGain
(oltg#)

DCL OpenBacklashSpeed DOL

Door Opening
Limit (obs#) Limit
OpenDigitalTargetOffset
(odto#)

Profile# Adjustment Door Adjustment

oacr# OpenACcelRate otl1 Open Torque Limit 1
obs# OpenBacklashSpeed otl2 Open Torque Limit 2
obd# OpenBacklashDistance otl3 Open Torque Limit 3
ohs# OpenHighSpeed
oder# OpenDEcelRate
oms# OpenManualSpeed
oltg# OpenLinearTargetGain
odto# OpenDigitalTargetOffset
Note: # = Profile Number

Figure 9 - Door Opening Profile

Printed in USA May, 2012 19

Electronic Setup and Adjustment HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Closing Force
1. Use the UIT, scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->STALL, and note the value so that it can be set back
later.

2. Press ENTER, scroll to 0 (zero), and press ENTER again. This sets the value of STALL to 0.

3. Use a force gauge to measure the closing force. See Figure 10.
Notes:
• The closing force should be less than 30 lbf. in the middle 1/3 of travel.
• If the closing force is too high: Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->CTL2, reduce the value, re-
measure and repeat until the closing force is within limits.

Figure 10 - Safe Use of the Door Gauge

4. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->STALL, and set STALL back to its original value.

5. Save the values to FLASH.

6. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->SAVETOFLASH, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:

ENT to save
ESC to exit

7. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays: Adj's have been saved to FLASH.

Closing Kinetic Energy

1. Place the car at the landing where the test will be performed.

2. Place car on Inspection Operation.

3. Use the UIT, scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->DOOR_trav, and record the value.

4. Use either MDC or MDO to move the doors to one of the following positions:
• Center Opening Doors: 1" from fully open
• Single Speed Doors: 2" from fully open

5. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->DOOR_pos, and record the value.

6. Subtract the DOOR_pos value from the DOOR_trav value.

7. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->ADJ->SWM1, and enter the value from the previous step.

8. Use either MDC or MDO to move the doors to one of the following positions:
• Center Opening Doors: 1" from fully closed
• Single Speed Doors: 2" from the face of the strike column

9. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->DOOR_pos, and record the value.

10. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->ADJ->SWM2, and enter the value from the previous step.

20 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Electronic Setup and Adjustment

Closing Kinetic Energy

(continued)
11. Determine the minimum allowable closing time from the door operator nameplate.

12. Place the car on Automatic Operation.

13. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->STOPWATCH, and press ENTER.

14. Choose the close time, press ENTER, and the UIT displays: POS Mark 1 n.nnn (value from
SWM1).

15. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays: POS Mark 2 n.nnn (value from SWM2).

16. Press DOOR OPEN, and when door is fully open, press ENTER and the UIT displays: Stopwatch
armed.

17. When the door closes, the UIT displays the closing time. If the closing time is less than the min-
imum allowable closing time specified, reduce the value of the close high speed (CHS#) adjust-
ment and repeat until the closing time is greater than or equal to the minimum.

18. Save any adjustment changes to FLASH.

Set the Gate Switch 1. Position the door 1 1/2" from fully closed.

2. Rotate the disk in the CLOSE direction until the shorting bar just touches the two leaf contacts.
See Figure 11.

3. Locate a tab on the locking ring that lines up with a notch in the contact disk.

4. Rotate the drive wheel until the door is fully closed and ensure that the shorting bar has not run
past the leaf contacts.

5. Open and close the door to verify that the gate switch shorting bar enters the leaf contacts at 1
1/2" from fully closed.
Note: Verify that the shorting bar remains between the leaf contacts in the fully closed position.
Be sure that the gate switch leaf contacts do not rub on the thin portion of the plastic disk
during normal operation.

Cam Closed
Switch

Gate
Switch Leaf

Figure 11 - Gate Switch

Final Security Recheck all bolts, cap screws, cam hex screws, and belt tensions for proper tightness.

Printed in USA May, 2012 21

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Diagnostics
The User Interface Tool (UIT)

UP or DOWN Arrow - Scrolls

through menus, adjustments,
and displays.
ThyssenKrupp
Universal Door ESC - Exits the current level of a
menu, adjustment, or display.

ENTER - Selects a menu, adjust-

ment, or display.

UP DOWN ESC ENTER

Arrow Arrow

Overview of Adjustments, Parameters, and Commands

• All adjustments must be made when the doors are idle.

• Before the card is reset or powered down, save any adjustment changes to FLASH.

• When the adjustment is a speed value:

Increase the value = The door runs at a faster speed.
Decrease the value = The door runs at a slower speed.

• When the adjustment is an acceleration or deceleration rate value:

Increase the value = The door accelerates or decelerates faster.
Decrease the value = The door accelerates or decelerates slower.

• When the adjustment is a distance or point value:

Increase the value = The distance or point is further from either the door open limit (DOL) or
door close limit (DCL), depending on whether the door is opening or closing.
Decrease the value = The distance or point is closer to either the door open limit (DOL) or door
close limit (DCL), depending on whether the door is opening or closing.

• Door position is stored at 0 on DCL and at Travel (TRV) on DOL.

• Speeds are (+) in the opening direction, and (–) in the closing direction.

22 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

The UIT Menu Tree

Main Menu

Profile_# Door System Control Diagnostics

Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
OHS# OTL1 LHO IBM0 TPA1
OMS# OTL2 DCM DBM0 TPA2
OACR# OTL3 DCI IBM1 TPM1
ODER# CTL1 DOI DBM1 TPD1
ODTO# CTL2 ELI IBM4 TPM2
OBS# CTL3 MAL DBM4 TPD2
OBD CLT LDO IBM5 DM0
OLTG# SIX FSP DBM5 DZ0
CHS# DIREV UPM IIM DM1
CMS# STALL DRM OIM DZ1
CACR# ADP CDT TPL1
CDER# PPR Monitor TPL2
CDTO# IFB Command HEX
SW_v_r
CJDR# RPM Cycle Mode
CLTG# LPTC Monitor
Command
CNDGS# ADZ1 Monitor TP1_out
KPCMD# MDC PASSWORD CONTROL
mcss_cmd_num TP2_out
KICMD# MNC SAVE TO FLASH
P_in_0 TP1s_in
KDCMD# IKP STACK USAGE
P_in_1 TP2s_in
KPFB# IKI FACTORY DEFAULTS
P_in_4 TP1l_IN
KDFB# IVL TP2l_in
P_in_5
LAG (Profile 1 only) SWM1
P_out_0
RSC (Profile 1 only) SWM2 Command
P_out_1
P_out_4 DISPLAY FAULTS
# = profile number Monitor
P_out_5 CLEAR FAULTS
DOOR_trav Exp_in
Command DOOR_pos
Learn Travel upid_cmd_vel
upid_torque
upid_mtr_vel
upid_vel_err
upid_pos_err
adc_1
slip_comp_op
slip_comp_cl
DTG_open
DTG_close
profile_ID

Command
IGBT Err Rst
Shutdown
Stopwatch
Autonull

Printed in USA May, 2012 23

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Adjustments
Control Adjustments
Mnemonic Adjustment Definition

CDT Cycle Delay Time The time (in seconds) that the door control will delay at each limit when the
doors are on continuous cycle mode
Min: 0
Default: 32
Max: 255

DBM0 De-Bounce Bit Mask 0 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X Input Input Input X X X X
X Electronic Encoder Encoder X X X X
DCL Phase B Phase A

DBM1 De-Bounce Bit Mask 1 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Input Input X X X X X X
Hall Limit Hall Limit X X X X X X
DOL DCL

DBM4 De-Bounce Bit Mask 4 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input Input X X X X
X X VBUS SE X X X X
DBM5 De-Bounce Bit Mask 5 The signals shown in the table can have additional de-bouncing by setting
the corresponding bit. The default indicates that all these signals are de-
bounced.
Min: 0
Default: 255
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input Input Input Input Input Input
X X Electronic X F/Rn CAN/485n MDC MDO
DOL

24 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Control Adjustments (Continued)

Mnemonic Adjustment Definition (Continued)

IBM0 Invert Bit Mask 0 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default indicates that the Encoder Phase B and Encoder Phase A
signals are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 32
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X Input Input Input X X X X

X Electronic Encoder Encoder X X X X
DCL Phase B Phase A

IBM1 Invert Bit Mask 1 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default indicates that the Hall Limit DOL and Hall Limit DCL signals
are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 192
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Input Input X X X X X X
Hall Limit Hall Limit X X X X X X
DOL DCL

IBM4 Invert Bit Mask 4 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default value indicates that the SE signal should be high when not
obstructed. If the value is set to 0, then SE signal should be low when not
obstructed.
Min: 0
Default: 0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input Input X X X X
X X VBUS SE X X X X
IBM5 Invert Bit Mask 5 The signals shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding
bit. The default indicates that the Electronic DOL, MDC, and MDO signals
are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 35
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X Input X Input Input Input Input

X X Electronic X F/Rn CAN/485n MDC MDO
DOL

Printed in USA May, 2012 25

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Control Adjustments (Continued)

Mnemonic Adjustment Definition (Continued)

IIM Input Invert Mask This is the input invert mask for the I/O Expansion. The signals shown in the
table can be inverted by setting the corresponding bit. The default indicates
that all of the input signals are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 95
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
X DCL DOL HDI2 HDI1 NDG CD OD
OIM Output Invert Mask This is the output invert mask for the I/O Expansion. The output signals
shown in the table can be inverted by setting the corresponding bit. The
default indicates that none of the signals are inverted.
Min: 0
Default: 0
Max: 255

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

X X X X Output Output Output Output
X X X X DRL DL6 DCL DOL

Diagnostic Adjustments
Notes:
• These values are for diagnostic purposes and cannot be changed using the UIT.
• The test points have a range of 0V minimum to +3V maximum.
• The test point outputs are based on Equation 1 and Equation 2.
Equation 1= TP1out = ((TP1in * TPM1) / TPD1) * 0.73mV + 1.5V
Equation 2 = TP2out = ((TP2in * TPM2) / TPD2) * 0.73mV + 1.5V

Diagnostic Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

DM0 0 2048 4095 DAC 0 Multiplier - Multiplier for DAC0; 2048 = 1.000. Do not
use DM0, use TPM1 instead.

DM1 0 2048 4095 DAC 1 Multiplier - Multiplier for DAC1; 2048 = 1.000. Do not
use DM1, use TPM2 instead.

DZ0 -1228 0 1228 DAC 0 Offset - Zero offset for DAC0. Adjust for 1.500V
output when input to DAC0 = 0.

DZ1 -1228 0 1228 DAC 1 Offset - Zero offset for DAC1. Adjust for 1.500V
output when input to DAC1 = 0.

HEX – 0 – Values in Hex - Set to 1 to display numerical values in hexa-

decimal format. Set to 0 to display numerical values in deci-
mal format.
TPA1 0 2048 32767 Test Point 1 Address - Address for the variable information
to be output at Test Point1.

26 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Diagnostic Adjustments (Continued)

Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

TPA2 0 2048 32767 Test Point 2 Address - Address for the variable information
to be output at Test Point 2.

TPD1 0 0 32767 Test Point 1 Divider - Divider for Test Point 1. Used to facili-
tate viewing signals on Test Point 1. Refer to Equation 1.

TPD2 0 0 32767 Test Point 2 Divider - Divider for Test Point2. Used to facili-
tate viewing signals on Test Point 2. Refer to Equation 2.

TPL1 – 0 – Test Point 1 Length - Length of variable for Test Point 1. Set
to 0 for short and set to 1 for long.

TPL2 – 0 – Test Point 2 Length - Length of variable for Test Point 2. Set
to 0 for short and set to 1 for long.

TPM1 1 1 32767 Test Point 1 Multiplier - Multiplier for Test Point 1. Used to
facilitate viewing signals on Test Point 1. See Equation 1.

TPM2 1 1 32767 Test Point 2 Multiplier - Multiplier for Test Point 2. Used to
facilitate viewing signals on Test Point 2. See Equation 2.

Door Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

ADP* 1 1 DPL Active Door Profile - Manually selects which door profile to
use.

ADZ0* -8192 0 8192 A/D Digital Zero0 - The digital zero value for the analog to
digital input number 0. This is on the W phase.

ADZ1* -8192 0 8192 A/D Digital Zero1 - The digital zero value for the analog to
digital input number 1. This is on the U phase.

CLT 0 10 25 Closing Torque (%) - This adjustment sets the closing

torque limit. This adjustment is a percent of Maximum Drive
Current.
CTL1 0 20 100 Close Torque Limit 1 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
last third of close cycle.
CTL2 0 20 100 Close Torque Limit 2 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
middle third of close cycle.
CTL3 0 40 100 Close Torque Limit 3 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
first third of close cycle.
DIREV 0 100 500 Smooth Turnaround (RPM) - This is the speed of the motor
that must be reached before reversing the door motor to re-
open the doors after a safety edge has been activated.
IFB* 0 0 1 Invert Feedback - Do Not Change.

IKI* 0 807 6400 Current Loop Integral Gain - Do Not Change.

IKP* 0 1.25 8.0 Current Loop Proportional Gain - Do Not Change.

IVL* 10 95 100 Current Loop Voltage Limit - Do Not Change.

Printed in USA May, 2012 27

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Door Adjustments (Continued)

Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

LPTC* 0 .015 .050 Low Pass Time Constant - This value is used as the time
constant for the low pass filter. This adjustment is in milli-
seconds.
MDC* MNC 6.79 6.8 Maximum Drive Current - The maximum drive current in
Amps rms. Do Not Change.

MFC* 0 1.0 MNC Motor Field Current - Motor field current in Amps rms. Do
Not Change.

MNC* MFC 1.4 MDC Motor Nameplate Current - Motor nameplate current in
Amps rms. Do Not Change.

MTP* 2.0 6.0 8.0 Motor Poles - The number of poles of the AC door motor. Do
Not Change.

OTL1 0 50 100 Open Torque Limit 1 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
first third of open cycle. This is a percentage of the maxi-
mum drive current.

OTL2 0 45 100 Open Torque Limit 2 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
during the middle third of open cycle.

OTL3 0 20 100 Open Torque Limit 3 (%) - An adjustment value that repre-
sents the maximum allowable door motor current during the
last third of open cycle.

PPR* 64 500 2048 Encoder Resolution - This is the pulses per revolution of the
door operator motor encoder.

RPM* 500 1150 2048 Motor RPM - This is the nameplate door operator motor
RPM.

RSF* .10 3.1 6.0 Rated Slip Frequency - The rated slip frequency of the
AC motor in Hertz. Do Not Change.

SIX 0 1.0 15.9 Six Inch Point (rev)- This is the point at which the six inch
from close signal will be sent to the controller. This adjust-
ment is in tenths of motor revolutions.
Note: To determine the relationship of travel distance to mo-
tor RPM, see Door Parameter POS.

STALL 0 50 300 Stall Velocity - This sets the motor RPM that is used to deter-
mine when the door motor is stalled and the reduced stall
torque adjustment value is applied to the door motor. This
adjustment is in RPM.

SWM1 0 0 32.767 Stop Watch Mark 1 (Rev) - Used in conjunction with the
Stopwatch feature. SWM1 is Mark 1.

SWM2 Stop Watch Mark 2 (Rev) - Used in conjunction with the

Stopwatch feature. SWM2 is Mark 2.

*System Adjustment MAL must equal 1 for the availability of the adjustment.

28 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Profile Adjustments Notes:

• # = Profile Number
• Several different door operation profiles are available.
• Each profile has adjustments for both Open and Close; The profile adjustments have the same
minimum, default, and maximum values.
• Each value may be adjusted for a different purpose.
• Adjustment values can relate to one another only within the same door operation profile.

Profile Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

CACR# 0 1200 3600 Close Acceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Close acceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from zero speed and the door
open limit to top speed.

CDER# 0 900 1919 Close Deceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Close deceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from top speed to manual close
speed.

CDTO# -2.0 0 2.0 Close Digital Target Offset (Rev) - This adjustment shifts the
deceleration portion of the opening cycle away from the
door close limit. Increasing this value will cause the doors to
begin deceleration further from the close limit.

CHS# Close manual 300 Rated RPM of Close High Speed (RPM) - Maximum close speed of the door
speed adjust- motor in RPM motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor that the control
ment value. adjustment. system will attain during a close door cycle.

CJDR# 0 3100 8192 Close Jerk Rate (RPM/sec2) - This is the jerk rate in the close
direction when transitioning from top close speed to decel-
eration. This controls the amount of rounding/ smoothing
that occurs during the transition. Units are RPM/sec/sec.

CLTG# 60 120 3000 Close Linear Target Gain - 1/min

CMS# 0 40 Close high Close Manual Speed (RPM) - Manual close speed of door
speed motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor when the
adjustment doors are closed with the manual push buttons or during the
value. last portion of a close cycle.

CNDGS# 0 125 Close high Nudge Close Speed (RPM) - This is the speed of the door
speed motor when nudging operation is activated.
adjustment
KDCMD# 0 0 327.67 Speed Control Derivative Gain - Do Not Change.

KDFB# 0 0 327.67 Speed Feedback Derivative Gain - Do Not Change.

KICMD# 0 22.2 3276.7 Speed Control Integral Gain - Do Not Change.

KPCMD# 0 0 327.67 Speed Command Proportional Gain - Do Not Change.

KPFB# 0 3.33 327.67 Speed Feedback Proportional Gain - Do Not Change.

LAG 0 0.150 0.250 Profile Lag Compensation (sec) - Adjusts the compensation
in the profile that accounts for the delay between the
demand and the motor response. Units are in seconds.
Available only in Profile1. Do Not Change.

Printed in USA May, 2012 29

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Profile Adjustments (Continued)

Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

OACR# 0 1200 3600 Open Acceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Open acceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from backlash speed to top
speed.

OBD 0 1.0 10 Open Backlash Distance (Rev) - Sets the distance that the
doors will move at open backlash speed (OBS#) at the
beginning of an open cycle. The backlash distance begins
just after the doors leave the door close limit and is in motor
revolutions. This distance is used to allow the hoistway door
to be picked up by the car door interlock rollers, and is
effective in the opening cycle only.
Note: To determine the relationship of travel distance to mo-
tor RPM, see Door Parameter POS.

OBS# 0 60 Open high Open Backlash Speed (RPM) - This is the speed of the door
speed motor in rpm during the open backlash distance (OBD#).
adjustment This speed is used to keep the door speed low until the car
value. door interlock rollers pick up the hoistway door.

ODER# 0 1200 3839 Open Deceleration Rate (RPM/sec) - Open deceleration rate
of door motor in rpm/sec. This is the rate the motor speed
changes when transitioning from top speed to manual open
speed.

ODTO# -2.0 0 2.0 Open Digital Target Offset (Rev)- This adjustment shifts the
deceleration portion of the opening cycle away from the
door open limit. Increasing this value will cause the doors to
begin deceleration further from the open limit.

OHS# Open manual 400 Rated RPM of Open High Speed (RPM) - Maximum open speed of the door
speed adjust- motor in RPM motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor that the control
ment value. adjustment. system will attain during an open door cycle.
OLTG# 60 150 3000 Open Linear Target Gain (Rev) - 1/min.

OMS# 0 40 Open high Open Manual Speed (RPM) - Manual open speed of door
speed motor in rpm. This is the speed of the motor when the doors
adjustment are opened with the manual push buttons or during the last
value. portion of an open cycle.

RSC 0 0 2000 Re-open Slip Compensation - This is the slip compensation

factor used during a re-open. Available only in Profile 1. Do
Not Change.

30 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

System Adjustments These adjustments will not take effect until the new value is saved to FLASH and the door operator
card is reset.

System Adjustments
Adjustment Minimum Default Maximum Definition

DCI – 0 – Discrete Controller Interface -

• Set to 1 for relay controller or discrete signal interface
(modernization jobs).
• Set to 0 for serial controller interface; DCL and DOL
can be selected to input through hall effect or through
the I/O Expansion card. See Electronic Limit Interface
(System Adjustment ELI).

DCM – 1 – DC Motor Control Selection - Set to 1 to select DC motor con-

trol, 0 to select AC motor control.

DOI – 0 – Discrete Operator Interface - Set to 1 to allow door operator

card to accept signals from the expansion interface card. Set
to 0, and the door operator card does not accept signals from
the expansion interface card.

DPL 1 5 5 Door Profile Limit - Number of active profiles.

DRM 1 4 50 Multiple for Slow Clock - Do Not Change.

ELI – 0 – Electronic Limit Interface -
• Set to 1 for DCL and DOL signal inputs from header
hall effect sensors.
• Set to 1 to use UDC card with Linear Door Operator.
• If set to 0 and discrete controller interface (System
Adjustment DCI) is set to 1, then DCL and DOL are
input through the hall effect sensors on the UDC card
(harmonic operator).
• If set to 1 and DCI is set to 1, then DCL and DOL are
input through the I/O Expansion Card.

FSP 250 1000 2500 Sample Frequency - Do Not Change.

LDO – 0 – Linear Door Operator - Set to 1 to select the linear door opera-
tor application, 0 for harmonic application.

LHO – 1 – Left Hand Operation - Set to 1 for left hand operation,

0 for right hand operation

MAL – 0 – Menu Access Level - Set to 1 for full menu access, 0 for
restricted or limited menu access.

UPM 1 2 50 Multiple for Medium Clock - Do Not Change.

Printed in USA May, 2012 31

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Parameters
CAN Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in factory-level diagnostics. Not for field use.

Mnemonic Command Definition

CEC Transmit and Displays the value of the transmit and receive error counters.
Receive Error
Counters

ESR Error Status Displays the value of the error status register.
Register

GSR Global Status Displays the value of the global status register.
Register

MDER Mailbox Direction/ Displays the value of the mailbox direction/enable register.
Enable Register

RCR Receive Control Displays short test point 1 input variable.

Register

TCR Transmission Displays the value of the transmission control register.

Control Register

Control Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.
MCS = Motion Control State Number - Indicates the current motion control state shown below.

Motion Control
Description
State Number

4 Direction Reversal

8 Stop Door

9 Hold Closed

10 Nudge Close

11 Manual Open

12 Manual Close

13 Open Door

14 Close Door

32 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Diagnostics

Control Parameters
(continued) For the availability of the following parameters, System Adjustment MAL must equal 1.

Mnemonic Command Definition

PIN0 Input Parameter 0 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X Electronic Encoder Phase Encoder Phase X X X X
PIN1 Input Parameter 1 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Hall Limit Hall Limit X X X X X X
PIN4 Input Parameter 4 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LCD Back X VBUS SE X X X X
PIN5 Input Parameter 5 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X FTP Electronic DOL VF/PWMn F/Rn CAN/485n MDC MDO
POUT0 Output Parameter 0 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X X X X X X X X
POUT1 Output Parameter 1 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X X X X X X X X
POUT4 Output Parameter 4 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LCD Back X X X X X X X
POUT5 Output Parameter 5 Use to view the status of the parameters shown in the table.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
X FTP X VF/PWMn X X X X

Diagnostic Parameters
These values are viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.

Mnemonic Command Definition

TPL1 Test Point 1 Long In Displays long test point 1 input variable.

TPL2 Test Point 2 Long In Displays long test point 2 input variable.

Displays test point 1 voltage out

TPO1 Test Point 1 Out
(above and below 1.5V nominal).

Displays test point 2 voltage out

TPO2 Test Point 2 Out
(above and below 1.5V nominal).

TPS1 Test Point 1 Short In Displays short test point 1 input variable.

TPS2 Test Point 2 Short In Displays short test point 2 input variable.

Printed in USA May, 2012 33

Diagnostics HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Door Parameters These values are viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.

Mnemonic Command Definition

ADC0 Analog to Digital Displays the value of analog to digital converter number 0,
Converter 0 which is the lwfbk signal (W phase current feedback).

ADC1 Analog to Digital Displays the value of analog to digital converter number 1,
Converter 1 which is the lufbk signal (U phase current feedback).

CSC Close Slip Compen- This value is automatically set. It indicates the amount of belt
sation slip during a close door cycle. This value is in motor revolu-
tions. Do Not Change.

DPID Profile ID Displays current profile.

DTGC Distance To Go Calculated value based on travel and close slip compensation.
Close

DTGO Distance To Go Calculated value based on travel and open slip compensation.
Open

OSC Open Slip Compen- This value is automatically set. It indicates the amount of belt
sation slip during an open door cycle. This value is in motor revolu-
tions. Do Not Change.

POS Door Position This parameter displays the position of the door in motor rev-
olutions from the door close limit (DCL). To use this feature,
move the doors to the desired position and read the number
displayed. Used for setting OBD and SIX.
Minimum = 0
Default = 0
Maximum = TRV

TRV Door Travel This is the travel value learned when a door scan is per-
formed. The value is in motor revolutions

UCV UPID Command Displays the dictated or commanded velocity.

Velocity

UMV UPID Motor Velocity Displays the dictated or commanded motor velocity.

UPE UPID Position Error Displays the difference between calculated position and actual
position.

UTQ UPID Torque Displays the dictated or commanded torque.

UVE UPID Velocity Error Displays the difference between dictated or commanded
velocity and actual velocity.

System Parameters This value is viewable only to aid in diagnostic purposes.

Mnemonic Command Definition

VER Software Version/Revision Displays the version/revision of door operator software.

34 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Fault Codes

Fault Codes • 2000 Series Fault Code = Front Door Operator

• 3000 Series Fault Code = Rear Door Operator

Fault Codes
Fault Code Description / Causes / Solutions
2036 / 3036 IGBT FAULT - A defective IGBT.
Possible Causes
• This can be caused by an over current condition.
Possible Solutions
• Try to restart the power module. See Restart IGBT Power Module.
• If the fault can not be cleared, verify that the doors are free of binds. If the
doors bind, correct the cause of the bind and restart the power module.
See Restart IGBT Power Module.
• Check for wiring shorts.
• If the fault remains, replace the door card or motor, or check for shorts.
2050 / 3050 ENCODER FAULT - An invalid encoder count.
Possible Causes
• This can be caused by an over current condition.
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the encoder wiring is correct (e.g. phase A and phase B are not
swapped).
2. Verify that encoder is working properly. See Checking Encoder.
3. Make sure the magnetic limits are fastened securely on the cam shaft.
Do not overtighten, the cams are plastic and can be
damaged rather easily.
4. Verify that all of the belts are in good shape and replace (if necessary).
5. Check the belt tension.
Note: Tighten the belt (if necessary). Do not overtighten the drive belt because it
can cause premature motor bearing failure.
6. Verify that the DCL and DOL limits activate at the proper time. If necessary,
readjust the limits and perform a new door scan.
7. If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2051 / 3051 XS BELT SLIP FLT - Excessive Belt Slip.
Possible Solutions
1. Make sure the magnetic limits are fastened securely on the cam shaft.
Do not overtighten, the cams are plastic and can be
damaged rather easily.
2. Verify that all of the belts are in good shape and replace (if necessary).
3. Check the belt tension.
Note: Tighten the belt (if necessary). Do not overtighten the drive belt because it
can cause premature motor bearing failure.
4. Verify that the DCL and DOL limits activate at the proper time. If necessary,
readjust the limits and perform a new door scan.
5. If the fault remains, replace the door card.

Printed in USA May, 2012 35

Fault Codes HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Fault Codes (Continued)

Fault Code Description / Causes / Solutions (Continued)
2053 / 3053 MOTOR WIRE WRONG - The door timed out, more than 14 seconds, while trying to
power off a limit during scan.
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the motor is wired properly.
2. Verify that Left Hand Operation (LHO) is set correctly.
3. Perform a new door scan.
4. If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2054 / 3054 REV ENCODER FLT
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the encoder wiring is correct (e.g., phase A and phase B are not
swapped).
2. Verify that the encoder is working properly.
3. Perform a new door scan.
4. If the fault remains, replace the door car.
2055 / 3055 TRAVEL FAULT - An invalid door travel value.
Possible Solutions
1. Verify that the motor is wired properly.
2. Verify that the system adjustments are set correctly.
3. Perform a new door scan.
4. Verify that the encoder wiring is correct (e.g. phase A and phase B are not
swapped).
5. Verify that encoder is working properly.
6. Verify that the DCL and DOL limits activate at the proper time. If necessary,
readjust the limits and perform a new door scan.
7. If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2056 / 3056 OPEN OS FAULT - Door overspeed in open direction with Open Command.
Possible Solutions
• Verify that the RPM adjustment is set correctly.
2057 / 3057 CLOSE OS FAULT - Door overspeed in close direction with Close Command.
Possible Solutions
• Verify that the RPM adjustment is set correctly.
2058 / 3058 CL RUNAWAY FAULT - Door over speed in close direction with no Close Command.
2059 / 3059 BUS POWER FAULT - Loss of BUS supply.
Possible Solutions
• Check fuse F2 on the door card and replace (if necessary).
• Verify the wires for power (wires going to CON11) are securely fastened
and in the correct place.
• If the fault remains, replace the door card.
2060 / 3060 OP RUNAWAY FAULT - Doors overspeed in open direction with no Open Command.
2061 / 3061 OP OV DRIVE FAULT - Doors overdriven in open direction with Open Command.
2062 / 3062 CL OV DRIVE FAULT - Doors overdriven in close direction with Close Command.
2063 / 3063 IFBK FAULT - Failure to regulate the DC current (only) on DCL.
Possible Causes
• An open motor armature circuit.
• A defective board, replace the board.

36 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Fault Codes

Fault Codes (Continued)

Fault Code Description / Causes / Solutions (Continued)
2064 / 3064 I SERIAL COM FAULT - Failure to receive data from the controller within 5 seconds.
Possible Solutions
• Check for a defective door board.
• Check for a defective controller board.
• Check the wiring.
2065 / 3065 I SCALE FAULT - Current adjustments are out of range.
Possible Solutions
1. Correct the Maximum Drive Current (MDC) and/or the Motor Nameplate
Current (MNC).
2. After making corrections, save and reset the board.
2066 / 3066 DOL DCL FAULT - Both DOL and DCL are on at the same time.
Possible Solutions
1. Adjust the cam and/or magnet.
2. Replace the switch.
3. Replace the board.
2067 / 3067 DOL FAILURE - The Door Open Limit (DOL) sensor failed to operate after 60 sec-
onds.
Possible Solutions
• Adjust the cam and/or magnet.
• Perform a door scan.
• Replace the reed switch.
• Replace the board.
2068 / 3068 DCL FAILURE - The Door Close Limit (DCL) sensor failed to operate after 60 sec-
onds.
Possible Solutions
• Adjust the cam and/or magnet.
• Perform a door scan.
• Replace the reed switch.
• Replace the board.
2069 / 3069 MAX TORQUE FAULT - One or more torque limit adjustments are greater than the
maximum allowed torque.
Possible Solutions
1. Adjust the Open Torque Limit (OTL#) and/or the Close Torque Limit (CTL#).
2. Correct the Maximum Drive Current (MDC) and/or the Motor Nameplate
Current (MNC).
3. After making corrections, save and reset the board.

Printed in USA May, 2012 37

Technical Information HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Technical Information
Record Flight Time This procedure requires two people - one in the car, and one on top of the car.
1. Place the car at the landing where the test will be performed.
2. Place car on Inspection Operation.
3. Use the UIT, scroll to MAIN->DOOR->ADJ->SWM1, and enter 0 (zero).
4. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->DOOR_trav, and record the value.
5. Use MDC or MDO to move the doors to 3/4 fully open position.
6. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->MON->DOOR_pos, and record the value.
7. Subtract the POS value from the TRV value, and enter this value in door adjustment SWM2.
8. Place the car on Automatic Operation. The doors will close.
9. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->STOPWATCH, and press ENTER.
10. Choose the flight time, press ENTER, and the UIT displays: POS Mark 1 n.nnn (value from
SWM1).
11. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays: POS Mark 2 n.nnn (value from SWM2).
12. Press and hold Door Open (to open the doors), enter a car call for the next landing - Up/ Down.
13. Release Door Open. The doors will close, and the car will run to the selected car call. When the
car makes its run and the doors open, the flight time is displayed.
Note: SWM1 and SWM2 values are retained, without saving, until the Door Operator Power is
cycled or the Door Card is reset.

Jumper Settings If the card is not communicating with IMS, verify that the jumpers are set as shown in Table 2. If
not, power down the card, set the jumper(s) to the proper setting, and power up the card.

Jumper Jumper Setting/Position Description

Jumper on 1 and 2 (default) Selects the DSP to run as a microcontroller. Factory Use Only.
JP1
Jumper on 2 and 3 Selects the DSP to run as a microprocessor. Factory Use Only.

Jumper on 1 and 2 Provides +5 VDC programming voltage for the DSP core FLASH. Factory Use Only.
JP2
Jumper on 2 and 3 (default) Removes +5 VDC programming voltage to the DSP core FLASH. Factory Use Only.

On *Selects Zmodem Mode for uploading new software. Field Selectable.

JP3
Off (default) *Selects Normal Mode for running. Field Selectable.

On *Selects Rear Door Mode for receiving rear door commands. Field Selectable.
JP4
Off (default) *Selects Front door mode for receiving front door commands. Field Selectable.

On (default) *Selects RS485 communication link mode. Field Selectable. (Door Parameters D12 and D13=8).
JP5
Off *Selects CAN communication link mode. Field Selectable. (Door Parameters D12 and D13=7 or 9).

*Selects 100K baud for CAN communication link. (JP6 ON for ISIS 1) Field Selectable. (Door
On Parameters D12 and D13 = 9).
JP6
*Selects 50K baud for CAN communication link. (JP6 OFF for TAC 50-03 and TAC 50-04) Field
Off (default) Selectable. (Door Parameters D12 and D13=7).

*Reset must be pressed for changes to take effect.

Table 2 - Jumper Settings

38 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Technical Information

Upload FLASH Program Software

If the FLASH code becomes corrupted, the FLASH code can be reinstalled.

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Install a UIT (User Interface Tool) on CON2.

3. Use a serial cable with a 4-pin connector adapter to connect a laptop with the HyperTerminal
software to the UDC Card at CON6.

4. Click Start.

5. Select Programs -> Accessories -> HyperTerminal. The Connection Description window opens.

6. Type in a name, such as "FLASH COMM", select an Icon, and then click OK. The Connect To
window opens.

7. Select the arrow beside Connect Using:, then select COM1 (or the port that will be used) from
the list and click OK. The COM1 Properties window opens.

8. Type in the following properties:

• Bits per second: 38400
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: None
• Stop bits: 1
• Flow Control: Hardware

9. Click OK. This session will be activated.

10. Select File -> Save.

11. Select File -> Properties. The Properties dialog box opens.

12. Select Settings. Verify the following:

• The function, arrow, and ctrl keys act as terminal keys
• The backspace key sends: Ctrl+H
• Emulation: Auto detect
• Telnet terminal ID: ANSI
• Back scroll buffer lines: 500

13. Click ASCII Setup, and verify the following:

• Line delay: 0 milliseconds
• Character delay: 0 milliseconds
• Wrap lines that exceed terminal width is the only item checked

Printed in USA May, 2012 39

Technical Information HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Upload FLASH Program Software

(continued)
14. Click OK on both dialog boxes.

15. Select the Transfer pull-down menu, then select Send File.

16. Use the Browse Command to find the correct file, click the filename, and then click Open.

17. Install jumper JP3, and press Reset (on the door card).

18. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

Note: The UIT displays the status message "ZMODEM READY." If this message is not shown,
replace the door card.

19. To start the software upload, click Send in the HyperTerminal screen.

20. When the upload is complete, the UIT displays:

ThyssenKrupp
Universal Door

21. Remove jumper JP3, press Reset, and the UIT displays:
ThyssenKrupp
Universal Door

22. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

23. Remove the cable from CON6.

Determine the Software Version/Revision

1. Begin with the doors fully closed.
2. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->MON->SW_v_r and press ENTER.
Note: The UIT will display the software version and revision. The first two digits are the version,
and the second two digits are the revision.
2. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Cycle Mode The cycle command (CYC), when activated, will cause the doors to continuously cycle. The delay at
the DOL and the DCL is controlled by the cycle delay time (CDT) adjustment.
Activate the Cycle Command
1. Scroll to MAIN->CONTROL->CMD->Cycle Mode, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
ENT to ENABLE
CYCLE Mode
2. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
Control/Cmd
Cycle Mode
Note: The doors will start cycling.

40 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Technical Information

Cycle Mode
(continued) Deactivate the Cycle Command
1. Scroll to MAIN->CONTROL->CMD->Cycle Mode, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
ENT to ENABLE
CYCLE Mode
2. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
Control/Cmd
Cycle Mode
Note: The doors will stop cycling.

Restart the IGBT Power Module

The power module may be reset if an overcurrent circuit condition has caused the power module to
send a shutdown signal to the DSP. The power module can only be reset after the fault condition
has been cleared.

1. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->IGBT ERR Rst, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
ENT to Proceed
ESC to Exit
2. To reset the power module, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
PWM Reenabled
Note: The power module has now been reset.
3. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Shut Down the IGBT Power Module

This command prevents any motor operation including the Manual Door Open (MDO) and Manual
Door Close (MDO) functions.
1. Scroll to MAIN->DOOR->CMD->Shutdown, and press ENTER.
Note: The UIT display will not change, and the power module has now been shutdown.
2. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Restore Factory Defaults

Each HD-03 Door Operator is shipped with certain parameters and adjustments modified to match
the job condition. The defaults, however, remain the same for all units.
The supplied configuration of the door operator uses adjustment and parameter val-
ues that are different from the default values shown in the Diagnostics Section.
Using the Factory Defaults Command (FDF) could result in a maladjusted or non-
functioning door operator.

1. Begin with the doors fully closed.

2. Scroll to MAIN->SYSTEM->CMD->FACTORY DEFAULTS, press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
ENT to Restore
ESC to Exit
3. Press ENTER, and the UIT displays:
Values Restored
Note: All adjustments, parameters and commands are now set to the factory defaults.
4. Press ESC until the main menu displays.

Printed in USA May, 2012 41

Troubleshooting HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Troubleshooting
Power Up Verification
1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Unplug the connectors from the door card.

3. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

4. Measure AC voltage on the door operator terminal strip across AC1S and AC2. The voltages
should match the voltages in Table 3. If the voltage measured is zero (0), verify the following:
• The power switch in the door control box is ON.
• The AC1S switch is ON in the swing return.
• The connections in the swing return are good.
• The power is ON at the elevator controller.
• The fuses in the elevator controller are good.
• The connections in elevator controller are good.

5. Measure the AC voltage across AC1S and ACG.

a. If the voltage is in range of 0 and 80 VAC, measure AC2 to ACG.
b. If AC2 to ACG is in range of 103 and 126 VAC, AC1S and AC2 have been reversed;
Reverse AC1S and AC2.

6. With the system still powered Up, measure the DC voltages on the door operator terminal strip
across P24 and G24. The voltages should match the voltages in Table 3. If the voltage
measured is zero (0), verify the following:
• The P24 switch in the swing return is ON.
• The connections in the swing return are good.
• The power is ON at the elevator controller.
• The fuses in the elevator controller are good.
• The connections in the elevator controller are good.

Voltage Meter Setting Positive Meter Probe Negative Meter Probe Voltage Measured

AC1S Volts AC AC1S terminal 6 AC2 terminal 5 103 - 126 VAC

AC1S Volts AC AC1S terminal 6 ACG terminal 4 103 - 126 VAC

AC2 Volts AC AC2 terminal 5 ACG terminal 4 0 - 80 VAC

P24 Volts DC P24 terminal 17 G24 terminal 20 22 - 26 VDC

Table 3 - Voltage Settings

42 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting

LED Verification 1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect. Reconnect the connectors on the door
card (located inside the door operator).

2. Make sure the doors are in the fully closed position.

3. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

4. Verify that the VBUS and WD LEDs are ON. See Figure 12 on page 44.
Note: If the VBUS or the WD LED does not come ON, see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 46.

5. Verify that the door is still in the fully closed position, and that the DCL LED is ON. If the LED
does not come ON, see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 46.

6. Turn OFF the toggle switch (located in the door operator).

7. Manually move the doors to the fully open position.

8. Turn ON the toggle switch.

9. With the door in the fully open position, verify that the DOL LED is ON. If the LED does NOT
come ON, see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 46.

Power Supplies Check

1. Turn the door card ON and measure the voltages at the specified points on the door card. The
voltage for each measurement should be in the range noted.

When checking door card power supplies, take great care to avoid electrical shock
and/or damage to the door card.

The power supply for the door motor is named V-Buss. The voltage for this power rail is gener-
ated from the incoming 115 VAC, and the 115 VAC is rectified and filtered to produce the DC
power supply. A VBUS indicator LED is provided on the card.

2. The VBUS LED will indicate whether this power supply is good.

• If the VBUS LED is not ON, see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 46.
• If 115 VAC is available at CON11, pins 1 and 2, and the VBUS LED is not ON,
replace the door operator card.

Printed in USA May, 2012 43

Troubleshooting HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

LED Verification and Power Supplies Check

(continued)

GND-ISO Test Point DGND P3.3 Reset Magnetic

P5-ISO Test Point Test Point Test Point Button Sensor
P15-ISO Test Point

Fuse F2 VBUS JP1 Watchdog

LED LED MDO
Fuse F3 JP6 MDC Button
AGND P3.3A P5 Fuse
Test Test Test JP2 F1 Button
Point Point Point JP3, JP4, JP5 Magnetic
Sensor

Power Supply Measurement Locations Acceptable Voltage Range (VDC)

P5 P5 Test Point to DGND Test Point 4.875 to 5.125

P3.3 P3.3 Test Point to DGND Test Point 3.2 to 3.37

P3.3A P3.3A Test Point to AGND Test Point 3.2 to 3.4

P5_ISO P5_ISO Test Point to GND_ISO Test Point 4.5 to 5.5

P15_ISO P15_ISO Test Point to GND_ISO Test Point 14.625 to 15.375

Figure 12 - Door Card Power Supply Check

44 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting

Checking the Encoder

Perform this check to ensure that the encoder signals are working properly.

1. Before conducting this test, verify that fuse F1 on the door card is good.

2. Use a digital multimeter, and measure the voltage across fuse F1.
• If the voltage reads higher than 1.5 volts, replace the fuse.
• If the voltage reads below 1.5 volts, the fuse is good.

The best way to check the encoder signals is with an oscilloscope. If an oscilloscope is not
available, use the digital multimeter method.

Oscilloscope Method

Required tool: An oscilloscope with two working channels.

1. Set the vertical channel to 5V/div.

2. Set the horizontal channel to 1uS/div.

3. Connect the ground leads for both channels to the GND test point.

4. Connect the channel A probe to CON8-2 (PHA).

5. Connect the channel B probe to CON8-3 (PHB).

6. Slowly rotate, by hand, the door motor.

Note: PHA and PHB should be 90 degrees out-of-phase, and toggle between 0 to 1 and 4.5 to 5
volts.
If both signals, PHA and PHB, toggle as they should then the encoder is working. The door card
may need replacing.

Digital Multimeter Method

Required tool: A digital multimeter set to measure DC volts.

1. Connect the negative lead to the GND test point, and the positive lead to CON8-2 (PHA).

2. Slowly rotate, by hand, the door motor.

Note: The digital multimeter display should toggle between less than 1 volt and greater than 4
volts.
3. Connect the negative lead to the GND test point, and the positive lead to CON8-3 (PHB).

4. Slowly rotate, by hand, the door motor.

Note: The digital multimeter display should toggle between less than 1 volt and greater than 4
volts.
If both signals, PHA and PHB, toggle as they should then the encoder is working. The door card
may need replacing.

Printed in USA May, 2012 45

Troubleshooting Guide HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Troubleshooting Guide
For assistance, please call 1-866-HELP-TKE.

Problem Possible Causes or Solutions

Doors Run the Opposite Direction 1. Change the hand of the operator by changing the LHO adjustment.
When First Powered Up
2. To verify that the change corrected the problem, press MDO to verify that the doors
move in the open direction.
3. Press MDC to verify that the doors move in the close direction.
4. Save this adjustment change to FLASH.

Door Motor Vibrates When Trying to 1. Verify that the proper motor type is selected in the DCM adjustment.
Move the Door
2. Verify that the motor leads are connected per the Motor Connections Chart below.
Note: The motor and encoder connections must match what is shown in the charts
below. If any of these connections are not correct, unstable operation will result.

Do not change motor or encoder connections to change door direction. To

change door direction, use the LHO Adjustment.
3. Verify that the encoder is connected per the Encoder Connections Chart below.
4. Verify 5 VDC to encoder connector.
• Use a digital multimeter to measure the voltage from CON8-1 to CON8-4. Place
the red probe on CON8-1 and the black probe on CON8-4.
• If the voltage reads less than 4.5 volts, check the fuse.
• If the voltage reads above 4.5 volts, check the encoder signals.
5. Verify that the encoder power fuse F1 on the door card is good.
6. Verify that the encoder works.

Motor Connections
VFD Cable AC Motor DC Motor
Connector-Pin Wire No. Leads Leads

CON10-2 1 1 no connect

CON10-4 2 2 Red

CON10-3 3 3 Black

GND Screw Green Green no connect

Encoder Connections
Connector-Pin Wire Color Signal

CON8-1 Red P5

CON8-2 White PHA

CON8-3 Green PHB

CON8-4 Black GND

46 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Troubleshooting Guide

Problem (Continued) Possible Causes or Solutions

Doors Will Not Open to Fully Open 1. Verify that the DOL limit is adjusted properly, and that the DOL LED comes ON when
Position the magnet is aligned with the hall-effect sensor.
2. Verify that the mechanical stop is set properly and is not interfering with the open
cycle.
3. Verify that the drive arms are setup and aligned properly.

Doors Will Not Close to Fully Closed 1. Verify that the DCL limit is adjusted properly, and that the DCL LED comes ON when
Position the magnet is aligned with the hall-effect sensor.
2. Verify that the mechanical stop is set properly and is not interfering with the close
cycle.
3. Verify that the drive arms are setup and aligned properly.

VBUS LED Will Not Light 1. Verify that the power switch in the operator is in the ON position.
2. Check for 115VAC across pins 1 and 2 of CON11.
3. Check fuse F2 on the door card; Replace if necessary.
4. Verify that the wires for power (those going to CON11) are securely fastened and in
the correct place.

WD LED Will Not Light 1. Verify that power switch in operator that is located on the PC card shelf is in the ON
position.
2. Check fuse F3 on the door card; Replace if necessary.
3. Verify that the wires for power (those going to CON11) are securely fastened and in
the correct place.

DCL or DOL LED Will Not Light Note: The DCL or DOL LEDs will not light unless the magnet cam is aligned with the hall-
effect sensor on the end of the card.
1. Verify proper alignment of the magnetic limit cam with the hall-effect sensor. If not
aligned properly, adjust the magnetic limit cam on the door operator cam shaft.
2. Verify that the DCI, ELI, and LDO adjustments are all set to 0 (zero).
3. Verify that the power switch in the operator is in the ON position.
4. Check fuse F3 on the door card; Replace if necessary.
5. Verify that the wires for power (those going to CON11) are securely fastened and in
the correct place.

Doors Will Not Reverse on Safety Edge 1. Verify that the wires for safety edge signal are securely fastened and in the correct
Activation connector. The safety edge signal wire goes to CON9-5 on the UDC.
2. Verify that the SE signal return wire (G24) is connected to CON9-6.
3. Verify that the signal is getting to the UDC card.
a. Use a digital multimeter to place the black probe on CON9-6 and the red probe on
CON9-5.
b. Activate the safety edge, and verify that the digital multimeter reads less than 2
volts. The safety edge input is active low.
• If the voltage at CON9 is greater than 2 volts, then the wiring in the safety edge enclo-
sure will have to be changed so that the signal goes low when an obstruction is in the
doorway.
• Setting IBM4 to 0 will invert the active state for the SE Input.

MDO Starts to Open Doors, But Doors Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDO is overridden by a close door
Reclose command from the elevator controller.

MDC Starts to Close Doors, But Doors Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDC is overridden by a open door
Reopen command from the elevator controller, or by an active SE signal.

Printed in USA May, 2012 47

Troubleshooting Guide HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Problem (Continued) Possible Causes or Solutions

Doors Will Not Set Up 1. Verify that the motor moves the door in the correct direction when MDC or MDO are
pushed.
2. Verify that the encoder is connected properly.
3. Verify 5 VDC to the encoder connector.
4. Use a digital multimeter to measure the voltage from CON8-1 to CON8-4. Place the
red probe on CON8-1, and the black probe on CON8-4.
• If the voltage reads less than 4.5 volts, check the fuse.
• If the voltage reads above 4.5 volts, check the encoder signals.
5. Verify that the encoder power fuse F1 on the door card is good.
6. Verify that the encoder works.

Doors Will Not Close After Opening, or 1. Verify that the SE signal is not active; The SE signal is active low.
Doors Open Without Command and
2. Use a digital multimeter to place the black probe on CON9-6 and the red probe on
Will Not Close
CON9-5.
3. Activate the safety edge, and verify that the digital multimeter reads less than 2 volts.
Note: If the voltage at the CON9 is greater than 2 volts then the wiring in the safety
edge enclosure will have to be changed so that the signal goes low when an
obstruction is in the door way.

Doors Will Not Move When MDO or 1. Verify that there are no mechanical restrictions or binds.
MDC Is Pushed
2. Verify that the IGBT has not been shut down due to a fault. Check faults and follow the
instructions for the particular faults that are listed. If the fault listed is the IGBT_FAULT,
reset the IGBT power module.
3. If MDO does not work:
a. Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDO is overridden by a close
door command from the elevator controller.
b. Verify that the DOL limit is not active. If it is active, the doors will not open. If on the
DOL limit, move the doors off of the open limit and verify that MDO does cause the
doors to open.
4. Verify that the car is on Inspection Operation. The MDC is overridden by an open door
command from the elevator controller, or by an active SE signal.
5. If MDC does not work:
a. Verify that the DCL limit is not active. If it is active, the doors will not close. If on the
DCL limit, move the doors off of the close limit and verify that MDC does cause the
doors to open.
6. Verify that VBUS LED is ON.
7. Verify that WD LED is ON.
8. Power down the card, remove the connector to the motor, and power up the card.
9. Connect a voltmeter to the motor output pins; be very careful not to short the pins
together.
10. Press MDO or MDC, and verify that there is voltage on the motor output pins.
a. If voltage is present, check the motor wiring. If wiring is good, the motor may be
bad.
b. If no voltage is present, verify that the correct door operator profile is loaded for the
type of door and motor being used. If the correct door operator profile is loaded and
the IGBT is not faulted out, the card may be damaged.

48 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Maintenance

Maintenance
1. Check that the motor mounting bolts are tight.

2. Remove the brush covers (where applicable), blow out the brush holders, check the brushes for
wear, and reinstall the covers.

3. Inspect the operator belts for the following:

a. Cracks or glazing
b. Even wear on both sides of the belt
c. The belts are not bottomed out in the grooves
d. Proper tension (belt slippage).

The following guidelines apply when testing, adjusting, or replacing belts:

• Ideal tension is the lowest tension at which the belt will not slip at peak load.
• All belts in the set should be tested for equal tension by pushing each belt down at the
midpoint between the pulleys (typical deflection is 3/8" with 10 lbf applied).
• If belts require tensioning, check the sheave alignment with a straight edge.
• If belts are replaced on multi-groove sheaves, change the belts as a matched set.

4. Check that all of the linkage bolts are tight.

5. Remove the door operator cover, rotate the door operator by hand, and check the operation of
the DOL and DCL sensors.

6. Check the operation of the gate switch, and make sure that it is adjusted per code.

7. Use a burnishing tool or clean rough paper, and clean the gate switch contacts (if necessary).

8. Replace the door operator cover.

9. Check for excessive bearing wear.

Printed in USA May, 2012 49

Replacement Parts HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

Replacement Parts
3001AY_ HD-11 Door Operator

1
5 6
2 7
4

9
10

50 Vertical Express
HD-11 Door Operator with UIT Replacement Parts

3001AY_ HD-11 Door Operator

(continued)

12 14

16

11 15 13

18

20

19
17

Printed in USA May, 2012 51

Replacement Parts HD-11 Door Operator with UIT

3001AY_ HD-11 Door Operator

(continued)
ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 9779504 591BF1 Motor Assy Door Operator Closed Loop, 115V

9739593 591BJ1 Motor Assy Door Operator Closed Loop, 115V, 1/2 HP
2 9723985 123990 Pivot Arm Assy
3 9876686 67668 Jack Sheave Machining V Groove
4 9814656 114653 Stop Door Operator
5 9842214 750CV1 Sheave Drive Door Operator
6 9749470 77920 Belt Vee 3V 630 Door Operator
7 40148 Bumper Closing Vane Clutch
8 9838820 63882 Idler Arm Assy Adjustable
9 103268 Adjustable Arm (Intermediate)
10 9723997 123992 Adjustable Arm Assy
11 109789 Guard, Lamp
12 9743637 76703 Switch, Light
13 9739555 127196 Switch, Pushbutton
14 9810985 109888 Switch Assy, Inspection
15 9810857 108150 Switch Assy, Run-Stop, Horizontal
16 687BR1 Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter
17 9736254 177AM1 Audible, Signal, Alarm
18 9765841 6300WK1 PCB Assy, SE-Interface
19 9803889 6300PA4 PCB Assy, Universal Door Control
20 9876954 6300HL1 PCB Assy User Interface

(Parts not shown/not labeled in drawing)

21 9875412 850RW1 Tools, Light, Magnetic-Based Trouble Light
22 9781821 78182 Light Socket
23 196ADY1 Bracket, Mounting, PC Board
24 378AW1 Fan Assy, Door Operator
25 286AH37 Connector, Nm, Zinc-Die Cast
26 196ALW1 Bracket, Extender, UIT
27 296KM20 Connector, PCB, Header
28 9863295 220EK1 Cable, Extender, UIT/UDC
29 196AEP1 Bracket, Safety Edge Interface Board

52 Vertical Express
I-2® / I-3® Valve
I-2 / I-3 Valve Contents

I-2 / I-3 Valve

Contents
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Arrival of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Preliminary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Oil Viscosity and Viscosity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Relief Pressure Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Low Pressure Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lowering and Leveling Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Quick Reference Guide for Valve Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Preliminary Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Relief Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Slowdown and Leveling Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Valve-Up Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Valve-Down Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Performance Check with Full Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Final Relief Pressure with Full Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Troubleshooting Table
Up Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sequence of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Printed in USA May, 2012 1

Contents I-2 / I-3 Valve

This page
intentionally
left blank.

2 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions I-2 / I-3 Valve

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment
safety information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

Printed in USA May, 2012 3

I-2 / I-3 Valve Safety Precautions

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety
information on installation and service.

4 Vertical Express
Safety Precautions I-2 / I-3 Valve

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the Vertical Express Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Arrival of Equipment Receiving

Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage. Promptly report all visible damage to the
carrier. All shipping damage claims must be filed with the carrier.

Storing

During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator job site, precautions should be taken to protect
the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture, and temperature extremes.

Handling

The door operator is packaged in a cardboard box and crated. If possible, leave completely crated
when handling.

Printed in USA May, 2012 5

I-2 / I-3 Valve Safety Precautions

This page
intentionally
left blank.

6 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Preliminary Settings

Preliminary Settings
Oil Viscosity and Viscosity Control
• The power unit should be located in a room that is ventilated and heated between 500F
and 900F.
• Adjust the valve when the oil is at its operating temperature of 1000F to 1700F.
• Ensure that the unit performance is checked when the oil temperature is at minimum
heated range of 1000F or above.
• Changes in oil temperature will cause changes in valve behavior.

Be EXTREMELY careful when making adjustments near moving belts. When

operating the elevator from the controller, follow all safety precautions.

Relief Pressure Setting

The I-2/I-3 Valve requires a minimum static system pressure of 90 PSI.

1. Ensure that the car is empty.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Lower the car onto the buffers by opening the manual lowering valve. See Figure 1.

4. Close the manual lowering valve.

5. Install a pressure gauge on the quick connector (located on the far side of the valve).

6. Turn the relief pressure adjustment screw OUT until 5/8” extends beyond the relief assembly
housing, and tighten the locknut.

Manual
Lowering Valve

5/8”
Up Leveling
Adjustment Relief Pressure
Adjustment

Figure 1 - Relief Pressure Setting

Printed in USA May, 2012 7

Preliminary Settings I-2 / I-3 Valve

Preliminary Settings
(continued)

Low Pressure Setting

Note: OUT = Counterclockwise, CCW
IN = Clockwise, CW
1. Turn the low pressure adjustment screw OUT 1 3/4” beyond the cover plate. See Figure 2.

2. Turn the low pressure adjustment screw IN by hand until it touches the regulator piston.

3. Turn the up leveling adjustment screw OUT until it stops.

4. Turn the up leveling adjustment screw IN four (4) turns.

Adjustment Needles

Note: To make adjustments, do not loosen the nuts on the adjustment needle stems. They
should be snug against the valve body at all times.

1. Turn the up start, up stop, and up slowdown adjustment needles IN to the fully closed position.
See Figure 2.

2. Turn the up start needle OUT nine (9) turns.

3. Turn the up stop needle OUT three (3) turns.

Note: The up slowdown needle should remain closed.

Lowering & Leveling

Speed Adjustment

Low Pressure
Adjustment
Down Slowdown
Adjustment

Down Stop
Adjustment

Up Leveling
Adjustment
Down Start
Adjustment
Up Slowdown
Up Stop Adjustment
Up Start
Adjustment Adjustment

Figure 2 - Low Pressure Setting

8 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Preliminary Settings

Lowering and Leveling Speed Setting

To avoid damage to the piston face and seat, never turn the lowering and leveling
speed adjustment unless the car is resting on the buffers or the car is in motion.

1. With the car set on the buffers, adjust the lowering and leveling screw so that 3/4“ extends
beyond the valve body. See Figure 3.

2. Make sure the flat end of the screw is pointed 450F counterclockwise to the tank return line.

3. Tighten the locknut.

3/4”

Tank Return Line

45º

Flat End
of Screw

Figure 3 - Lowering and Leveling Speed Setting

Adjustment Needles

Note: To make adjustments, do not loosen the nuts on the adjustment needle stems. They
should be snug against the pilot body assembly at all times.

1. Turn the down start, down stop, and the down slowdown adjustment IN to the fully closed
position.

2. Turn the down start adjustment OUT nine (9) turns.

3. Turn the down stop adjustment OUT ten (10) turns.

Note: The down slowdown adjustment must remain closed at this time.

Printed in USA May, 2012 9

 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve

VALVE ADJUSTMENT EFFECTS

Quick Reference Guide for Valve Adjustments

MANUAL LOWERING
IN = CLOSES
UP FAST UP SLOW DOWN SLOW DOWN FAST
IN = SOFTER SLOWDOWN
VERY SENSITIVE ADJUSTMENT, SET IT LAST
START SENSITIVE ADJUSTMENT IN = INCREASES LEVELING ZONE**
IN = SMOOTHER START IN = SHORTER LEVELING ZONE *
LOW PRESSURE DOES NOT AFFECT STOP IN = INCREASE IN LEVELING SPEED
SLOW IN = LOWERS LEVELING SPEED
IN = CLOSES REGULATOR MUST BE MORE OPEN THAN UP STOP DOWN IN = MORE ABRUPT SLOWDOWN
PISTON (MAY LIMIT HIGH SPEED SLOW
IN CONJUNCTION WITH DOWN
STOP) AFFECTS ALL DOWN SIDE ADJUSTMENTS
STOP SET IT FIRST AND DO NOT CHANGE.
START IN = SOFTER STOP
IN = SOFTER STOP & FIRMER START
IN = SMOOTHER START IN = FIRMER START
IF SET TOO SOFT MAY
HAS NO EFFECT ON IN = SMOOTHER SLOWDOWN
OVERSHOOT FLOOR STOP
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS IN = HIGHER LEVELING SPEED
AFTER PROPER LEVELING SPEED IS SET, THEN
FINE TUNE STOP, THEN FINE TUNE START
DOWN SPEED &
UP PILOT DOWN PILOT DOWN LEVELING
Quick Reference Guide for Valve Adjustments

UP LEVELING CAN’T ADJUST WITH LOAD ON THE

IN = INCREASES LEVELING SPEED PISTON - THE CAR MUST BE MOVING
& SOFTENS SLOWDOWN UP OR DOWN OR
ON BUFFERS.
IN = REDUCES SPEED (HIGH DOWN
* UP LEVELING AND UP SLOWDOWN SPEED MUST BE ADJUSTED IN
AFFECT EACH OTHER. 1/2 TURNS)
WHEN ONE IS CHANGED,
FOR LEVELING - ADJUSTMENT IS
THE OTHER IS ALSO CHANGED. RELIEF VERY SENSITIVE -
IN = INCREASES RELIEF PRESSURE USE SMALL INCREMENTS
** DOWN LEVELING IS AFFECTED
BY DOWN SLOWDOWN - RECHECK
LEVELING AFTER MAKING FINAL
SLOWDOWN SETTING

10
I-2 / I-3 Valve Preliminary Adjustments

Preliminary Adjustments

When operating the elevator from the controller, follow all safety precautions.

1. Ensure that the car is empty and the manual lowering valve is closed.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Disable the up slow solenoid by disconnecting the solenoid wire from the controller. See the
appropriate controller diagrams.

4. Disable the up fast solenoid by placing the controller on Inspection Operation.

Note: The type of controller will determine how Inspection Operation is accomplished.

5. Turn the power on, and start the motor.

6. Turn the low pressure adjustment IN just until the car starts to move.

7. Turn the low pressure adjustment OUT until the car movement stops.

8. After the car stops, turn the low pressure adjustment OUT an additional one-half (1/2) turn.

9. Use these instructions on valves marked with SP on the cover plate or the valve nameplate:
Note: The car must be stopped and started to check the setting.
a. Turn the low pressure adjustment OUT three (3) turns.
b. Check for too much time delay between the motor starting and the car movement.
c. Turn the low pressure adjustment IN until excessive delay is eliminated.

10. Tighten the locknut.

11. Stop the motor, and turn the power off.

12. Remove any jumpers that may have been used.

13. Reconnect the up slow solenoid wire to the controller.

Relief Pressure Adjustment

1. Close the line shut-off valve, and install a pressure gauge.

2. With the controller on Inspection Operation, turn the power on, start the motor, and read the
pressure.

Stop the power unit IMMEDIATELY if pressure exceeds 625 PSI.

3. Adjust the relief valve to relieve at the pressure indicated on the power unit nameplate. See
Figure 4 on page 12.

4. Tighten the locknut, and Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

5. Relieve the jack pressure by opening the manual lowering valve.

6. Close the manual lowering valve.

Printed in USA May, 2012 11

Preliminary Adjustments I-2 / I-3 Valve

Relief Pressure Adjustment

(continued)

Manual
Lowering
Valve

Relief Pressure Valve:

IN (CW) = Increases Relief Pressure
OUT (CCW) = Decreases Relief Pressure

Power Unit
Relief
Nameplate
Pressure
Valve

Figure 4 - Relief Pressure Adjustment

7. Turn on the power, and recheck the relief pressure.

8. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect, and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

9. Open the line shut-off valve.

Slowdown and Leveling Speed Adjustment

1. Turn the up slowdown adjustment OUT ten (10) turns (this action ensures that the car does not
initially start up). See Figure 5 on page 13 for all steps in this procedure.

2. With the car on Inspection Operation, start the car up. Slowly turn the up slowdown adjustment
screw IN until the car moves at 10 to 12 fpm.

3. Recheck the up leveling speed.

4. Verify that the down stop adjustment screw has been turned OUT ten (10) turns (this action
ensures the car does not initially start down).

5. Place the car on Inspection Operation, and start the car down. Slowly turn the down stop
adjustment screw IN until the car runs down at 15-20 fpm.

12 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Preliminary Adjustments

Slowdown and Leveling Speed Adjustment

(continued)

6. Turn the lowering and leveling speed adjustment by less than one-quarter turn increments, to
adjust the leveling speed to 10-12 fpm. Pause between each change.

Note: If the lowering and leveling speed adjustment is turned too far (more than one-quarter
turn) the car will lock in the down direction. If this happens, run the car up on Inspection
Operation while another person in the machine room turns the lowering and leveling
speed adjustment screw OUT a small amount.

7. Tighten the locknut.

8. If the car does not stop, turn the down stop adjustment screw OUT until the stop is positive.

9. Recheck the down leveling speed.

Lowering & Leveling

Speed Adjustment

Low Pressure
Adjustment
Down Slowdown
Adjustment

Down Stop
Adjustment

Up Leveling
Adjustment
Down Start
Adjustment
Up Slowdown
Up Stop Adjustment
Up Start
Adjustment Adjustment

Figure 5 - Slowdown and Leveling Speed Adjustment

Printed in USA May, 2012 13

Final Adjustments I-2 / I-3 Valve

Final Adjustments The manufacturing presets of the valve adjustments are attached to the inside of the controller.
These values ensure movement of the car and also reduce final adjustment time. Perform these
adjustments in the order given because they affect each other.
To be adjusted, the I-2/I-3 Valve requires a minimum static system pressure
of 90 PSI.

Valve-Up Section Up Slowdown and Up Leveling Speed

1. Verify that the car is empty.
2. Place the controller on Automatic Operation, and send the car to the lowest landing.
3. Run the car to the floor above and observe the leveling zone.
4. Adjust the up slowdown for 3 to 4 inches of leveling.

Up Slowdown - Adjust for 3 to 4 inches of Leveling

Shorten Leveling Zone
IN (cw) Increase Leveling Speed
Softer Up Slowdown

Each time the up slowdown is adjusted, the up leveling speed must be rechecked.

5. Run the car on Inspection Operation, and adjust the up leveling speed adjuster. The leveling
speed should be 10-12 fpm.

Up Leveling -10 to 12 fpm

Increase Leveling Speed
IN (cw)
Softer Up Slowdown

When operating the car from the controller, ensure all safety precautions are
followed.

6. Place the car on Automatic Operation.

7. Check the leveling zone for 3 to 4 inches, and the leveling speed for 10 to 12 fpm.
8. Continue to adjust the up slowdown needle and the up leveling adjuster until the desired
performance is achieved.

Up Stop and Up Start

Because the up stop adjustment affects the up start adjustment, it must be adjusted first.
1. Adjust the up stop for a soft but positive stop.
2. Adjust the up start for a smooth but positive start.
3. Check to be certain full up speed is reached on a one-floor run, which may require the up start
to be more positive.
4. Slightly alter the slowdown adjustment to achieve optimum performance, if necessary.

Up Stop Up Start

IN (cw) Stop Softer Start Smoother

Start Firmer Limit High Speed

14 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Final Adjustments

Valve-Down Section Lowering Speed

1. Place the car on Automatic Operation.
2. Set the lowering speed.
a. Use an empty car, and turn the lowering speed adjustment in one-half turn increments.
b. After each adjustment, leave the flat end of the screw pointed 450F to the tank return line.

Lowering Speed
One-half Turn Increments
OUT (ccw)
Increase Lowering Speed

If no speed change occurs with one full turn on the lowering speed adjuster, DO NOT
CONTINUE TO TURN IT OUT. Check for a stop open wider than a start, or a mechani-
cal piston binding.

Down Leveling Speed and Down Stop

The down leveling speed and the down stop adjustment must be performed together since the
down stop adjustment affects the down leveling speed. The down leveling speed, however, does
not affect the down stop adjustment.
1. Place the controller on Inspection Operation.

2. Adjust the down stop for a positive stop.

3. Adjust the down leveling speed to 10-12 fpm.

4. Tighten the locknut on the down leveling speed adjustment.

5. Recheck the down leveling speed.

Down Stop
Stop Softer
IN (cw)
Increase Leveling Speed
Down Leveling Speed
Less than one-quarter turn increments
OUT (ccw)
Increase Leveling Speed

Down Start

1. Place the controller on Automatic Operation.

2. Adjust the down start adjustment to obtain a smooth start.

Note: Ensure that the car achieves full speed on a one-floor run. If not, make the down start
more positive.

Down Start
IN (cw) Start Smoother

Printed in USA May, 2012 15

Final Adjustments I-2 / I-3 Valve

Valve-Down Section
(continued) Down Slowdown
The effect of the down slowdown adjustment is the opposite of the previous adjustments. Turning
OUT on the down slowdown adjustment will shorten the leveling zone. Turning IN on the down slow-
down adjustment will lengthen the leveling zone. Make this adjustment in small increments as soon
as a change is observed in the leveling zone. The car will overshoot the landing if the adjustment is
turned OUT too far.

1. Turn the down slowdown adjustment OUT in small increments until the car has a leveling zone
of 3 to 4 inches.

2. It may be necessary to slightly alter the point in the hoistway where the slowdown is initiated to
achieve optimum valve and car performance.
Note: This action is usually accomplished by either switch location or selector settings.

Performance Check with Full Load

1. Place a capacity load on the car.
2. Run the car on Automatic Operation, and the check performance at all floors. All valve
functions will become firmer at upper landings. If adjustments are necessary, it will affect the
empty car performance.
Notes:
• The down leveling speed will increase and the down leveling zone will be shorter. It may
be necessary to change the down slowdown adjustment to be certain there is at least two
(2) inches of leveling.
• If necessary, turn IN on the down slowdown to increase the leveling zone.
• The up leveling speed will increase. The up leveling zone will change between no load and
full load. Do not change any adjustments made with no load if there is at least one (1)
inch of up leveling zone with a full load.
• If necessary, turn OUT on the up slowdown adjustment to increase the up leveling zone.
3. Verify that the car is obtaining full speed in both directions on a one-floor run.
4. Record the working pressure in the up direction.
Note: The working pressure value will be used in the next procedure.
5. Remove the capacity load from the car.

Final Relief Pressure with Full Load

1. Place the controller on Inspection Operation, and close the line shut-off valve.

2. Start the pump, and read the relief pressure.

3. Add 25% to the working pressure recorded in Step 4 of the previous procedure, and set the
relief valve to relieve at this new pressure value.

4. Stop the power unit, and tighten the locknut on the relief pressure adjustment.

5. Recheck the relief pressure.

Stop the power unit IMMEDIATELY if pressure exceeds 625 PSI.

6. Open the line shut-off valve, and place the car on Automatic Operation.

16 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Table - Up Operation

Troubleshooting Verify the following list before using the troubleshooting tables.
See also “Troubleshooting Flowcharts” in the reference material section starting on page 20.
1. No binding in the hoistway.
2. The proper voltage is being supplied to the power unit.
3. All valve adjustments have been completed as recommended.
4. All vee belts on the power unit have the proper tension.
5. There is no oil on the belts to cause slippage.

Troubleshooting Table - Up Operation

Problem Solution

Pump runs, but the car does not run at high speed. 1. Check that the line shut-off valve is fully open.
2. Check for the correct motor rotation.
3. Check for the correct relief pressure setting.
4. Check that the up fast solenoid pulls IN.*
5. Turn OUT on the up start adjustment.
6. Turn IN on the up stop adjustment.
7. Make sure that the regulator piston is free.
8. Make sure that the up pilot piston is free.

Car will not slowdown to leveling speed. 1. Check that the up slow solenoid pulls IN.*
2. Check that the up fast solenoid drops OUT.*
3. Turn OUT on the up slowdown adjustment.
4. Check the up leveling speed. Set for 10 to 12 fpm.
5. Make sure that the regulator piston is free.
6. Make sure that the pressure control piston is free.

Car will not make a hydraulic stop. 1. Check that the up slow solenoid drops OUT.*
2. Check for the correct low pressure adjustment.
3. Turn OUT the up stop adjustment.
4. Make sure that the regulator piston is free.
5. Make sure that the up pilot piston is free.

Acceleration, deceleration, leveling speed, or stop is 1. Make sure that the check valve piston is free.
erratic. 2. Make sure the spring on the regulator piston does not bind.

Leveling speed slows down or car stalls after slowdown 1. Turn IN on the slowdown adjustment.
(check if releveling speed slows down). 2. Replace the leveling adjuster/strainer.

* Check the solenoids for voltage and for damage to the solenoid tube.
Check the plunger for binding.
Do not reseat.
If the seat in the pilot body is damaged, replace the pilot.

Printed in USA May, 2012 17

Troubleshooting Table - Down Operation I-2 / I-3 Valve

Troubleshooting Table - Down Operation

Problem Solution

Car will not lower 1. Check that the line shut-off valve is fully open.
2. Check the solenoids.*
3. Turn OUT the down start adjustment.
4. Turn IN on the down stop adjustment.

Slow or bouncy down start 1. Turn OUT on the down start adjustment.
2. Turn IN on the down stop adjustment.
3. Bleed the jack of air or loosen packing, if possible.

Abrupt down start 1. Turn IN on the down start adjustment.

2. Turn OUT on the down stop adjustment.

Car will not stop when started down 1. Tighten the manual lowering valve.
2. Turn OUT on the down stop adjustment.
3. Check if the solenoid valve is not closing (residual magnetism).*

Down stop too soft or bouncy 1. Turn OUT on the down stop adjustment.
2. Bleed the jack of air or loosen packing, if possible

Down stop rough 1. Turn IN fully on the down slowdown adjustment.

2. Turn IN on the down stop adjustment.
3. Turn OUT, in small increments, on the down slowdown.

Leveling bouncy 1. Check the leveling speed. Set for 10 to 12 fpm.

2. Bleed the jack of air or loosen packing, if possible.

Car will not slowdown to leveling speed 1. Check the down fast solenoid.*
2. The down slowdown adjustment may be open too much (too soft).
3. The leveling speed may be set too fast. Set for 10 to 12 fpm.

Slowdown rough Turn OUT on the down slowdown adjustment.

Car settles (leaks) down 1. Run car to lowest position.

2. Inspect oil line, jack, and power unit for leaks.
3. Close the line valve.

Car settles (leaks) down and the oil level in the tank is 1. Tightly close the manual lowering valve, and run the car to the top.
less than when first set. 2. Shut off the power and record the car location.
3. Wait 15 minutes, record the car location, and note the amount the
car has settled “X”.
4. Let car sit for 8 hours, record the car location, and note the amount
the car has settled “Y”.
5. If “Y” is not more than 25 times “X” arrange for homing to the lowest
floor and verify proper performance.
6. Close down the first car location, wait 15 minutes and record the car
location. Note the amount the car has settled “Z”.
7. If “Z” is less than “X”, replace the down pilot body and adjust the
down functions.
8. Remove and examine the lowering and check valve pistons.
9. If the piston seat is damaged, reseat the piston and verify proper
operation.
10. If the piston seat is not damaged, replace the valve and adjust the
job.

* Check the solenoids for voltage and for damage to the solenoid tube.
Check the plunger for binding.
Do not reseat.
If the seat in the pilot body is damaged, replace the pilot.

18 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Replacement Parts

Replacement Parts

6 4

5
9

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 148323 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-2, 125 GPM EP Units

137744 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-2, 120-215 GPM Units
137743 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-2, 30-100 GPM Units
189131 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-2F, 125 GPM EP Units
189128 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-2F, 120-215 GPM Units
189127 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-2F, 30-100 GPM Units
114874 Valve Main Body Assembly, I-3, Down
2 886BC1 Valve Pilot Assembly Down
3 886BD1 Valve Pilot Assembly Up
4 9781493 124213 Gasket, Down Pilot
5 9781481 124214 Gasket, Up Pilot
6 606DG1 Nameplate Valve
7 141EC2 Valve Faceplate, I-2, I-2F
141ED2 Valve Faceplate, I-3
8 117327 Indicator Adjustment
9 9824467 799AB1 Strainer Assembly, Stainless Steel

Printed in USA May, 2012 19

Reference Material I-2 / I-3 Valve

Reference Material
The material included in this section is only for reference and was obtained from the previous publication.
The Technical Publications Department does not update or maintain this information.

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Start

Is this a new job? Yes

Has all
No construction work Yes
been completed?

Has car been Are you now

Yes running No adjusting the job? Yes
satisfactorily?

No
Yes Is the power unit No
wired?
Adjust Job

No
Has job been Yes
Have any adjusted?
Yes adjustments been Complete Installation
moved?

No
No A
Yes Is power available? Adjust Job Flowchart 3
A
Flowchart 3

No
Adjust Job

Contact contractor
for power.

Is static or down
pressure at least Yes
90 PSI?

No

Add weight until

A
pressure is at least
90 PSI. Flowchart 2

Flowchart 1

20 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Will the car run in both Yes

directions?

No
Turn over to construction
crew.

Adjust only thru initial

adjustments.

Turn over to construction

crew.

Flowchart 2

Printed in USA May, 2012 21

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

Up Operation Down Operation

Problem Direction

Does the car settle

Yes
(leak) down?

A
Flowchart 18
Run car to lowest position. No

A
Flowchart 5

Is the oil level in the

tank less than originally Yes
set?

No

Close manual lowering Inspect Oil line and power

valve tightly. unit for leaks. Correct

Run the car to the top.

Does the car still

Shut off the power. Yes
settle?

Close line valve.

Record car location.
No

Verify proper performance.

After 15 minutes, record car
location

Record amount car has Does the car still

Yes
settled (X). settle?

Check jack for leaks.

Let car sit for 8 hours and
then record car location.
No

Flowchart 4

Flowchart 3

22 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Record amount car has

settled (Y).
Close down start record car After 15 minutes, record car
location. location.

Record amount car has

settled (Z).
Is Y more than 25
Yes
times X?

Is Z less than X? Yes

No

Arrange for homing to

No Replace down pilot body.
lowest floor.

Remove and examine

lowering piston.

Verify proper performance. No Adjust down functions.

Is the piston seat

Yes
damaged?

Reseat piston.

No

Remove and
examine check piston. Verify proper performance.

No

Is piston seat
Yes
damaged?

Reseat piston.
No

Replace valve.

Verify proper performance.

Adjust job.

Flowchart 4

Printed in USA May, 2012 23

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A R

Set up a down call

Does the car lower at

Yes
contract speed?

Does the car lower at A

Yes No
all?
Flowchart 12

No Does the car lower at Yes

less than contract
speed?

A
Is the line valve open? Yes No
Flowchart 9

Adjust lowering speed.

No

Open line valve.

Is down fast
Verify proper performance.
energized?

Does the car operate Yes

OK?

No
A
No Verify proper performance. Flowchart 7

Does the car lower at Yes Is there voltage on Yes

all? coil?

R No Replace solenoid coil.

No
Flowchart 5
Not a valve problem.

Flowchart 6

Flowchart 5

24 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Does the car operate Yes

OK?

No

Verify proper performance.

Does the car lower at Yes

all?

No

A R
Flowchart 7 Flowchart 5

Flowchart 6

Printed in USA May, 2012 25

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

Turn off power.

Close manual lowering

valve.

Record the number of turns

that the start and stop
adjustments are open.

Was start open wider

Yes
than stop?

No

Are flats on leveling

Put stop at original setting. Yes
speed adjustment at
45_?

Replace valve.
No
Turn power on.

Turn to 45_. *

Open start wider than stop.

Adjust job.

Yes Does car lower?

* NOTE
Remove Pressure
From Down Valve.

Adjust to proper operation. No

A
Flowchart 8

Flowchart 7

26 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Yes Is stop more than two

turns open?

Turn stop to two

turns open.

No
Yes Does car lower?

No

Adjust to proper operation.

Is start more than four Yes

turns open?

No

Open start wider. Replace pilot body.

Adjust down section.

Does car lower? Yes

No

Replace valve. Adjust to proper operation.

Adjust job.

Flowchart 8

Printed in USA May, 2012 27

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

Does car lower at

Yes
leveling speed?
Open down start one turn.

No
Is the down fast Yes
solenoid ener-
gized? Does the car run
Does car lower at Yes faster than leveling
Yes speed?
less than leveling
speed?
B No
Record the number of turns
that the start and stop Flowchart 10
adjustments are open.
Replace solenoid.
No

Was start open

Yes
wider than stop?
Verify proper performance.

No

Open start wider than stop. Is there voltage on Yes

coil.
No

Replace coil.
Is down speed
adjustment handle Yes
1/2” out of cap?
No
Replace valve.
Verify proper performance.
No

Set at 3/4”.
Not a valve problem.

Adjust job.

B
A
Flowchart 10
Flowchart 10

Page 9

Flowchart 9

28 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

A B

Does the car lower at Yes

more than leveling
speed?

Run the car down on

No inspection.

Replace valve.

Yes Is down stop abrupt?

Adjust job.

No Turn out on down stop and

Turn in on down stop.
down start.

Is down stop too Yes

smooth?

Is lowering speed OK?

B Is lowering speed OK? Yes

No
Flowchart 11

No

No

Turn out on down start.

Is lowering speed OK? Yes

Adjust lowering speed.

B
No
Flowchart 11
A

Flowchart 11

Flowchart 10

Printed in USA May, 2012 29

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A B

Is lowering speed OK? Yes

No

Yes Is down start OK?

Replace valve.

No

Adjust job.
Adjust down start.

Does slowdown feel

Yes
OK?

No

Adjust slowdown.

Does empty car have

Yes
3” or 4” of leveling?

No

Move slowdown signal to

get 3” to 4” of leveling.

Verify proper performance.

Flowchart 11

30 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Does the car stop Does the car reach

Yes Yes
properly at each floor? floor level at each
floor?

No No

D
Does the car stop Does the car reach
Yes Flowchart 13 Yes
properly at any floor/ floor level at any floor?

No
No

Does the car stop

Yes
above the floor?

No

Does the car level at Yes

all?

Does the car stop

Yes
below the floor?
No B
Replace down side Flowchart 13
strainer.
No C
Flowchart 15
No
C
Flowchart 13

Does the car stop

Yes
properly at each floor?

A
No
Flowchart 13

C
Flowchart 13

Flowchart 12

Printed in USA May, 2012 31

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A C D

B
Does the car
stop properly Yes Does stop feel
Yes
at any floor? satisfactory?

Not a valve problem.

Set all slowdown
No No
signals the same
distance from the floor.

Run the car down on

inspection. Is stop too
Yes
Verify proper hard?
performance.

No
Does the car
run at 10 to 12 Yes
FPM?

Is stop too
Yes
soft?
No

Adjust leveling speed.

No

Turn out on stop

adjustment.

Is stop a
Yes
double-stop?

Turn in on stop
adjustment.

No

Yes Is stop OK?

No

A B C D

Flowchart 14 Flowchart 14 Flowchart 14 Flowchart 14

Flowchart 13

32 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

A B C D

Run the car at full speed. Replace valve.

Adjust job.

Yes Is start to hard?

No

Yes Is start too soft?

Turn in on start adjustment.

Turn out on start No

adjustment.

Is start a double-start. Yes

No

Is start OK? Yes

No

Replace down pilot

assembly.

Adjust job.
A A
Flowchart 15 Flowchart 16

Flowchart 14

Printed in USA May, 2012 33

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A C

Yes Is slowdown too hard? Is down slow solenoid Yes

energized?

Open manual lowering

No No
valve.

Yes Is slowdown too soft? Yes Is there voltage on the

coil?

Turn out on slowdown

adjustment?
Replace coil. Does car lower? Yes
No

Turn in on slowdown
adjustment.
No Not a valve problem.
No

A
Verify proper
performance. Flowchart 7

Yes Is slowdown OK?

Yes Is voltage OK?

No

Does car have 2” to 3” Yes Replace solenoid.

of leveling at each Replace down pilot
floor? assembly. No

Not a valve problem.

No
Adjust job.

Adjust location of Close manual lowering

slowdown signal. valve.

Verify proper Verify proper

performance. performance.

Flowchart 15

34 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Install pressure gauge

at bleed plug at jack.

Record pressure as
empty car runs up and
down past a given
point.

Is difference in
pressure more than Yes
25 PSI?

No

Run car from bottom to

Remove and examine top. Record pressure
lowering piston. every 3’ 0” as car runs
up.

Did pressure
Is distance from seat increase and then
Yes Yes
to bottom of slots drop back at any one
more than 1/8”? spot?

Run car down. Record

Replace lowering
pressure every 3” 0” as
piston.
car runs down.
No

Replace valve. Did pressure

No decrease and then Yes
climb at any one
spot?
Verify proper
performance.

No Jack is probably dog-

legged at that point.

Adjust job.

A B
Flowchart 17 Flowchart 17

Flowchart 16

Printed in USA May, 2012 35

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A B

Does pressure at top

Yes
and at bottom differ
more than 20 PSI?

Jack and rails are probably

not aligned with each other.
No

Verify and replumb jack and/

or realign jack and rails.

Flowchart 17

36 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Register an Up call.

Does the car run Up

Yes
OK at high speed?

No
Does the car level Up
Yes
OK?
A
Flowchart 19
Put car on inspection.

No

Yes Is Up slow solenoid Is Up inspection speed Yes

energized? 8 to 20 FPM?

Disconnect Up slow
solenoid.
A
No No
Flowchart 26

Is there voltage on the Flowchart 26

Yes Run car Up on inspection.
coil?

No

Yes Does car stand still?

Not a valve problem.

Reconnect Up slow
Replace coil.
solenoid.

No
Verify proper performance. Place car on automatic.

A B
Flowchart 30 Flowchart 19

Flowchart 18

Printed in USA May, 2012 37

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A B

Is stop more than one

Does car move at all? Yes Yes
turn open?

No A No
Flowchart 23

Set stop at two turns open.

Is motor running? Yes

No

No Is the pump turning? Yes

Does car stand still? Yes

Not a valve problem?

No
Reconnect Up slow
No
solenoid.
Correct drive.
B
Flowchart 23
Adjust unit.

Is Up fast solenoid
Yes
energized?
Verify proper performance.

Verify proper performance.

No

Turn off power.

Is there voltage on the

Yes
coil?

Record the number of turns

No start and stop adjustment
Replace coil. are opened.

Not a valve problem.

A
Verify proper performance.
Flowchart 20

Flowchart 19

38 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Was start open wider

Yes
than stop?

No

Replace valve.

Set stop at original settings.

Adjust job.

Open start 3 turns wider

than stop.

Yes Does car run Up?

Adjust valve.

No

Replace Up side
strainer.

Yes Does car run Up?

Adjust valve.

No

Is stop more than two

Yes
turns open?

Set stop at two turns.

No

A B
Flowchart 21 Flowchart 21

Flowchart 20

Printed in USA May, 2012 39

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A B

Yes Does car run Up?

Adjust valve. No

Yes Is start more than four

turns open?

No

Open start to more than four

turns.

Does car run Up? Yes

No Adjust valve.

Does relief adjustment

Yes have less than 5/8” out
side main nut?

No

Turn in on relief adjustment

until less than 5/8” sticks out
from main nut.

A
B
Flowchart 22 Flowchart 22

Flowchart 21

40 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

A B

Does car run Up? Yes

Adjust valve.
No

Does pilot piston move Yes

freely?

No Yes Is spring broken?

Examine piston and spring.

No

Is spring broken? Yes

No Replace spring.

Replace piston.

Does car run Up? Yes

Adjust valve.

No

Replace valve.

Adjust job.

Flowchart 22

Printed in USA May, 2012 41

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

Is Up slow
Yes
energized?

No

Should Up slow be Yes

energized?

Is Up fast
Yes
energized?
No A
Flowchart 26
B Not a valve problem.
Open Up start two full
turns. No

Back off on low

pressure while pump is
running.

Yes Does car run at full

speed?

Will car stand still? Yes

Adjust valve.

No Adjust low pressure.

No

Open Up stop until car

stands still or to a max.
of 6 turns.
Does car stand
Yes
Is stop more than still?
Yes
two turns open?

Reconnect Up slow
Will car stand still? Yes
solenoid.

Close stop to two turns

open.

Reconnect Up slow
No
No solenoid.
Adjust valve.
No

Adjust valve.
B A A C
Flowchart 24 Flowchart 24 Flowchart 22 Flowchart 24

Flowchart 23

42 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

A B C

Close start.

Does car run at full Yes

speed?

Does car stand

No Yes
still?

No
Adjust valve.
Replace up fast
solenoid.

Does relief have

less than 5/8” Yes
outside main nut?

Does car operate

Yes
OK?
No
No

Turn in on relief. Adjust valve.

No

Does car run

Yes Replace valve.
faster?

Adjust valve. No Adjust job.

Does pilot piston

Yes
move freely?

No

A B
Flowchart 25 Flowchart 25

Flowchart 24

Printed in USA May, 2012 43

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A B

Examine piston and spring.

Is spring broken? Yes

No

Replace piston. Replace spring.

Yes Does car run OK?

Adjust valve.
No

Replace valve.

Adjust job.

Flowchart 25

44 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Put car on inspection.

Does the car run faster Yes

than leveling speed?

No Is up fast energized? Yes

Is slowdown more than Yes Not a valve problem.

three turns open? No

Set slowdown two turns

Close up start adjustment.
open.

Does car run at Does the car run faster

No Yes Yes
leveling speed? than leveling speed?

No Replace valve.

Adjust valve.

No

Adjust job.

Is up leveling speed
adjusted in less than Yes
four turns?
Replace up fast solenoid.

Set at four turns in.

No

Verify proper performance.

A B
Flowchart 27 Flowchart 27

Flowchart 26

Printed in USA May, 2012 45

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

A B

Set up slowdown at ten

turns open.

Turn in on slowdown as
pump runs.

Does car run at

Yes
leveling speed?

NO Adjust valve.

Take car off of inspection.

Check leveling speed after

full speed run.

Yes Is leveling speed OK?

NO

Is leveling speed too

Yes
fast?

NO
Replace valve.

A
Adjust job.
Flowchart 28

Flowchart 27

46 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Does relief adjustment

Yes have less than 5/8”
outside main nut?

No

Turn in on relief until less

than 5/8” sticks out main
nut.

Open slowdown to ten turns

open.

Turn in on slowdown
adjustment as pump runs.

Does car run at

Yes
leveling speed?

No Adjust valve.

Is relief spring broken? Yes

Replace spring.
No

check strainer on up leveling

speed adjustment.
Adjust valve.

A
Flowchart 29

Flowchart 28

Printed in USA May, 2012 47

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

Is strainer clean? Yes

No

Replace valve.

Clean or replace strainer.

Adjust job.

Adjust valve.

Flowchart 29

48 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Does car stop

Yes properly at each
floor?

Run car on inspection. No

Does car stop

properly at any Yes
floor?
Does stop feel OK? Yes

Not a valve problem.

Set all slowdown
No
signals the same
No distance from the floor.

Does car have

Adjust stop. more than 3” to 4” Yes
of leveling?

Is leveling speed
No Yes
less than 10 FPM?
Take car off inspection.

Does slowdown
Yes
feel OK?
Is leveling speed
Yes adjustment strainer
Does start feel clean?
Yes No
OK?

No

Set all slowdown No

No signals so car has 3” to
Verify proper 4” of leveling.
performance.
A Adjust slowdown. Clean strainer.
Flowchart 32

Does car level at

Yes
10 to 12 FPM?
Verify proper
performance.

No

A B C

Flowchart 31 Flowchart 32 Flowchart 32

Flowchart 30

Printed in USA May, 2012 49

Troubleshooting Flowcharts I-2 / I-3 Valve

Does stop feel OK? Yes

No

Adjust stop.

Does stop feel OK? Yes

No

A Verify proper performance.

Flowchart 22

Flowchart 31

50 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Troubleshooting Flowcharts

A B C

Is start too slow? Yes Is leveling speed

OK?

No
Is up side strainer
Yes
No OK?
Adjust leveling speed.

Is start slower with

No Yes
five people on car?
Was slowdown or
leveling speed
adjustment moved Yes
more than one
turn?
Is relief spring OK? Yes
No
A

Flowchart 26
No
Clean strainer.
No

Replace spring.
Verify proper
performance.

Verify proper
Set relief pressure.
performance.

Is start OK? Yes

No

Verify proper
Adjust start.
performance.

Flowchart 32

Printed in USA May, 2012 51

Sequence of Events I-2 / I-3 Valve

Sequence of Events
Up Valve Section The up valve section consists of an up leveling speed adjustment, a check valve piston, a regulator
piston, and a relief valve.
The valve provides these functions for the car in the Up cycle:
• Acceleration to full speed
• Slowdown to leveling speed
• Hydraulic stopping
• High-pressure relief

Sequence of Events
1. To start the car, the pump starts and the up fast solenoid energizes. See Figure 6 on page 52
and Figure 7 on page 53.
2. The regulator piston is held open by its spring and also the pump pressure on the face of the
piston against the low pressure adjustment. At the beginning, all of the oil will bypass to the
tank past the regulator piston, through the up start adjustment, and to the up stop adjustment.
3. The up start adjustment is open more than the up stop adjustment, making pressure build
behind the regulator piston and causes it to move toward the closed position. The open
amount of the up start adjustment governs how fast the regulator piston moves and how rap-
idly the car starts.
4. As the regulator piston closes, pressure from the pump builds up in the valve and causes the
check valve piston to open. This action allows oil to flow from the pump into the jack.

Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw

High-Pressure
Relief Pilot
TANK MAIN FLOW
Up Slow Solenoid
(Closed) CONTROL FLOW

Up Slowdown
Adjustment Regulator
Piston

Low
Pressure
Adjustment

Pressure Control
Piston

Up Stop
Adjustment

Up Pilot Piston

Up Fast Solenoid
(Open)

Up Start Adjustment

PUMP JACK
Check Valve
Up Leveling Speed Adjustment Piston

Figure 6 - Up Start Diagram

52 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Sequence of Events

Up Valve Section
(continued)

Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw

High-Pressure
Relief Pilot
MAIN FLOW
Up Slow Solenoid
(Closed) TANK CONTROL FLOW

Up Slowdown
Adjustment Regulator
Piston

Low
Pressure
Adjustment

Pressure Control
Piston

Up Stop
Adjustment

Up Pilot Piston

Up Fast Solenoid
(Open)

Up Start Adjustment
PUMP JACK
Check Valve
Up Leveling Speed Adjustment Piston

Figure 7 - Full Speed Diagram

Printed in USA May, 2012 53

Sequence of Events I-2 / I-3 Valve

High-pressure Relief Sequence of Events

1. The oil is transmitted to the high-pressure pilot. See Figure 8.

2. The movement allows the oil in back of the regulator piston and at the high-pressure
adjustment to escape to the tank.

3. The regulator piston moves rapidly to the low-pressure stud, allows full bypass from the
pump to the tank, and relieves the excess pressure.

4. The system only maintains relief pressure as long as the pump continues to run.

Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw

High-Pressure
Relief Pilot TANK MAIN FLOW
Up Slow Solenoid
(Closed)
CONTROL FLOW

Up Slowdown
Adjustment Regulator
Piston

Low
Pressure Ad-
justment

Pressure Control
Piston

Up Stop
Adjustment

Up Pilot Piston

Up Fast Solenoid
(Open)

Up Start Adjustment

PUMP JACK
Up Leveling Speed Adjustment Check Valve
Piston

Figure 8 - High-Pressure Relief Diagram

54 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Sequence of Events

Up Slowdown and Sequence of Events

Leveling Speed
1. From slowdown to leveling speed, the up fast solenoid is de-energized and the up slow
solenoid is energized. See Figure 9.
2. The pressure on the spring end of the up pilot piston is reduced, and the up pilot piston
shifts to the up position.
3. The opening to the up stop adjustment is closed and the opening to the up slowdown and
leveling adjuster is opened to the back of the regulator piston.
4. Pressure behind the regulator piston is reduced as the oil flows out through the up slow-
down adjustment. The regulator piston starts to open.
5. The opening at the up slowdown adjustment determines the rate of oil flow from the low
pressure adjustment end of the regulator piston back into tank which controls the rate of
speed change. The wider the opening, the quicker the slowdown.
6. Valve pressure drops as the regulator piston opens. This action causes the check valve
piston to begin to close.
7. When the slot on the check valve piston reaches the hole in the leveling speed adjustor,
less oil flows from behind the regulator piston.
8. When the slot has opened enough to allow the same amount of oil to flow in the leveling
speed adjustor as the amount which flows out through the up slowdown adjustment, the
system reaches a hydraulic balance, known as leveling speed.
9. The leveling speed is changed by moving the hole in the leveling speed adjustor.

Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw

High-pressure
Relief Pilot
MAIN FLOW
Up Slow Solenoid TANK
(Open) CONTROL FLOW

Up Slowdown
Adjustment Regulator
Piston

Low
Pressure Ad-
justment

Pressure Control
Piston

Up Stop
Adjustment

Up Pilot Piston

Up Fast Solenoid
(Closed)

Up Start Adjustment

PUMP JACK
Check Valve
Up Leveling Speed Adjustment Piston

Figure 9 - Up Slowdown and Leveling Speed Diagram

Printed in USA May, 2012 55

Sequence of Events I-2 / I-3 Valve

Up Stop Sequence of Events

1. The up slow solenoid is de-energized, to stop the car. The pump is kept running slightly longer
on a timed delay to provide a valve stop instead of a pump stop. See Figure 10.

2. With pressure equalized on both ends of the up pilot piston, the spring will park the piston in
the down position. In this position, the openings of the up slowdown and leveling adjuster will
be closed and the opening of the up stop adjustment will be open.

3. The up stop adjustment allows flow out from behind the regulator piston and causes the pres-
sure to drop.

4. Decreased oil pressure on the back of the regulator piston allows pressure from the jack (with
the spring force) to push the piston against the low pressure adjustment stud allowing full
bypass. At the same time, the check valve piston closes.

5. Stop rate is controlled by the opening at the stop adjustment. The wider the opening, the faster
the stop.

Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw

High-pressure
Relief Pilot
Up Slow Solenoid TANK
(Closed) CONTROL FLOW

Up Slowdown
Adjustment Regulator
Piston

Low
Pressure
Adjustment

Pressure Control
Piston

Up Stop
Adjustment

Up Pilot Piston

Up Fast Solenoid
(Closed)

Up Start Adjustment PUMP JACK

Check Valve
Up Leveling Speed Adjustment Piston

Figure 10 - Up Stop Diagram

56 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Sequence of Events

Down Valve Section The down portion of the valve consists of a piston that seats and can be controlled in these
positions:
• Closed to stop the car
• Partially open for slow speed
• Fully open for high speed

Down Start and

Full Speed Sequence of Events

1. To start the car down, the down fast and down slow solenoids are energized simultaneously,
allowing the oil behind the piston to flow to the tank through the down start adjustment. See
Figure 11.

2. The reduction in pressure behind the piston causes the piston to lift. It is essential that the
down start adjustment be open more than the down stop adjustment so that the oil entering
through the down stop adjustment can be drained to the tank.

3. The size of the openings will govern how fast the piston moves and how rapidly the car starts.
The lowering speed adjustment limits the amount the piston can open, thereby controlling the
car down speed.

Down Slow
TANK Lowering Piston
Solenoid (Open)

Down Start
Adjustment

Manual Lowering

Down Slowdown
Adjustment

Down Fast
Solenoid
(Open)

Lowering Speed Adjustment

Down Stop Adjustment

MAIN FLOW

Check Valve CONTROL FLOW

Piston
PUMP JACK

Figure 11 - Down Start and Full Speed Diagram

Printed in USA May, 2012 57

Sequence of Events I-2 / I-3 Valve

Down Slowdown
and Leveling Sequence of Events

1. To change to leveling speed, the down fast solenoid is closed. The lowering piston starts in the
full open position and the oil passage to the tank is blocked by the piston skirt. See Figure 12.

2. Oil flows in through the down stop adjustment to the rear of the lowering piston, and out
through the slowdown adjustment. The down slow solenoid and the down start adjustment,
causes the lowering piston to move toward the closed position. The amount that the down
slowdown adjustment is closed governs how fast the piston moves and how rapidly the car
slows down.

3. The piston will stop once the oil passage to the tank (through the down slow solenoid) is
opened by the skirt of the piston.

4. The lowering speed is controlled by turning the lowering and leveling adjustment in increments
of full half-turns. The leveling speed is controlled by turning the lowering and leveling adjust-
ment in less than one-quarter-turn increments.

Lowering Piston Piston Skirt

TANK Down Slow Solenoid (Open)

Down Start
Adjustment

Manual Lowering

Down Slowdown
Adjustment

Down Fast
Solenoid
(Closed)
Lowering Speed Adjustment

Down Stop Adjustment

MAIN FLOW
CONTROL FLOW

PUMP JACK Check Valve Piston

Figure 12 - Down Slowdown and Leveling Diagram

58 Vertical Express
I-2 / I-3 Valve Sequence of Events

Manual Lowering The manual lowering valve is parallel to the down slow solenoid and when opened, allows the car to
be lowered at leveling speed during emergencies.

Down Stop 1. To stop the car, the down slow solenoid is de-energized, stopping all flow to the tank. Pressure
from the jack and the spring will cause the piston to close. See Figure 13.

2. The rate of closing and the smoothness is controlled by the down stop adjustment.

Lowering Piston Down Slow Solenoid (Open)

TANK

Down Start
Adjustment

Manual Lowering

Down Slowdown
Adjustment

Down Fast
Solenoid
(Open)

Lowering Speed Adjustment

Down Stop Adjustment

MAIN FLOW
CONTROL FLOW
Check Valve Piston
PUMP JACK

Figure 13 - Down Stop Diagram

Printed in USA May, 2012 59

 I-2 / I-3 Valve

This page
intentionally
left blank.

60 Vertical Express
 Vertical Express
P.O. Box 2019 Memphis, TN 38101 Tel: (866) 448-3789 (toll-free) Fax: (901) 261-1807 www.verticalxpress.com
All illustrations and specifications are based on information in effect at the time of publication approval. Vertical Express reserves the right to change
specification or designs and to discontinue items without prior notification or obligation. v.Y.m. Copyright © 2012 Vertical Express Elevator